OMB-DBK Option Cards and Modules - Omega Engineering

User’s Guide 

Shop online at 

omega.com 

e-mail: info@omega.com 

For latest product manuals: 

omegamanual.info 

OMB-DBK Option Cards and Modules 

Part 1 of 2, Through OMB-DBK-34A 

OMB-457-0911 rev 8.1

OMEGAnet ® Online Service Internet e-mail 

omega.com info@omega.com 

Servicing North America: 

U.S.A.: One Omega Drive, P.O. Box 4047 

ISO 9001 Certified Stamford, CT 06907-0047 

TEL: (203) 359-1660 FAX: (203) 359-7700 

e-mail: info@omega.com 

Canada: 976 Bergar 

Laval (Quebec) H7L 5A1, Canada 

TEL: (514) 856-6928 FAX: (514) 856-6886 

e-mail: info@omega.ca 

For immediate technical or application assistance: 

U.S.A. and Canada: Sales Service: 1-800-826-6342 / 1-800-TC-OMEGA ® 

Customer Service: 1-800-622-2378 / 1-800-622-BEST ® 

Engineering Service: 1-800-872-9436 / 1-800-USA-WHEN ® 

Mexico: En Español: (001) 203-359-7803 e-mail: espanol@omega.com 

FAX: (001) 203-359-7807 info@omega.com.mx 

Servicing Europe: 

Benelux: Postbus 8034, 1180 LA Amstelveen, The Netherlands 

TEL: +31 (0)20 3472121 FAX: +31 (0)20 6434643 

Toll Free in Benelux: 0800 0993344 

e-mail: sales@omegaeng.nl 

Czech Republic: Frystatska 184, 733 01 Karviná, Czech Republic 

TEL: +420 (0)59 6311899 FAX: +420 (0)59 6311114 

Toll Free: 0800-1-66342 e-mail: info@omegashop.cz 

France: 11, rue Jacques Cartier, 78280 Guyancourt, France 

TEL: +33 (0)1 61 37 2900 FAX: +33 (0)1 30 57 5427 

Toll Free in France: 0800 466 342 

e-mail: sales@omega.fr 

Germany/Austria: Daimlerstrasse 26, D-75392 Deckenpfronn, Germany 

TEL: +49 (0)7056 9398-0 FAX: +49 (0)7056 9398-29 

Toll Free in Germany: 0800 639 7678 

e-mail: info@omega.de 

United Kingdom: One Omega Drive, River Bend Technology Centre 

ISO 9002 Certified Northbank, Irlam, Manchester 

M44 5BD United Kingdom 

TEL: +44 (0)161 777 6611 FAX: +44 (0)161 777 6622 

Toll Free in United Kingdom: 0800-488-488 

e-mail: sales@omega.co.uk 

It is the policy of OMEGA Engineering, Inc. to comply with all worldwide safety and EMC/EMI 

regulations that apply. OMEGA is constantly pursuing certification of its products to the European New 

Approach Directives. OMEGA will add the CE mark to every appropriate device upon certification. 

The information contained in this document is believed to be correct, but OMEGA accepts no liability for any 

errors it contains, and reserves the right to alter specifications without notice. 

WARNING: These products are not designed for use in, and should not be used for, human applications.

Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips 

Refer all service to qualified personnel. This symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage under 

noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual. Using 

this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment 

damage. 

This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible injury or death from electrical 

shock under noted conditions. 

This ESD caution symbol urges proper handling of equipment or components sensitive to damage from electrostatic 

discharge. Proper handling guidelines include the use of grounded anti-static mats and wrist straps, ESD-protective 

bags and cartons, and related procedures. 

This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These notes can be of 

great benefit to the user, and should be read. 

In this manual, the book symbol always precedes the words “Reference Note.” This type of note identifies the location 

of additional information that may prove helpful. References may be made to other chapters or other documentation. 

Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may include additional 

reference. 

Specifications and Calibration 

Specifications are subject to change without notice. Significant changes will be addressed in an addendum or revision to 

the manual. As applicable, we calibrate our hardware to published specifications. Periodic hardware calibration is not 

covered under the warranty and must be performed by qualified personnel as specified in this manual. Improper 

calibration procedures may void the warranty. 

iii

iv 

Your order was carefully inspected prior to shipment. When you receive your order, carefully 

unpack all items from the shipping carton and check for physical signs of damage that may have 

occurred during shipment. Promptly report any damage to the shipping agent and your sales 

representative. Retain all shipping materials in case the unit needs returned to the factory. 

CAUTION 

Using this equipment in ways other than described in this manual can cause 

personal injury or equipment damage. Before setting up and using your 

equipment, you should read all documentation that covers your system. 

Pay special attention to Warnings and Cautions. 

Note: During software installation, Adobe ® PDF versions of user manuals will automatically 

install onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the 

Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Initial 

navigation is as follows: 

Start [Desktop “Start” pull-down menu] 

⇒ Programs 

⇒ Omega DaqX Software 

You can also access the PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD by using 

the button located on the opening screen. 

Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both hardware and software. 

A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader ® is included on your CD. The Reader provides 

a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of 

the manuals can be ordered from the factory.

Part 1 of 2 

DBK Options 

General Information through DBK34A 

© 1998 through 2005 917594 Part 1 of 2 Printed in the United States of America

Manual Layout 

This user’s manual includes several chapters and independent DBK sections. It also includes DBK 

Basics, which is a stand alone document. 

DBK Basics – Explains what DBKs are and uses tables to identify the various types of DBKs. The 

document module includes: tips for setting up a data acquisition system, how to determine system power 

requirements, and various power options. 

Chapters* 

1 – Signal Management. Discusses signal management and signal conditioning, and CE compliance 

information. 

2 – System Connections and Pinouts. Provides instructions for connecting a DBK option to a Daq 

or LogBook device. Pinouts are included for the P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors, as well as the 

100-pin P4 connector used by /2000 Series Devices. 

3 – DBK Set Up in DaqView. Provides instruction for setting up analog and digital DBKs in 

DaqView’s Hardware Configuration screen. 

4 – DBK Set Up in LogView. Provides instruction for setting up analog and digital DBKs in 

LogView’s Hardware Configuration window. 

5 – Troubleshooting. Explains solutions to common noise, wiring, and configuration problems. 

Dimensional Drawings 

DBK Cards and Modules** – Independent DBK documentation is provided in alphanumeric order on a 

DBK by DBK basis. Refer to the Table of Contents for a complete list. 

Documentation for discontinued DBKs [listed at the end of the Table of Contents] is not included in the 

DBK Options Manual, but can be downloaded or read from our website. 

Note: During software installation, Adobe ® PDF versions of user manuals will automatically install onto your 

hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group, which can be 

accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for details regarding both 

hardware and software. 

A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader ® is included on your CD. The Reader provides a means of 

reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions of the manuals can be ordered 

from the factory. 

Note that you can access PDF documents directly from the data acquisition CD via the 

button located on the CD’s opening screen. 

* The chapters are included in Part 1 of the DBK Options Manual. DBKs up to and including DBK34A are also 

included in Part 1. 

** Part 2 of the manual begins with DBK41. 

DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual 917094 v

Table of Contents 

DBK Basics 

Introduction…… DBK Basics-1 

How Do DBKs Connect? …… DBK Basics- 2 

DBK Identification Tables ….. DBK Basics-9 

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition 

System …… DBK Basics-12 

Power Supplies & Connectors …… DBK Basics-14 

An Introduction to Power-Related 

DBKs …… DBK Basics-15 

Power Requirements...... DBK Basics-16 

Calculating Your System’s Power 

Needs …… DBK Basics-18 

Additional Reading ….. DBK Basics-21 

1 - Signal Management 

Signal Modes ...... 1-1 

System Noise ...... 1-5 

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal 

Conditioning ...... 1-6 

Channel Control and Expansion ...... 1-7 

Signal Acquisition ...... 1-9 

Sequencer ...... 1-9 

Scan Rate ...... 1-10 

Triggering ...... 1-10 

Counter/Timer Functions ...... 1-11 

Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) ...... 1-11 

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature 

Measurement System ...... 1-12 

Overview ...... 1-12 

An Example of Two-Point Calibration ...... 1-13 

Calculation of Scale and Offset ...... 1-14 

Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in 

DaqView ...... 1-14 

Converting Degrees from Celsius to 

Fahrenheit ...... 1-14 

One Known Temperature Environment ...... 1-15 

Use of a Temperature Calibrator ...... 1-15 

CE Compliance ...... 1-15 

CE Standards and Directives ...... 1-16 

Safety Conditions ...... 1-16 

Emissions/Immunity Conditions ...... 1-17 

CE Enhancements for Existing Products ...... 1-17 

2 – System Connections and Pinouts 

Overview …… 2-1 

P1 – DB37 for Analog I/O …… 2-3 

P2 – DB37 for Digital I/O …… 2-4 

P3 – DB37 for Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed 

Digital I/O …… 2-5 

P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-6 

Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, P3 …… 2-9 

3 – DBK Set Up in DaqView 


Setting Up Analog DBKs …… 3-5 

Setting Up Digital DBKs …… 3-7 

Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz …3-9 

4 – DBK Set Up in LogView 


Setting Up Analog DBKs …… 4-4 

Setting Up Digital DBKs …… 4-7 

5 – Troubleshooting 

ESD Handling Notice …… 5-1 

Troubleshooting Checklist……5-1 

Frequently Asked Questions ……5-3 

Customer Assistance……5-6 


DBK Documents 

DBK1, 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module 

DBK2, 4-Channel Voltage Output Card 

DBK4, 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card 

DBK5, 4-Channel Current Output Card 

DBK7, 4-Ch. Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card 

DBK8, 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card 

DBK9, 8-Channel RTD Card 

DBK10, 3-Slot Expansion Chassis 

DBK11A, Screw-Terminal & BNC Option Card 

DBK15, Universal Current, Voltage Input Card 

DBK16, 2-Channel Strain-Gage Card 

DBK17, 4-Channel Simultaneous Sample and 

Hold Card 

DBK18, 4-Channel, Low-Pass Filter Card 

DBK20 and DBK21, Digital I/O Cards 

DBK23, Isolated Digital Input Chassis 

DBK24, Isolated Digital Output Chassis 

DBK25, 8-Channel Relay Output Card 

DBK30A, Rechargeable Battery Module 

DBK32A, Auxiliary Power Supply Card 

DBK34A, UPS / Battery Module 

vi 917094 DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual

Part 2 

DBK41, 10-Slot Expansion Module 

DBK42, 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module 

DBK43A, 8-Channel Strain-Gage Module 

DBK44, 2-Ch. 5B Signal-Conditioning Card 

DBK45, 4-Ch. SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card 

DBK46, 4-Channel Analog Output Card 

DBK48, Multipurpose Isolated Signal- 

Conditioning Module (supports up to 16 8B 

Modules) 

DBK50 and DBK51, Voltage Input Modules 

DBK55, 8-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input 

Module 


DBK65, 8-Channel Transducer Interface Module 

DBK70, Vehicle Network Interface, Analog 

Multiplexer Module (see p/n 1056-0901) 

DBK80, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Card 

with Excitation Output 

DBK81, 7-Ch. T/C Card 

DBK82, 14-Ch. T/C Card 

DBK83, 14-Ch. T/C Card, uses external 

connection pod 

DBK84, 14-Ch. T/C Module 

DBK85, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module 

DBK90, 56-Ch. T/C Module 

DBK100 Series, (DBK100/D, 100/T,101) 

In-Vehicle Thermocouple Measurement System 

DBK200 Series Matrix 

DBK200, P4-to-P1 Adapter Board 

DBK202, DBK203, DBK204 Series 

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapters 

DBK206, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with 

Screw Terminals 

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, 16-Channel, 

5B Carrier Boards 

DBK208, Relay Carrier Board, 

Opto-22 Compatible 

DBK209, P4 to P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board 

DBK210, 32-Ch. Digital I/O Carrier Board 

DBK213, Screw-Terminal & Expansion Module 

3-Card Slot, P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility 

DBK214, 16-Connector BNC Interface Module 

P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility 

DBK215, 16-Connector BNC Connection Module 

with 68-Pin SCSI Adaptability 

DBK601 thru DBK609, Termination Panels 

Discontinued DBKs 

The following DBKs have been discontinued. 

However, you may contact the factory if you 

need documentation for these devices. 

DBK12 and DBK13, A/I Multiplexer Cards 

DBK19, 14-Channel Thermocouple Card 

DBK33, Triple-Output Power Supply Card 

DBK34, Vehicle UPS Module 

DBK40, 18-Connector BNC Analog Interface 

DBK52, 14-Ch. Thermocouple Input Module 

DBK53 and DBK54, Analog Multiplexing 

Modules 

DBK201, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board 

DBK603, Termination Panel, Safety Jacks, SE 

DBK605-B, Termination Panel, T/C, B Type, DE 

DBK605-R, Termination Panel, T/C, R Type, DE 

DBK605-S, Termination Panel, T/C, S Type, DE 

DBK605-U, Termination Panel, T/C, U Type, DE 

DBK609, Termination Panel, 5-Pin DIN 

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual 917094 vii

This page is intentionally blank. 

viii 917594 DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual

DBK Basics 

Introduction 

This “DBK Basics” section of the manual does not apply to DaqBoard/500 Series or DaqBoard/1000 

Series boards. Those boards are not intended for use with DBK options; nor will they support such 

options. 

Introduction…… 1 

How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device? …… 2 

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks … 2 

Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards ……3 

Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards …… 4 

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices …… 5 

DBK Identification Tables ….. 9 

Analog Output DBKs …… 9 

Digital I/O Control DBKs …… 9 

Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs …… 9 

Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs …… 10 

Power Supply DBKs …… 12 

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System …… 12 

Power Supplies and Power Connectors ……14 

An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs ….. 15 

Power Requirements …… 16 

Calculating Your System’s Power Needs …… 18 

Additional Reading ….. 21 

CAUTION 

Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables or 

setting configuration jumpers and switches. Electrical shock or damage to 

equipment can result even under low-voltage conditions. 

CAUTION 

The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components. 

Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should 

always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or 

circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD 

controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and 

wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures. 

The term “DBK” typically refers to a card or module that is used to expand or enhance a primary data 

acquisition device, such as a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook. As will be seen in the upcoming DBK 

identification tables, DBKs provide a wide variety of data acquisition functions. Depending on the DBKs 

used, one or more of the following can be realized: 

• signal conditioning 

• analog output 

• digital I/O 

• channel expansion 

• supplying powering to another acquisition device 

• providing an interface for different connectivity; for example, in a DaqBoard/2000 Series board, 

converting a P4, 100-pin connector to P1, P2, and P3 37-pin, DB37 connectors. 

Daq Systems 886995 DBK Basics, pg. 1

Reference Notes: During software installation, Adobe ® PDF versions of user manuals will 

automatically install onto your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location 

is in the Programs group, which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the 

PDF documentation, especially the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual 

(p/n 457-0905) for details regarding both hardware and software in relevant to DBKs. 

A copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader ® is included on your CD. The Acrobat Reader 

provides a means of reading and printing the PDF documents. Note that hardcopy versions 

of the manuals can be ordered from the factory. 

How Do DBKs Connect to the Data Acquisition Device? 

Each DBK connects to the primary data acquisition device; e.g., a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook, 

through one of three 37-pin ports, which are designated as follows: 

• P1 – Analog I/O 

• P2 – Digital I/O 

• P3 – Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O 

Depending on the primary data acquisition device, connectivity issues differ slightly. This will be made 

clear by the figures and accompanying text that follow. 

Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/100/200 Series Devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, & LogBooks 

Reference Notes: 

o DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series users, refer to page 4. 

o DaqBook/2000 Series users, refer to page 5. 

For DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, ISA-Type DaqBoards, and LogBooks, DBK 

connections are not made directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates the 

number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a DB37 

connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cable includes three additional 

DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will 

allow up to 16 DBKs to be added. The CA-37-x cable system is excellent for DaqBooks, LogBooks, and 

ISA-type DaqBoards. 

/100 /200 Series 

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/100 Series or /200 Series Device 

pg. 2, DBK Basics 967794 Daq Systems

The previous figure applies to LogBooks, DaqBook/100/200 Series devices, and ISA-type DaqBoards. As 

will be seen elsewhere in this document, some devices do not include all three connectors, i.e., P1, P2, and 

P3. 

Connecting DBKs to Daq PC-Cards 

The Daq PC-Card is only intended for connections to a P1 connector of a single “passive” DBK card or 

module. A passive DBK card or module is one that provides a desired connectivity (such as BNCs or screw 

terminals), but performs no signal conditioning. 

A CA-134 Interface Cable and a CN-86-F (dual DB37 female adapter) are used to provide the DB37, 

P1 connector. 

Daq PC-Card Cabling 

The CA-134 cable connects to a CN-86-F adapter, which then connects to a single “passive” card or module. 

The passive DBKs are: 

• DBK1 – 16 Connector BNC Module 

• DBK11A – Screw Terminal Option Card 

• DBK40 – BNC Analog Interface 

Reference Note: 

For information regarding the passive DBKs (DBK1, DBK11A, and DBK40), refer to 

the DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905). 


Connecting DBKs to DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards 

DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000 Series boards have 100-pin connectors designated as P4. 

The 100 pins correlate to various pins on P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors.* Connectivity in the system is as 

follows (see figure). 

• Both the DaqBoard/2000 and /2000c Series board connect to a CA-195 cable. 

The cable has two, 100-pin, P4 connectors. 

• The CA-195 connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board or adapter module for 100-pin to 

37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three.* 

• The DBK200 Series adapter connects to a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates the 

number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to providing a 

DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 cable 

includes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to 

one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added. 

• The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example, 

Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3. 

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBoard/2000 Series Board 

* DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c are exceptions to the above connectivity method. The /2003 

board typically connects directly to a DBK205 (P4-to-Screw Terminal Adapter), as discussed in the DBK 

Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905). 

Note: DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, which are discussed in the following section, can also connect to DBKs via 

a P4 connector, as indicated in the above figure. 


Connecting DBKs to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices 

Several products make use of the DaqBook/2000 nomenclature. However, they do not all offer the same 

connection options. Refer to pinouts for the specific devices, as needed. 

Product Connects to DBK Expansions via … 

DaqBook/2001 and /2005 37-pin connectors P1, P2, and P3. There is no P4. 

DaqBook/2020 37-pin connectors P1 and P2. There is no P3 or P4. 

DaqOEM/2001 and /2005 40-pin headers (JP1, JP2, and JP3). There is no P4. 

DaqBook/2000A 37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector. 

DaqBook/2000E 37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector. 

DaqBook/2000X 37-pin connectors P1, P2, P3, and a 100-pin P4 connector. 

For DaqBook/2000 Series devices, DBK connections can be made to Ports P1, P2, and/or P3 (when 

applicable). For the “AEX” models a 100-pin P4 connector can be used. A discussion of both methods, 

follows. 

The P4 connector on a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device shares signal connections with the 

P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. Connecting a DBK200 Series 

Option to P4 via a CA-195 cable distances the P1, P2, P3 connection from the 

DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following 

Caution. 

CAUTION 

Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its 

P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible equipment damage. 

Therefore, when connections have been made to P1, P2, and/or P3, use caution when 

making connections through P4, and visa versa. 

Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections. 

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first 

method is preferable, as it introduces less noise. 

Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector 

[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the 

free end of the cable to the DBK card or module. 

Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the 

DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable 

to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the 

DBK200 Series device, as applicable. 

The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a 

DaqBook/2000 Series device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals 

and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of 

isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cable 

connected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable. 

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1) 

will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method]. 


Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and/or P3 

The DBKs do not connect directly to the port, but through a CA-37-x ribbon cable, where “x” indicates the 

number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, a CA-37-3 cable includes a 37-pin mating 

connector to interface with the DaqBook/2000 Series DB37 connector (P1, P2, P3); it also includes three 

additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three DBKs to one port. Use of a 

CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added to one DaqBook/2000 Series device DB37-type port. 

DaqBook/2000 

Series Device 

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 Series Device via P1, P2, and P3 




DaqBook/2000 Series device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following 

Caution. 

CAUTION 

Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its 




The following pinouts indicate the P1, P2, and P3 pins, and their P4 equivalents. 

Use the pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections. 


Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” Device via P4 

Every DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device has a 100-pin connector designated as P4. The P4 pins correlate to 

various pins on P1, P2, and P3. 




DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. It does not provide any new signal I/O. See the following 

Caution. 

CAUTION 

Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 AEX device’s P1, P2, P3 connectors and its 




Refer to P1, P2, P3, and P4 pinouts to avoid making duplicate signal connections. 

A brief explanation of P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 AEX devices follows the illustration. 

DaqBook/2000 

Series Device 

Daq Systems 967794 DBK Basics, pg. 7 

P4 

Connecting DBKs to a DaqBook/2000 AEX Device via P4 

DaqBook/2001, DaqBook/2005, DaqOEM/2001, DaqOEM/2005, and DaqBook/2020 do 

not have a P4 connector. The P4 connection option applies to “AEX” models only.

P4 connectivity for DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices is as follows: 

• One end of a CA-195 cable connects to the DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s 100-pin P4 

connector. Note that the CA-195 cable has two P4 connectors. 

• The other end of the CA-195 cable connects to a DBK200 Series adapter board [or adapter 

module] for 100-pin to 37-pin adaptations, e.g., P4-to-P1, P2, P3; but not necessarily all three. 

• The DBK200 Series adapter connects to one or more CA-37-x ribbon cables, where “x” 

indicates the number of expansion devices that can be connected. For example, in addition to 

providing a DB37 connector to interface with the primary data acquisition device, a CA-37-3 

cable includes three additional DB37 connectors. These provide a means of adding three 

DBKs to one port. Use of a CA-37-16 cable will allow up to 16 DBKs to be added. 

• The CA-37-x cable connects to expansion DBKs, in accordance with port type. For example, 

Analog DBKs to port P1, Digital DBKs to port P2, and passive DBKs to port P3. 

There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device. The first 

method is preferable, as it introduces less noise. 

Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector 

[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the 

free end of the cable to the DBK card or module. 

Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the 

DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable 

to a DBK200 Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the 

DBK200 Series device, as applicable. 

The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a 

DaqBook/2000 “AEX” device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals 

and the P2 connector pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of 

isolation between the two signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cable 

connected to P4, digital and analog signals co-exist in one cable. 

If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1) 

will result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method]. 

The CE Cable Kit, p/n CA-209D, may be required for systems that require a P4 cable 

length of 3 feet. The CA-209D kit includes a shielded version of the CA-195 cable, two 

grounding pigtails, and associated cable clamps. When properly connected, the shielded 

cable provides greater immunity to noise. The CE Compliance chapter includes details. 


DBK Identification Tables 

Analog Output DBKs 

Digital I/O Control DBKs 

Analog Output 

Product Name/Description I/O Connects To: 

DBK2 Voltage Output Card 4 channels P1 

DBK5 Current Output Card 4 channels P1 

DBK46 Analog Output Card option for designated devices 4 channels Internal 

PC Board 

Digital I/O / Control 


DBK20 General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (Screw Terminals) 48 channels P2 

DBK21 General-Purpose Digital I/O Card (DB37 Connectors) 48 channels P2 

DBK23 Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module 24 channels P2 

DBK24 Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module 24 channels P2 

DBK25 Relay Output Card 8 channels P2 

DBK208 Carrier board for Opto-22 Compatible SSR Digital Modules. 16 Channels P2 or P4 

DBK210 Carrier Board for Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-Modules 32 Channels P2 or P4, P1 exp. 

Notes o P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c 

Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards). 

o For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to 

100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, 

DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details. 

o DaqBoard/500 Series boards do not support DBK options. 


o DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector. 


Analog Signal Conditioning DBKs 

The DBKs that are used for analog signal conditioning attach to transducers and condition their outputs into 

analog voltages. An A/D converter, located in the primary acquisition device, measures the analog voltages. 

There are many signal-conditioning solutions available (and more are in development). Note that DBK 

high-capacity modules require more circuitry than can fit on a compact card. 

Analog Signal Conditioning 


DBK4 Dynamic Signal Input Card 2 channels P1 

DBK7 Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card 4 channels P1 

DBK8 High-Voltage Input Card 8 channels P1 

DBK9 RTD Measurement Card 8 channels P1 

DBK12 Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card See note 2 16 channels P1 

DBK13 High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Card See note 2 16 channels P1 

DBK15 Universal Current/Voltage Input Card See note 2 16 channels P1 

DBK16 Strain-Gage Measurement Card 2 channels P1 

DBK17 Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card 4 channels P1 

DBK18 Low-Pass Filter Card 4 channels P1 

DBK19 Thermocouple Card See note 2 14 channels P1 

DBK42 5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module 16 channels P1 

DBK43A Strain-Gage Measurement Module 8 channels P1 

DBK44 5B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Card 2 channels P1 

DBK45 SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card 4 channels P1 

DBK48 8B Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module 16 channels P1 

DBK50 Isolated High-Voltage Input Module 8 channels P1 

DBK51 Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module 8 channels P1 

DBK52 Thermocouple Input Module See note 2 14 channels P1 

DBK53 Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module See note 2 16 channels P1 

DBK54 High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module See note 2 16 channels P1 

DBK55 Frequency to Voltage Module 8 channels P1 

DBK65 Channel Transducer Interface Module 8 channels P1 

DBK70 Vehicle Network Interface, Analog Multiplexer Module 16 channels P1 

DBK80 Differential Voltage Input Card with Excitation Output 16 channels P1 

DBK81 Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy 7 channels P1 

DBK82 Thermocouple Card, High-Accuracy 14 channels P1 

DBK83 Thermal Couple Card, High-Accuracy; uses Connection Pod 14 channels P1 

DBK84 Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy 14 channels P1 

DBK85 Differential Voltage Module 16 channels P1 

DBK90 Thermocouple Module, High-Accuracy 56 channels P1 

DBK207 Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules 16 channels P1 or P4 

DBK207/CJC Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Analog Input Modules. 

DBK207/CJC includes cold junction compensation (CJC) 

16 channels P1 or P4 

Notes o P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards or /2000c 

Series boards, but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series boards). 

o For DaqBoard/2000 Series devices, unless otherwise noted, the internal clocks should be set to 

100 kHz when used with any of the following DBK options: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, 

DBK52, DBK53, and DBK54. See specific DBK section for details. 



o DaqBook/2000 “AEX” devices have P1, P2, and P3 connectors and, in addition a P4 connector. 


Expansion and Terminal Panel Connection DBKs 

The following DBKs offer provide various expansion and connection options. The stackable 3-slot DBK10 

low-profile enclosure can be used for up to three DBKs. If a system has more than 3 DBKs, the 10-slot 

DBK41 can be used. Several DBK41s can be daisy-chained to accommodate many DBKs in one system. 

Expansion and Connection, General 


DBK1 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module 16 connectors P1 

DBK10 3-Slot Expansion Chassis 3 cards P1, P2, or P3 

DBK11A Screw-Terminal Option Card (DB37-Screw Terminal Block) Component 

sockets 

P1, P2, or P3 

DBK40 BNC Interface 18 connectors P1 

DBK41 Analog Expansion Enclosure 10 cards P1 

DBK60 Expansion Chassis with Termination Panels 3 cards P1 or P2 

Termination Panels, Connectivity for DaqBoard/260 


DBK601 Termination Panel - Blank rear panel none N/A 

DBK602 Termination Panel - BNC rear panel 16 connectors DBK Card 

DBK603 Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, single ended 16 connectors DBK Card 

DBK604 Termination Panel - Safety Jacks, differential 8 differential (16) DBK Card 

DBK605 Termination Panels - Thermocouple, differential panels; 

specify type: B, J, K, R, S, or T 

16 differential DBK Card 

DBK606 Termination Panel – 3 Terminal Blocks; 16 connections per TB 48 connectors DBK Card 

DBK607 Termination Panel – strain relief clamp none N/A 

DBK608 Termination Panel – 3 female DB37 connectors three DB37 DBK Card 

Several signal connection options were developed primarily for use with DaqBoard/2000 Series and 

cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards. The DBK200 Series P4-Adapter documentation provides the basic 

connection concepts. That information, along with the related DBK subsections should enable you to set up 

your desired configuration. 

Connection Interface Boards and Modules 

Product Description I/O Connects To: 

DBK200 P4-to-P1 Adapter Board P1 P4 

DBK201 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board P1, P2, P3 P4 

DBK202 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals P1, P2, P3 * P4 

DBK203 A module version of DBK202 P1, P2, P3 * P4 

DBK204 A module version of DBK202 with an included CE cable kit. P1, P2, P3 * P4 

DBK205 P4-to-TB1 12-slot Screw Terminal Block for DaqBoard/2003. TB1, 12-slot P4 

DBK206 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw-Terminals P1, P2, P3 * P4 

DBK209 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board P1, P2, P3 * P4 

DBK213 3 card slots, Screw Terminal & Expansion Module P1, P2, P3 * P1, P2, P3, P4 

DBK214 16-Connector BNC Interface Module, with Screw-Terminals P1, P2, P3, BNC * P1, P2, P3, P4 

DBK215 16-Connector BNC Connection Module with Screw-Terminals; 

for use withDaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series 

BNC * SCSI 68 

Note 1: P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors do not exist on the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards, 

but are obtained by using P4 adapters (DBK200 series). These adapters typically connect to the 

DaqBoard/2000 Series [/2000c Series] 100-pin P4 connector via cable. 

Note 2: DBK215 is only for use with DaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series. It cannot be used with 

DaqBoard/2000 Series devices. 

* 

An asterisk in the I/O column indicates that the associated device includes screw-terminal blocks. 


Power Supply DBKs 

Power supply type DBKs are typically used in laboratory, automotive, and field applications. Input power 

can come from any +10 to +20 VDC source, or from an AC source by using an appropriately rated AC-to- 

DC adapter. The DBK30A rechargeable power supply can power DBK modules where AC mains are not 

available (the DBK30A outputs 28 V for powering transducers). For a large number of DBK cards, the 

DBK32A or DBK33 can be installed into an expansion slot. The DBK33 is used when +5 V is required in 

addition to ±15 VDC. The DBK34 provides a steady 12 or 24 VDC while working with vehicle electrical 

systems that may be turned on or off during testing. 

Power Supply 

Product Name/Description Power 

DBK30A Rechargeable Battery/Excitation Module +12-14, 24-28 VDC (3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC) 

DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card ±15 V @ 500 mA 

DBK33 Triple-Output Power Supply Card ±15 V @ 250 mA; +5 V @ 1 A 

DBK34 Vehicle UPS Module 12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC) 

DBK34A UPS Battery Module 12/24 VDC (5 A-hr @12 VDC) 

Tips on Setting up a Data Acquisition System 

A successful installation involves setting up equipment and setting software parameters. In addition to this 

manual, you may need to consult your Daq device or LogBook user’s manual. 

DBKs should be configured before connections are made and power is applied. This sequence can prevent 

equipment damage and will help ensure proper operation on startup. Many DBKs have on-board jumpers 

and/or DIP switches that are used for setting channels and other variables. You will need to refer to the 

individual DBK document modules to ensure that the DBKs are properly configured for you application. 

Prior to designing or setting up a custom data acquisition system, you should review the following tips. 

After reviewing the material you can write out the steps to setup a system that will best meet your specific 

application needs. 

1. The end use of the acquisition data should be used to determine how you set up and program your 

acquisition system. Prior to creating the system you should understand its layout and know how you are 

going to assign the channels. If you can answer the following questions you are off to a good start. If 

not, you need to find the answers. 

• What engineering units, ranges, sampling rates, etc. are best for your data? 

• Will the data be charted graphically, statistically processed, or exported to other programs? 

• How will the data be used? 

• How will the data be saved? 

• What are the system power requirements? Using several DBKs or transducers that require 

excitation current may require an extra power supply, e.g., a DBK32A. 

2. Assign channel numbers. 

3. Plan the location of transducers, cable runs, DBKs, the acquisition device [LogBook or Daq device], 

and the computer. Label your transducers, cables, and connectors to prevent later confusion. 


4. When configuring your LogBook or Daq device(s) consider the following: 

• LogBook calibration is typically performed automatically through LogView software; 

however, some DBKs may require manual calibration. 

• The DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series devices, and DaqBoards (ISA type) 

have internal jumpers and switches that you must set manually to match your 

application. 

• Some DaqBook/100 Series and DaqBook/200 Series models are partially configured in 

software. 

• DaqBook/2000 Series devices have no jumpers or internal switches and are configured 

entirely through software. 

• Daq PC-Cards are configured entirely in software. 

• DaqBoard/2000 Series boards are PCI type boards. They have no jumpers or switches and 

are configured entirely through software. 

• cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are compact PCI (cPCI) type boards. They have no 

jumpers or switches and are configured entirely through software. 

• You may need to refer to other documentation, such as Quick Starts, Installation Guides, 

User’s Manuals, and pertinent DBK document modules. 

5. Perform all hardware configurations before connecting signal and power. Remember to 

configure all the DBK cards and modules for your application. Several jumpers and DIP switches 

may need to be set (channel, gain, filters, signal mode, etc). 

6. Setting up channel parameters often requires both hardware and software setup. 

7. Route and connect all signal and power cables while all power is turned OFF. 

8. To minimize electrical noise, route all signal lines away from any RF or high-voltage devices. 

9. Follow your device’s specific installation instructions. For certain devices software should be installed 

first; for others, hardware should be installed prior to software installation. 

10. After software is loaded, remember to set the software parameters as needed for your application. 

The software must recognize all the hardware in the system. Measurement units and ranges 

should be checked to verify that they meet your application requirements. 

11. Remember to set all channels to the proper mode for your DBK or other signal source. 

12. After your system is up and running, verify proper data acquisition and data storage. 

13. Verify system accuracy; adjust ranges or calibrate as needed. 

14. Device specific information regarding system setup and expansion can be found in the Daq and 

LogBook User’s manuals; and in the applicable DBK document modules of this manual. 

15. If you are considering system expansion, review the DBK10, DBK41, and DBK60 document modules. 

The best option depends on the number of DBK cards in your system. For just a few cards, use the 

stackable 3-slot DBK10 low-profile expansion enclosure. For more than six cards, use the 10-slot 

DBK41. DBK41s can be daisy-chained to one-another to handle a large number of DBKs. 

16. In regard to power management, you should review the DBK30A, DBK32A, and DBK33 document 

modules. For portable applications, the compact DBK30A rechargeable power supply can provide 

power to the DBK10 or DBK41. The DBK30A also includes a 28 V output for powering 4 to 20 mA 

transducers. For applications with many DBK cards (initially or in future expansion), the DBK32A or 

DBK33 can be installed into any expansion slot. The DBK32A provides ±15 VDC and the DBK33 

provides ±15 VDC and +5 VDC. 


Power Supplies and Power Connectors 

Power supplies convert the raw power they receive into a lower DC voltage and/or current for use by 

devices with various power demands. Many of the power supplies that are used to power data acquisition 

equipment are of the switching-mode type. These devices provide a regulated output whether the power 

supply’s input is, for example, 60 Hz, 120 VAC as in the United States or, 50 Hz, 220 VAC as found in 

European countries. Small power supplies, that do not switch, consist of simple transformer/rectifiers and 

filtered capacitors; and operate over a smaller voltage range. 

Some manufacturers improve the power output of their units over time, without changing the model 

number. For example, one very popular power supply was previously rated at 15 VDC @ 2.7 amps, yet 

more recent versions of the same model number are rated 15 VDC @ 3.3 amps. Read the manufacturer’s 

information pertaining to your power supplies so you don’t accidentally overload the supply. 

DBKs – The following table indicates the type of power supply that is typically used with certain DBKs. 

These DBKs can be powered from a 

Switching-Mode Type Power Supply 

The switching-mode power supply typically 

receives power from a 100 to 240 VAC source at 50 

Hz to 

60 Hz and converts it to the 15 VDC required by the 

DBK. 

DBK Description DBK Description 

These DBKs can be powered from a 

Transformer/Rectifier Type, Unregulated Power Supply 

The DBKs in this column use up to15 VDC @ 

900 mA. This transformer/rectifier type power 

supply receives power from a 110 to 125 VAC 

source, at 60 Hz, and converts it to the 15 VDC 

required. 

DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card DBK23 Optically Isolated Digital-Input Module 

DBK33 Triple-Output Power Supply Card DBK24 Optically Isolated Digital-Output Module 

DBK42 5B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module DBK43A Strain Gage Measurement Module 

DBK70 Vehicle Network Interface DBK50 Isolated High-Voltage Input Module 

DBK51 Isolated Low-Voltage Input Module 

The DIN5 is the system’s basic power connector (see the following figure). The CA-115 is a 6-in. cable 

with a plug (male) DIN5 connector on both ends. The CA-115 is used to connect DBK32As [or DBK33s] 

in parallel when they are to be powered by the same power supply. 

Power Output Connector 

Male connector located on the 

power supply cable and on both 

ends of the CA-115 cable. 

Power Input Connector 

Female connector located on 

the device being powered 

(DaqBook, DBK32A, DBK33). 

DIN5 Power Connectors 

(see Notes 1 and 2) 

DIN5 Power Out 

On a DBK34 and DBK34A 

Note 1: DIN5 connectors for LogBook, DBK34, and DBK34A have threaded retaining rings. 

Note 2: In regard to the above pinout for the DBK34 and DBK34A Power Out DIN5 connector, the 28 V 

pin is only active when the device is in the 28 VDC mode; however, the 14 V pin is active 

regardless of the mode selected. 


An Introduction to Power-Related DBKs 

The power-related DBK options are the DBK30A, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK34, and DBK34A. From the 

standpoint of providing reliable power, these DBKs have proven convenient in laboratory, automotive, and 

field applications. 

Input power for these devices can come from any 10 to 20 VDC source, or from an AC source via an 

appropriate AC-to-DC adapter. 

A brief synopsis of the DBK power options follows. Refer to the respective document modules for complete 

information. 

DBK30A module - provides power at 14 and 28 VDC with a rated capacity of 3.4 A-hr @ 14 VDC. 

The DBK30A’s 28 V output will power 4 to 20 mA transducers. The module’s rechargeable power supply can 

power DBK modules in situations where AC mains are not available. 

Note: Some transducers (e.g., 2-wire 4-20 mA transmitters, bridge-configured sensors, etc) require an 

excitation voltage in order to work properly. The DBK30A supplies 14 and 28 VDC. Consult 

transducer documentation before applying power. 

DBK32A - provides ±15 VDC @ 500 mA. 

DBK33 - provides ±15 VDC @ 250 mA and +5 VDC @ 1000 mA. 

The DBK32A and DBK33 power cards attach directly to the P1 analog expansion bus where they supply 

power to DBK analog expansion cards. The DBK32A and the DBK33 can be powered from an included AC 

adapter, an optional DBK30A battery module, or from a +10 to +20 VDC source such as a car battery. 

When installed in a DBK10 three-slot expansion chassis, the DBK32A or DBK33 supplies power 

to the analog DBK [that is to receive power] via a CA-37-x cable. 

If used with the DBK41 ten-slot expansion enclosure, the DBK32A or DBK33 installs into one of the analog 

expansion slots on the DBK41’s backplane. A power card in any DBK41slot (other than the leftmost, when 

viewed from the rear) will power the other cards that are connected to the DBK41’s backplane. 

CAUTION 

If using a DBK32A or a DBK33 with a DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, or a 

DaqBoard [ISA type] device, you must entirely remove the shunt jumpers from JP1. 

Failure to do so will result in damage to the 8254 timer chip. Refer to the power card 

document modules and to the Daq device Hardware sections of the DaqBook/100 Series 

and DaqBook/200 Series, and DaqBoard [ISA] user’s manuals for JP1 locations and 

configurations. 

DBK34A module – provides 12 or 24 VDC with a 5.0 or 2.5 A-hr capacity (respectively). 

The DBK34A is classified as a UPS / Battery module. The module can be used for in-vehicle testing 

in scenarios where the vehicle’s electrical system does not affect acquisition device power during 

starter-current surge, or power-off. 


Power Requirements 

LogBook 

The improper use of power can cause system damage. The following terms are important in regard to 

understanding your system’s power needs. 

• Supply power for signal conditioning type DBKs comes from a primary acquisition device, 

such as a DaqBook/2000 Series device or LogBook, or from a power card or module. If 

needed, the DBK32A or DBK33 can provide additional power to meet DBK power demands. 

The DBK power supplies work off of low-voltage DC that can come from an AC adapter or 

from a DC source, such as a car battery. 

• Demand for power comes from DBK cards and modules [and in some systems, from 

transducers]. You should use the DBK Power Requirement Worktable to calculate your 

system’s power needs. After completing the table, compare the total power demand to the 

supply power. 

• Distribution of power to most DBKs is via the P1 interface. The DBK41 expansion chassis 

has a jumper to isolate +5 VDC power from P1. The P1 Pin designations are as follows: 

Pin 1: +5 VDC 

Pin 2: -15 VDC 

Pin 21: +15 VDC 

Pin 7: digital ground 

Pin 28: analog ground 

Pin 29: analog ground 

Note: Certain DBK modules have their own internal power supplies and require only 10 VDC to 20 VDC. 

The LogBook [with no DBKs attached] uses approximately 12 Watts of power. If using battery-power, you 

can compute operational endurance from your battery’s watt×hr rating and the following calculation tables. 

DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards 

DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards use 3.5 watts of power 

(700 mA @ 5 VDC) from their host computer. Power consumption can be up to 10 W with external 

accessories. 

Avoid power cycling the host PC. Wait 10 seconds after powering down the host PC before powering it 

back on. This will allow any residual voltages to decay enabling the DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series 

board to start up in a known good state. 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series, DaqBoard [ISA], and Daq PC-Card 

If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using 

battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables. 

Daq PC-Card and DaqBoard use power from their host PC. 

DaqBook/100 and DaqBook/200 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage from 

an AC-to-DC adapter, or another suitable source. Voltage needs are as follows: 

• +7 to +20 VDC for DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 

• +10 to +24 VDC for DaqBook/216 

• 9 to +18 VDC for DaqBook/200 and DaqBook/260. 

Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia. 


DaqBook/2000 Series Devices 

If using power from AC mains (through adapter), you need not worry about Daq device power use. If using 

battery-power, you can compute operational endurance from the battery’s watt×hr rating and power tables. 

DaqBook/2000 Series devices use no power from the PC, but do require DC voltage from an AC-to-DC 

adapter with a supply range of +10 VDC to +30 VDC, or another suitable DC source. 

Various AC adapter models support power grids of USA, Europe, Japan, and Asia. 

Power Requirements Table 

Device Power Required (Watts) 

DaqBook/100 510 mA @ 12 VDC = 6.12 W 






DaqBook/2001, /2005 1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W 


DaqOEM/2001, /2005 1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W 

DaqLab 1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W 

DaqScan 1000 mA @ 15 VDC = 15.0 W 

DaqBoard/100A 1330 mA @ 5 VDC = 6.65 W 




DaqBoard/2000 Series board 700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W 

(Note 1) 

cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board 700 mA @ 5 VDC = 3.5 W 

(Note 1) 

DaqBook/2000A 

DaqBook/2000X 

Under No External Load (0W): 

467mA @ 15VDC = 7 W 

Under Full External Load (15W): 

1533mA @ 15VDC = 23 W 

DaqBook/2000E Under No External Load (0W): 

1133mA @ 15VDC = 17 W 

Under Full External Load (15W): 

2200mA @ 15VDC = 33 W 

Daq PC-Card/112B 

Normal Operation: 

Daq PC-Card/216B 

160 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.8W 

Power Down Mode: 

40 mA @ 5 VDC = 0.2 W 

Note 1: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series boards, consumption can be 

up to 10 W with external accessories. 


Calculating Your System’s Power Needs 

Use the chart below and the worktable on the next page to ensure your system will have sufficient power. 

If the load (calculated in the worktable) exceeds available power (from the chart at the right), you must 

add a power card or a module such as a DBK32A or DBK33. 

Available Power Chart — Supply to Expansion Devices 

Product Available Power 

LogBook +5 VDC @ 0.10 A from P1-1, P2-18, P2-20, P3-20 

+15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-21 

+15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-19 

-15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-2 

-15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-37 

DaqBook/100 2100 mW 






DaqBook/2000 AEX 15000 mW; 5V at 1 A; ± 15 V at 500 mA each 

DaqBook/2001, /2005 10,000 mW 

DaqBook/2020 7,000 mW 

DaqOEM/2001, /2005 10,000 mW 

DaqLab 10,000 mW 

DaqScan 10,000 mW 

DaqBoard/100A 3300 mW 





DaqBoard/2000 Series 

& /2000c Series 

Daq PC-Card/112B 0 mW 


5000 mW; 5 V at 1 A; ±15 V at 75 mA each (with 

exception of DaqBoard/2002 and /2002c) 




DBK32 7500 mW 

DBK32A 15000 mW 


DBK34 5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A 

DBK34A 5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A 

Use the following procedure and table to calculate the required system power. 

1. In the Quantity column (5th), list the number of DBKs of that type in your system. 

2. In the Sub Total column (7th), enter the product of column 5 and column 6 (mW). 

3. Add the Sub Total column, and enter the sum at the bottom right of the table. 

This result is your power requirement in mW. 

DBK32, DBK32A, and DBK34 cannot supply +5 VDC. In cases that require +5 VDC, if 

the +5 VDC requirement exceeds 500 mW from a LogBook or Daq device, then a DBK33 

must be used. Note that DBK33 can supply 1000 mW at +5 VDC. 

Note: The DBK34 has an 8 amp fuse, and has a capacity of 5 A-hr when in the 12V mode, 

and a capacity of 2.5 A-hr when in the 24V mode. 


DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand 

DBK Voltage Reference Calculation 

Options +15 VDC -15 VDC +5 VDC Quantity × mW = Sub Total 

DBK1 0 0 0 0 

DBK2 18 mA 18 mA 5 mA 565 




DBK8 15 mA 15 mA

Additional Reading 

DBK Power Requirement Worktable—Demand 

DBK Voltage Reference Calculation 

Options +15 VDC -15 VDC +5 VDC Quantity × mW = Sub Total 


DBK70***


Signal Management 1 

Signal Modes 

Signal Modes ...... 1-1 

System Noise ...... 1-5 

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal Conditioning ...... 1-6 

Channel Control and Expansion ...... 1-7 

Signal Acquisition ...... 1-9 

Sequencer ...... 1-9 

Scan Rate ...... 1-10 

Triggering ...... 1-10 

Counter/Timer Functions ...... 1-11 

Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) ...... 1-11 

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature Measurement System ...... 1-12 

Overview ...... 1-12 

An Example of Two-Point Calibration ...... 1-13 

Calculation of Scale and Offset ...... 1-14 

Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in DaqView ...... 1-14 

Converting Degrees from Celsius to Fahrenheit ...... 1-14 

One Known Temperature Environment ...... 1-15 

Use of a Temperature Calibrator ...... 1-15 

CE Compliance ...... 1-15 

CE Standards and Directives ...... 1-16 

Safety Conditions ...... 1-16 

Emissions/Immunity Conditions ...... 1-17 

CE Enhancements for Existing Products ...... 1-17 

Input signals come in one of two modes, single-ended or differential. Expansion modules, LogBook, and 

Daq device default setting use the single-ended mode. Some DBKs use differential inputs for certain kinds 

of transducers; but DBK output is always single-ended. The following text briefly describes the two signal 

modes. 

Note: For DaqBook/100, /112, /120, jumper settings determine the signal mode. Single-ended is the 

factory-set default. For DaqBoard and Daq PC-Card, choosing between differential and singleended 

inputs is made by software command. 

Single-ended mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 1 signal line 

and common ground voltage (Vcm). The measured voltage may be shared with other channels. The 

advantage of a single-ended non-differential mode [over differential mode] is that it provides for a higher 

channel count (16 vs 8 channels). 

Differential-mode refers to a mode, or circuit set-up, in which a voltage is measured between 2 signal 

lines. The resulting measured differential voltage is used for a single channel. Differential inputs reduce 

signal errors and the induction of noise from ground current. The following illustration is an example of 

how noise is reduced, or canceled-out, when using the differential mode. 

In the schematic, voltage signal S2 is subtracted from signal S1, resulting in the output signal shown. Noise 

spikes with the same polarity, phase, and magnitude in each input signal cancel out—resulting in a clean 

differential signal (S1 - S2). 

In the schematic, signals S1 and S2 are shown in-phase; 

however, even if these signals were out of phase, the noise in 

each (indicated by jagged lines) would still have the same 

magnitude, phase, and polarity. For that reason, they would 

still cancel out. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 886995 Signal Management 1-1

Input Isolation 

Three benefits of input isolation are circuit protection, noise reduction, and the rejection of high common 

mode voltage. 

• Circuit protection. Input isolation separates the signal source from circuits that may be damaged by 

the signal. (Voltages higher than about 10 V can distort data or damage chips used in data 

acquisition.) High-voltage signals or signals with high-voltage spikes should therefore be isolated. 

The protection can also work the other way—to safeguard a sensitive signal conditioner from a 

failing device elsewhere in the system. 

• Noise reduction. Isolation eliminates ground loops for high-gain systems and multi-unit systems that 

are grounded together. The chassis for each device can rest at a ground potential slightly different 

from the other devices. These irrelevant currents and the spikes they may have picked up by 

induction can thus be kept out of the measurement circuit. 

• Rejection of high common-mode voltage. There is a limit to the voltage applied to a differential 

amplifier between ground and the amplifier inputs. Fortunately, the differential amplifier rejects high 

common-mode voltage signals. High common-mode voltage and noise spikes are rejected (canceled 

out) in in-phase signals (same amplitude and frequency) that are present in both the high and low 

inputs at the same time. 

References for Differential Modes 

There are three basic types of measurement configuration related to differential mode; these are groundreferenced, 

shunt-referenced, and floating. 

Differential Mode, Ground-Referenced 

In ground-referenced configurations, the signal voltage is 

referenced to a local common ground. In most cases, the local 

ground will be at a different voltage potential from the PC’s 

ground. 

Differential inputs provide attenuation of the common-mode 

noise. When in this mode, the amplifier sees the voltage 

differential between the high and low inputs (see figure). 

Common-mode noise reduction occurs because noise in the 

high input signal is typically the same as the noise in the low 

input signal. Because of this phenomena, the voltage 

difference between the 2 signals remains essentially unaffected 

by noise spikes, since these spikes appear at the same instant 

and at the same magnitude in both the high and low input 

signals. In other words, the noise spikes cancel each other out. 

As noted earlier, even if these signals were out-of-phase, the 

noise would still cancel out since the spikes in both signals 

would be of the same magnitude and polarity. 

Note: In the simple example (shown in the figure), the 

differential between the high and low signals would result in a straight line because the signals are 

equal in frequency, phase, and magnitude. 

Differential Mode, Shunt-Referenced 

There are situations in which small voltages need to be measured and the currents flowing in the power 

supply common will cause measurement errors. As shown in the figure, using the analog common as the 

reference point will result in errors. These errors are the result of variations in current flow along the 

common line [(I3 * Z3) + (I3 & I2) * Z2]. 

1-2 Signal Management 886995 DBK Option Cards and Modules

Differential Circuit with Shunt-reference 

A way around this problem is to use a differential measurement for each shunt, with the instrument 

common connected to the supply common. Each input channel will measure the shunt voltage and will 

reject any voltage in the common wire (common-mode rejection). 

Differential Mode, Floating (Isolated from Ground) 

Floating-differential measurements are made when low-level signals must 

be measured in the presence of high levels of common-mode noise (e.g., a 

non-grounded thermocouple). When the signal source has no direct 

connection to the system analog common, one must be provided. This can 

be done by connecting a resistor between one of the two signal lines; 

usually the lower in potential and common. A resistor of 10 to 100 kΩ is 

satisfactory (less noise with the lower values). 

CAUTION 

T/C 

10 kΩ 

(+) 

(-) 

CH0H 

CH0L 

Analog 

Com. 

MUX 

BOARD 

DBK12/13/15 

Floating Differential Circuit 

Do not use differential signal hookups with the intent of achieving isolation or circuit 

protection. Differential signal hookups do not provide isolation, or any other kind of 

circuit protection. 

Connecting Differential Amplifiers 

Wire connections must be solid. Loose wires will add noise to the circuit. Low grade unshielded cables 

will act as antennas, inducing more noise into the system. For this reason, all applications using a 

differential amplifier require the use of quality signal cables and connectors. The signal cable used should 

be constructed with: Insulated Outer Jacket Foil Shield 

• Insulated outer jacket 

• Twisted signal pairs 

• Foil shield 

• Drain wire (copper stranded) 

The twisted signal pairs should make use of 

low impedance, stranded copper conductors; 

and the foil shield should be of the type using 

multiple folds. 

Stranded Copper 

Conductors 

Shielded Signal Cable 

Drain Wire 

Twisted Signal Pair 

Twisted Signal Pair 

The copper-stranded drain wire should be considered as part of the shield, and should be connected as 

described later in this section. Proper use of a quality signal cable will result in a dramatic reduction of 

noise. 

The signal circuit must be connected with only one ground from the shield, as indicated in the left side of 

the figure below. A mistake, which is often made, is having two grounds (one at each end of the signal 

shield). Having two grounds, as shown in the right side of the figure, creates a “ground loop.” The ground 

loop provides a path for current to circulate, causing the induction of noise that can affect the signal. 


CORRECT 

High Input Signal 

Shield 

Differential 

Amplifier 

Shield 

Grounding Wire Grounding Wire 

Low Input Signal 

Potential difference and no path 

for current flow. 

WRONG 

Ground loop caused by 

current flow. 


No Noise-Inducing Ground Loop Noise-Inducing Ground Loop 

Differential 

Amplifier 


Aside from eliminating noise-inducing ground loops, the use of bias resistors should also be considered 

with isolated signal sources. Bias resistors can be used to provide bias current for the positive and negative 

(high and low) input signals to the differential amplifier. The impedance value of the bias resistors 

depends on the output impedance of the signal source. 


Shield 

Grounding Wire 

Locate bias resistors (R 1and R 2) 

as close 

as possible to the differential amplifier. 


R 1 

R 2 

Differential 

Amplifier 

A basic rule of thumb is: The value of the bias resistor should be at least 10 times the output impedance of 

the signal source, but less than 1 MΩ.. Bias resistors should be located as close as possible to the 

differential amplifier. Ground only one end of the signal shield. 

Unipolar and Bipolar Measurement 

Unipolar signals are always zero or positive. Bipolar signals can be negative or positive and typically 

range from -5 to +5 V (-10 to +10 V for the /2000 Series Devices). Using one or the other depends on the 

signal from the transducer and its signal conditioning. If the DBK (or other signal conditioner) outputs a 

bipolar signal, then the LogBook or Daq device should be set to bipolar. If the LogBook or Daq device 

sequencer is using the wrong mode for a channel, that channel’s reading may be clipped or in error. 

Reading a bipolar signal in unipolar mode misses half the signal, and the half received is not converted 

with optimal resolution. 

Note: The different DBKs can use either or both signal modes. Refer to the DBK documentation, and 

verify that the DBK and the LogBook or Daq device are set to the proper mode for each channel. 

12-Bit vs 16-Bit Resolution 

An analog-to-digital converter (ADC) converts an analog voltage to a digital number. The digital number 

represents the input voltage in discrete steps with finite resolution. The number of bits that represent the 

digital number determines ADC resolution. An n-bit ADC has a resolution of 1 part in 2 n . 

• 12-bit resolution is 1 part in 4096 (in binary powers, 2 12 ) and corresponds to 2.44 mV for a 10 V 

range. 

• 16-bit resolution is 1 part in 65,536 (in binary powers, 2 16 ) and corresponds to 0.153 mV in a 10 V 

range. 


System Noise 

Electrical noise can present problems even with good equipment; thus, controlling noise is imperative. 

Some techniques avoid or prevent noise sources from entering the system; other techniques remove noise 

from the signal. 

Laboratory and industrial environments often have multiple sources of electrical noise. An AC power line 

is a source of 50/60 Hz noise. Heavy equipment (air conditioners, elevators, pumps, etc.) can be a source 

of noise, particularly when turned on and off. Local radio stations are a source of high-frequency noise, 

and computers and other electronic equipment can create noise in a multitude of frequency ranges. Thus, 

an absolute noise-free environment for data acquisition is not realistic. Fortunately, noise-reduction 

techniques such as averaging, filtering, differential voltage measurement, and shielding are available to 

reduce noise to an acceptable level. 

Note: Additional noise-reduction information is contained in the section, “Signal Modes,” especially in the 

paragraphs pertaining to connections, signal cables, and ground loops. 

Averaging 

Averaging is done in software after several samples have been collected. Depending on the nature of the 

noise, averaging can reduce noise by the square root of the number of averaged samples. Although 

averaging can be effective, it suffers from several drawbacks. Noise in measurements only decreases as 

the square root of the number of measurements—reducing RMS noise significantly may require many 

samples. Thus, averaging is suited to low-speed applications that can provide many samples. 

Note: Only random noise is reduced or eliminated by averaging. Averaging will not reduce or eliminate 

any signal that is periodic. 

Analog Filtering 

A filter is an analog circuit element that attenuates an incoming signal according to its frequency. A lowpass 

filter attenuates frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Conversely, a high-pass filter attenuates 

frequencies below the cutoff. As frequency increases beyond the cutoff point, the attenuation of a singlepole, 

low-pass filter increases slowly. Multi-pole filters provide greater attenuation beyond the cutoff 

frequency but may introduce phase (time delay) problems that could affect some applications. 

Filter circuits can be active or passive: 

• Active. The DBK18 Low-Pass Filter Card has an instrumentation amplifier with variable gain and 

filter configurations. The DBK18 uses an active 3-pole filter (mostly contained within the UAFF42 

ICs) that can be configured as a Butterworth, Bessel, or Chebyshev filter with corner frequencies up 

to 50 kHz. Filter properties depend on the values of resistors and capacitors. These components 

can be changed by the user. 

• Passive. The DBK11 has a prototype area on the PC board for attaching non-powered components 

such as resistors and capacitors. The user chooses component values to produce the desired 

properties. 

Input and Source Impedance 

As shown in the following figure, The input impedance (Ri) combines with the transducer’s source 

impedance (Rs) forming a voltage divider. This divider distorts the voltage being read at the analog-todigital 

converter. The actual voltage read is represented by the equation: 

Vread = VT × [Ri / (Ri + Rs)] [ Vt - IbRs) 

The low source impedance (Rs) of most signals usually 

presents no problem. Some transducers, such as 

piezoelectric types, have high source impedance. These 

transducer types should be used with a charge-sensitive 

amplifier of low output impedance. 


Crosstalk 

Crosstalk is a type of noise related to source impedance and capacitance, in which signals from one 

channel leak into an adjacent channel, resulting in interference or signal distortion. The impact of source 

impedance and stray capacitance can be estimated by using the following equation. 

T = RC 

Where T is the time constant, R is the source impedance, and C is the stray capacitance. 

High source (transducer) impedance can be a problem in multiplexed A/D systems like the DBK12, 

DBK13, DBK15. When using more than 1 channel, the channel input signals are multiplexed into the 

circuit card. The multiplexer samples each signal for only 10 µs and then switches to the next input signal. 

A high-impedance input interacts with the multiplexer’s stray capacitance and causes crosstalk and 

inaccuracies in the A/D sample. In such cases, the source impedance should be less than 1 kΩ. If the 

source impedance exceeds this value, sampling problems can be expected. 

A solution to high source impedance in relation to multiplexers involves the use of buffers. The term 

buffer has several meanings; but in this case, buffer refers to an operational amplifier having high input 

impedance but very low output impedance. In the example illustrated, a buffer has reduced the source 

impedance from 10 kΩ to effectively 0 kΩ. Placing such a buffer on each channel (between the transducer 

and the multiplexer) prevents the multiplexer’s stray capacitance from combining with the high input 

impedance (10 kΩ in the example). This use of a buffer also stops transient signals from propagating 

backwards from the multiplexer to the transducer. 

Using DBK Cards and Modules for Signal Conditioning 

The DBK signal-conditioning units are designed for use with Daq devices and LogBooks. Although the 

DBK options can be used with ISA or PCI bus-based data acquisition boards from other vendors; they 

perform best when used with an acquisition device that can dynamically select channel, gain, and range. 

Dynamic channel and gain/range make it possible to have high channel-to-channel scan rates with a variety 

of transducers. 

DBK output signals can be bipolar, e.g., -5 to +5 V, or unipolar, e.g., 0 to 10 V. The user can select a 

range of relevant values to correspond to the lowest signal (e.g., -5 or 0 V) and the highest signal (e.g., 5 or 

10 V) signal. This type of range selection guarantees the highest resolution in 12-bit or 16-bit conversion. 

DBK modules share the same footprint as the DaqBooks and LogBooks. This dimensional aspect provides 

for convenient stacking of modules with each other and with most notebook PCs. Note that most DBK 

modules have their own power supply. 


Channel Control and Expansion 

In a Daq device or LogBook system, DBK expansion cards and modules can increase the number of analog 

input channels from 16 base channels to 256 input channels (16 × 16). The configuration will vary 

depending on the DBK’s channel capacity; for example, four 4-channel DBKs or two 8-channel DBKs can 

share the same base channel. As part of the multiplexing scheme, each DBK card provides a single output 

that must be directed to one of the 16 base channels via the DBK’s JP1 jumper setting. 

DBK card or module 

16 

expansion MUX PGA 

16 

base MUX PGA 

channels 

channels 

2 

JP1 

channel 

select 

jumper 

4 2 bits select 1 of 4 gains 

4 bits select 1 of 16 inputs 

P1 P1 

4 bits select 

1 of 16 

inputs 

4 

Sequencer 

Channel Control and Expansion Block Diagram 

Daq device System 

or LogBook System 

2 

2 bits select 

1 of 4 gains 

ADC 

100 kHz 

Clock 

The above figure shows the functional parts related to channel control and expansion. An explanation of 

the diagram follows. 

• The sequencer selects the channel and gain by controlling multiplexers (MUX) and 

programmable gain amplifiers (PGA) in either the LogBook or the Daq device and the DBK. 

The sequencer uses 4 expansion address lines to provide 16 unique channel addresses for each 

base channel. A 100 kHz clock and user programming of the scan sequence control the 

sequencer. 

Note: /2000 Series Devices allow for selection of 100 kHz, or 200 kHz internal clock speed via software. 

• The DBK multiplexer selects 1 of 16 (max) channels as directed by the sequencer. The selected 

signal travels to the PGA, to the channel-selection jumper, then to the Daq device, or LogBook 

via P1. 

• The Daq device or LogBook multiplexer selects 1 of 16 base channels from P1 input lines as 

directed by the sequencer. The selected signal goes to the PGA and then to the A/D converter 

(A/D). 

• The PGAs can vary the gain on a per channel basis as directed by the sequencer. For DBKs 

with a PGA, the sequencer can combine the gains of the DBK PGA and the LogBook or Daq 

device PGA for a variety of gain settings. 

• The P1 interface has a signal line for each of the 16 base channels and control lines for gain 

setting (pins 5, 6) and sub-channel selection (pins 3, 4, 22, 23). 

• The JP1 channel select jumper in the DBK can be placed on pins for channel 0 through 

channel 15. Until the base channel capacity is filled (16 max), multiple cards can use the same 

JP1 channel setting if their DIP switches are set to identify unique sub-channel card numbers. 

Note: The channel select header on DBK17 and DBK18 is labeled J1 instead of JP1. 


The following table details how expansion channels are numbered in DaqView and LogView. API 

Channels are used in Daq devices by third party programs. Note that API Channels are not used in 

LogBook systems. 

Channel Numbering 

DaqView or LogView 

Channel 1 

Signal Source 

0 to 15 Local channels 0 to15 2 

API 

Channel 

0 to 15 

0-0 to 0-15 0 to 15 of A/D exp. card 0 16 to 31 
















High-speed digital I/O 

(DaqBook/100/200 and 

DaqBoard/100A/200A) 

272 

1 

Note: DaqView identifies channels for some DBKs (e.g., DBK4) with a 3-part 

number for local channel, card, and sub-address. 

2 

Note: In differential mode, only channels 0 to 7 are valid. 

In addition to the base channel selection on JP1, many DBKs must be set to the sub-channel (or card) 

number by a DIP-switch labeled SW1 or S1. Since DBKs vary in their channel capacity and identification, 

refer to the respective DBK document modules. 

Example. Refer to the above table (the 1-0 to 1-15 row) and to the following figure. To select channel 15 

on a DBK card that is connected to base channel 1: 

a) set the sequencer expansion address to 1111 

b) set the base address to 0001 

c) set JP1 to channel 1 

d) Depending on the DBK, set the DIP-switch to identify one of 

the multiple cards on a single channel. 

The corresponding API channel number would be 47; i.e., DaqView Channel 1-15 (see table). 

Note that API Channels are not used in LogBook systems. 


CH15 

MUX 

Signal Acquisition 

Sequencer 

DBK card or module 

CH1 

4 

1111 

PGA 

2 

JP1 channel 

select jumper 

P1 P1 

CH1 

Example Channel Selection 

The hardware sequencer performs several functions: 

MUX 

4 0001 

Daq device System 

or LogBook System 

Base Address set to 0001 

Expansion Address set to 1111 

2 

Sequencer 

PGA 

ADC 

100 kHz 

Clock 

• Allows each channel to have an independent gain. 

• Ensures that channels are scanned at exactly 10 µs intervals. 

• Allows channels to be accessed randomly in the scan rather than “start channel to end channel”. 

• Provides high-speed access to expansion modules. 

Gain adjusted analog 

input from P1 

Analog 

trigger-in 

comparator 

Computer output signal 

through digital-to-analog 

converters 

Trigger 

input 

Analog input 

from P1 

Gain Adjust 

Polarity setting: bipolar or unipolar 

1 

2 

Trigger 

select 

100 kHz 

clock 

External 

Multiplexer 

Control 

Signal from 

PC (ISA) 

Bus interface 

8 DE/16 SE 

Analog Input 

Multiplexer 

512-Step Random Access 

Channel/Gain Sequencer 

Programmable 

Gain Amplifier 

×1, ×2, ×4, ×8 

Main Expanded 

Ch 

1 2 

Ga Set. Ch 

1 2 

Ga Set. 

0 ×1 uni 16 ×60 bi 

1 ×2 uni 17 ×20 bi 

2 ×8 bi ... ... ... 

... ... ... 271 ×40 uni 

15 ×4 bi 272 n/a n/a 

Sequencer Reset 

Programmable 

sequencer timebase, 

10 µ s to 10 hours 

16 High-Speed 

Digital Inputs 

4 signals to be used as: 

general purpose inputs 

or 

Analog input 

from P1 

1 Aux. Counter Gate 

1 TTL Trigger Input 

2 Gain Select Outputs 

( for expansion boards) 

The LogBook or Daq device holds the scan information in its internal sequencer. On every timebase 

“tick”, the sequencer steps through all the programmed channels and sets the gain for each channel (also 

the unipolar/bipolar setting for the /2000 Series Devices). Thus, each sample in a scan is read optimally. 

In addition to controlling the LogBook or the Daq device, the sequencer controls the programmable 

features on expansion cards via the P1 connector. 

This architecture ensures that the same 10 µs sampling (5 µs or 10 µs for /2000 Series Devices) exists for 

external channels as well as internal channels. 


Scan Rate 

Triggering 

Channel 

Gain 

Scan Group 

#2 

x1 

Scan Period 

(Immediate to 

10 hours) 

10 µ s 

#4 

x8 

All channels within scan group are 

measured at 10 µs/channel. 

#7 

x8 

#2 

x2 

Digital 

Input 

Most sampling of analog signals occurs on the timebase of the LogBook or the Daq device clock. The 

scan period is the time duration between successive scans. Inversely, the scan rate, or scan frequency is 

the number of scans per time interval, usually expressed in scans per second. The channels within the scan 

are always sampled at a fixed period of 10 µs (100 kHz rate), or 5 µs (200 kHz rate); or 10 µs for the /2000 

Series Devices. Generally, the sampling frequency must be greater than twice the highest signal frequency 

of interest to prevent aliasing error. 

Note 1: With /2000 Series Devices, either 100 kHz or 200 kHz can be selected to be used as the internal 

clock speed. To ensure signal accuracy the 100 kHz speed must be selected when using a 

DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, DBK53 or DBK54 in conjunction with DaqBoard/2000 

Series, or cPCI DaqBoard2000c Series boards. 

Note 2: Except in the case of a single-channel scan, the sampling rate per channel can be much slower 

than the scan rate. 

Triggering controls an acquisition cycle. Once the system is armed, a trigger is required to collect the data. 

Typically, three data collection parameters are specified: the pre-trigger count, the post-trigger scan count, 

and the trigger source. The user must determine the triggering requirement based on the nature of the 

measurement and the amount of data needed to satisfy the system’s purpose. 

70 µ s 

Pre-Trigger Scan Count 

Type of Trigger Source 

10 µ s 

Scan Period 

(10 µs to 10 hours) 

Immediate 

Key Hit 

External TTL 

Channel Value - Rising 

- Falling 

#18 

x100 

Trigger Event 

#19 

x10 

#16 

x1000 

Time 

Post-Trigger Scan Count 

• The pre-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans that are to be collected before the trigger 

point. If the pre-trigger scan count is greater than zero, the system will continuously collect data 

until the trigger is satisfied. If no pre-trigger scans are required, the system sits idle until the trigger; 

then, it collects the post-trigger scans before it disarms. 

1-10 Signal Management 886995 DBK Option Cards and Modules 

Time 

Time

Counter/Timer Functions 

• The post-trigger scan count specifies the number of scans to be collected after the trigger point. 

After the trigger, the post-trigger scans will be collected as programmed and then the system will 

disarm itself. 

• The trigger source can be a software command, an external TTL input, etc. An analog input 

channel on reaching a specified voltage level can be used to trigger the system. (In this mode, an 

analog output channel is used to internally set the analog threshold—making it unavailable for other 

use.) 

Counter/timer circuits are used for counting digital events, timing digital pulses, and generating square 

waves and pulses. Counter/timer functions are available from the P3 interface. 

Counter/Timer Pins on P3 

Pin Signal Name Description 

15 TMR 0 OUT Timer 0 output 

16 TMR 1 OUT Timer 1 output 

17 CTR 2 IN Counter 2 input 




The table shows the P3 pinout for the 4 counter and 2 timer channels. 

• IN - a digital input that increments the counter and provides a timebase for counter operation. 

• OUT - an output of digital square waves and pulses. 

The counter channels can act as 4 independent 16-bit up-counters. 

The timer channels are driven by an internal timebase of 1 MHz which can be divided by 

1 to 65535 to obtain output frequencies from 15 Hz to 1 MHz. 

Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) 

Some applications require every channel in a scan group to be read at the same instant, as opposed to 

being read with 10 µs between channels. Acquiring multiple readings at the same instant is accomplished 

with Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH). 

An example of an SSH application is as follows. In the example, a performance analysis of an engine 

needs to indicate cylinder pressure and temperature, piston strain and position, valve position, and engine 

rpm and vibration—all at the same instant. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is a means of obtaining 

such instantaneous data on multiple channels while avoiding time-skew problems. 


The previous figure can be used to understand how SSH is used in the DBK17 SSH Card. The process is 

as follows: 

• Input signals pass through an instrumentation amplifier and into a sample-and-hold stage. 

• When the sample enable line goes high, each channel’s sample-and-hold stage will “freeze” 

the current analog value. The values for all channels are separately “latched” within 50 ns of 

each other. 

• The signals are held in a stable condition, while the multiplexer switches through all 

channels. 

• The multiplexer sends the signals [one-by-one] to be digitized by the analog-digital converter 

(ADC) in the primary data acquisition device. 

• The resulting data is a snapshot of conditions at an instant, but the multiplexing and analogto-digital 

conversion are spread over a longer time interval. 

• The simultaneous sample and hold circuit allows you to gather up to 256 simultaneous 

samples using sixty-four DBK17s. 

Two-Point Calibration of a Temperature Measurement System 

Overview 

Note: In the following text a temperature measurement system consisting of a DaqBook, a DBK19 

thermocouple card, and DaqView is referred to. However, it is important to note that the two-point 

calibration method can be applied to measurement systems that consist of other acquisition devices 

and software. 

Two-point calibration makes use of correction constants 

to eliminate offset and gain errors in a temperature 

measurement system. 

The graph shows an example for a temperature 

measuring system, with temperature expressed in 

degrees Celsius. 

The sensor output is on the horizontal axis and system 

response is on the vertical. 

The graph illustrates the following bulleted points: 

Measurement System Output ( ° C) 

100 

90 

80 

70 

60 

50 

40 

30 

20 

10 

0 

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 

Temperature Sensor Output ( ° C) 

• The system has a linear response. Most thermocouple measurement devices have a software 

driver, which corrects for the nonlinear output voltage of each thermocouple type. Normally, 

there is no provision for linearity adjustment by the user. 

• The system has an offset at 0°C, which can be eliminated by introducing an offset correction. This 

is the first point of a two-point correction. 

• The system has a gain error at 100°C, which can be eliminated by introducing a gain (slope) 

correction. This is the second point of a two-point correction. 

Suppose you have a temperature measurement system consisting of a DaqBook, a DBK19 thermocouple 

card, and DaqView data acquisition software. The DBK19 was shipped with a diskette of calibration 

constants. These calibration constants are specific to the DBK19. 


Download instructions for loading the constants into DaqView were included with the DBK19. The 

constants will improve the accuracy of each DBK19 channel when amplifying the thermocouple's millivolt 

output, which is read by the DaqBook. 

The temperature measurement system, as well as the thermocouple itself, can still have the following types 

of errors: 

• Thermocouple error (departure from performance of an ideal T/C of that type) 

• CJC sensor error (±1°C maximum for the DBK19) 

• The DaqBook may have small calibration errors 

In some applications, it is possible to ignore these sources of errors and still obtain useful results from the 

temperature measurement system. However, the only way to optimize the performance of the system is to 

perform an end-to-end calibration. This is done by applying two different temperatures to the thermocouple 

connection: one temperature is close to 0°C and the other is at approximately full scale. 

Then observe the two corresponding temperature readings in DaqView, and use this information to derive 

the values of “m” and “b” in the line slope equation “mx + b.” In this equation, the value of “m” is usually 

called the scale, and the value of “b” is usually called the offset. When both the offset and gain correction 

values are applied, the system errors are reduced to their lowest level. 

An Example of Two-Point Calibration 

For illustration, suppose the temperature measurement system consists of a DaqBook/100, DBK19 

thermocouple card, and DaqView software. (The following calibration procedure also applies to 

temperature measurement systems made up of similar products, but the discussion is simplified with a 

specific example.) After setting up the DBK19 card in DaqView as described previously, consider one of 

the channels on the DBK19, for example, channel 2. Suppose a type T thermocouple connected to this 

channel. In DaqView, select a sampling frequency of 1 Hz and an averaging factor of 200 so that the 

readings you get are steady and not fluctuating rapidly. 

When you look at this channel in DaqView, the default units are in degrees Celsius. With the acquisition 

“off”, click on the cell in DaqView in the Units column for channel 2. You will see an engineering units 

pull-down menu in a dialog box above the spreadsheet area. Click on the down arrow in this dialog box, 

and then select the “mx + b” option. You will note that the default values of scale and offset are m=1 and 

b=0 for engineering units of degrees C. These values need to be changed to ones that will give more 

accurate temperature readings. 

To do this, first place the thermocouple for channel 2 in an environment with a known temperature, for 

example an ice bath. Click on the Start All Indicators button in DaqView, and observe the Readings 

column for channel 2. Wait until the reading stabilizes, then write down the number in degrees C. Call this 

reading the “first actual reading” or RA1, and suppose it is: 

RA1 = 2.1°C 

Since this reading was supposed to be 0°C, call the first correct reading RC1: 

RC1 = 0°C 

Place the thermocouple for channel 2 in a second known environment. This might be a thermocouple block 

calibrator or a fluidized sand bath. In this example, assume that the calibrator has been set to100°C. 

Observe the reading in DaqView for channel 2, wait until it stabilizes, then write down this number in 

degrees Celsius. Call this reading the “second actual reading” or RA2, and suppose it is: 

RA2 = 104°C 

Since the correct second reading was supposed to be 100°C, write down the correct value as: 

RC2 = 100°C 

Stop the monitoring process in DaqView by clicking on the Stop All Indicators button. 


Calculation of Scale and Offset 

Using the above information, calculate the values of scale (m) and offset (b) that will compensate for the 

measurement errors (RA1 and RA2). This is possible because the correct and actual readings are related by 

the (mx + b) equations: 

RC1 = m(RA1) + b 

and 

RC2 = m(RA2) + b 

Substituting in the values noted in the above calibration process: 

RC1 = m(RA1) + b 

0 = m(2.1) + b 

RC2 = m(RA2) + b 

100 = m(104) + b 

Solving for “m” results in: 

100 = m(104 -2.1) 

m = 100/(104-2.1) = 0.9814. 

Substituting this value of “m” to solve for the value of “b”: 

0 = 0.9814 (2.1) + b 

b = -2.0608. 

Implementing the Scale and Offset Constants in DaqView 

To implement the scale and offset constants in DaqView, first make sure that the acquisition process is 

turned off. Then, click on the cell in the Units column for channel 2. The engineering units pull-down 

menu above the grid becomes active; click on the down arrow and select the “mx + b” option. 

After doing that you have the ability to enter new numbers for m and b. Perform those entries and click on 

OK to save them. You can then place the thermocouple back in the ice and fluidized sand baths, observe 

the new readings, and note the improvement in their accuracy. 

If you want optimum accuracy of all channels in the temperature measurement system, you should perform 

the two-point calibration process for each channel. 

Converting Degrees from Celsius to Fahrenheit 

Once you have performed the two-point calibration process and determined the scale and offset values for 

units of degrees Celsius, you can use this information to find the corresponding scale and offset values for 

other temperature units. In the previous example, the calibration process produced the following equation 

for “mx + b”, using units of degrees Celsius: 

RC (°C) = 0.9814 * RA (°C) - 2.0608 

To convert to degrees Fahrenheit, use the relationship: 

RC (°F) = 1.8 * RC (°C) + 32 

Substituting the latter equation into the former yields: 

RC (°F) = 1.8 * [0.9814 * RA (°C) - 2.0608] + 32 

RC (°F) = 1.7665 * RA (°C) + 28.29 

So the new values of m and b are: 

m' = 1.7665 

b' = 28.29 

These are the scale and offset values that you should enter. Note that RA is still in degrees Celsius since the 

raw reading produced by the data acquisition software is in degrees Celsius. 


One Known Temperature Environment 

Suppose that you only have one known temperature environment, such as an ice bath. In this case only one 

parameter in the “mx + b” equation can be determined for system calibration. This is called single-point 

calibration. Since this is normally the largest source of error, single-point calibration is used to correct the 

offset. 

Using the same information as in the first example, and supposing that the only actual reading available is 

called RA: 

RA = 2.1°C 

Since this reading was supposed to be 0°C, call the correct reading RC: 

RC = 0°C 

Substituting these values into the mx + b equation results in: 

RC = 0 = m (2.1) + b 

In a single-point calibration, it is assumed that the value of the scale parameter is completely accurate; that 

is, m = 1. Using this information in the above equation results in: 

0 = 1(2.1) + b, 

b = -2.1 

These are the scale (m = 1) and offset (b = -2.1) values that should be entered into DaqView. 

Use of a Temperature Calibrator 

CE Compliance 

Occasionally, it is impractical or difficult to get physical temperature references for system calibration. The 

temperature region of interest may be far removed from the example temperatures of 0°C and 100°C. 

Accurate temperature baths may not be available. 

In these cases, you should use a temperature simulation instrument that lets you dial in your thermocouple 

type. The simulator should also let you set the two calibration temperatures that are correct for your 

application. The calibrator then generates milli-volt signals into the DBK19 card (or other temperature 

measurement product). These signals correspond to those that would be generated, by the chosen 

thermocouple types, at the selected temperatures. A disadvantage of this approach is that thermocouple 

errors are not corrected or compensated. 

For many applications, where the thermocouple is used at lower temperatures, a single-point calibration is 

sufficient. In general, thermocouples have little error at 0°C. The thermocouple error tends to increase 

linearly as the temperature increases. 

The European Union (EU) first developed CE standards in 1985. The standards include specifications for 

safety and for EMI emissions and immunity. Now, all relevant products sold in Europe must meet these 

standards. 

Although CE compliance is not required in the United States, the standards are often adopted by U.S. 

companies since they improve product safety, reduce noise, and minimize ESD problems. 

In contracted and in-house testing, most LogBook and Daq device products met the required specifications. 

Others were redesigned to meet compliance. In some cases, alternate product versions, shield plates, edge 

guards, special connectors, and add-on kits were developed. The section entitled CE Enhancements for 

Existing Products, which is located at the end of this chapter, includes examples. 

CE-compliant products bear the “CE” mark and include a Declaration of Conformity 

stating the particular specifications and conditions that apply. Test Records and 

supporting documentation that validate compliance are kept on file at the factory. 


CE Standards and Directives 

Safety Conditions 

The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) directives specify two basic requirements: 

• The device must not interfere with radio or telecommunications. 

• The device must be immune from electromagnetic interference from RF transmitters etc. 

The standards are published in the Official Journal of European Union under direction of CENELEC 

(European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization). The specific standards relevant to LogBook 

and Daq device equipment are listed on the product’s Declaration of Conformity. 

The safety standard that applies to LogBook and Daq device products is EN 61010-1 : 1993 (Safety 

Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General 

Requirements). Environmental conditions include the following: 

• indoor use 

• altitude up to 2000 m 

• temperature 5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F) 

• maximum relative humidity 80% for temperatures up to 31°C (87.8°F) decreasing linearly 

to 50% relative humidity at 40°C (104°F) 

• mains supply voltage fluctuations not to exceed ±10% of the nominal voltage 

• other supply voltage fluctuations as stated by the manufacturer 

• transient overvoltage according to installation categories (overvoltage categories) I, II and III. 

For mains supply, the minimum and normal category is II. 

• pollution degree Ior II in accordance with IEC 664. 

For clarification, terms used in some Declarations of Conformity include: 

• pollution degree: any addition of foreign matter, solid, liquid or gaseous (ionized gases) that 

may produce a reduction of dielectric strength or surface resistivity. A pollution degree I has 

no influence on safety and implies: the equipment is at operating temperature with noncondensing 

humidity conditions; no conductive particles are permitted in the atmosphere; 

warm-up time is sufficient to avert any condensation or frost; no hazardous voltages are 

applied until completion of the warm-up period. Pollution degree II implies the expectation 

of occasional condensation. 

• overvoltage (installation) category: classification with limits for transient over-voltage, 

dependent on the nominal line voltage to earth. Category I implies signals without high 

transient values. Category II applies to typical mains power lines with some transients. 

Users must comply with all relevant safety conditions listed in the Declarations of Conformity and in the 

user documentation. This manual, LogBook, and Daq device hardware use the following Warning and 

Caution symbols: 

(If you see these symbols on a product, carefully read the related information and be alert to the possibility 

of personal injury). 

This warning symbol is used in this manual or on the equipment to warn of possible 

injury or death from electrical shock under noted conditions. 

This warning/caution symbol is used to warn of possible personal injury or 

equipment damage under noted conditions. 

LogBook and Daq device products contain no user-serviceable parts; refer all service to qualified 

personnel. 


The specific safety conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general safety conditions 

include: 

• The operator must observe all safety cautions and operating conditions specified in the 

documentation for all hardware used. 

• The host computer and all connected equipment must be CE compliant. 

• All power must be off to the device and externally connected equipment before internal access to 

the device is permitted. 

• Isolation voltage ratings: do not exceed documented voltage limits for power and signal inputs. 

All wire insulation and terminal blocks in the system must be rated for the isolation voltage in use. 

Voltages above 30 Vrms or ±60 VDC must not be applied if any condensation has formed on the 

device. 

• Current and power use must not exceed specifications. Do not defeat fuses or other over-current 

protection. 

Emissions/Immunity Conditions 

The specific immunity conditions for CE compliance vary by product; but general immunity conditions 

include: 

• Cables must be shielded, braid-type with metal-shelled connectors. Input terminal connections are 

to be made with shielded wire. The shield should be connected to the chassis ground with the 

hardware provided. 

• The host computer must be properly grounded. 

• In low-level analog applications, some inaccuracy is to be expected when I/O leads are exposed to 

RF fields or transients over 3 or 10 V/m as noted on the Declaration of Conformity. 

CE Enhancements for Existing Products 

This section of describes three CE enhancements. 

• DBK41/CE 

• Edge Guards for the DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44 

• BNC Connectors for CE compliance 

Edge Guards for DBK5, DBK8, and DBK44 

A plastic barrier attached to the end of a DBK card helps prevent access to leads, and to live circuits. 

The edge guards attach to DBKs (see figure below) that are mounted in a DBK41/CE, with EMI shield 

plates. The access slot allows insulated wires to pass through the barrier. 


DBK41/CE 

The DBK41/CE includes 3 variations of EMI shield plates that attach to the DBK41 enclosure. Besides 

acting as an electrical safety barrier, these shields reduce electromagnetic interference (EMI). 

Note: The CE kit is included with the DBK41/CE. It can be purchased as an optional accessory for use 

with DBK41. 

BNC Connectors for CE Compliance 

Exposed BNC connectors can receive static charges, which can enter the board’s circuitry, resulting in 

ESD damage. To comply with CE standards, BNC connectors must be shielded from high-voltage sources 

such as static charges. 

Some points: 

• Cable and connector requirements are stated in the product’s Declaration of Conformity. 

These are typically special coaxial cables with insulated end-connectors and rubber O-rings, 

for example, cable kit p/n 418-0800. 

• PVC dust caps (p/n CN-96) must cover all unused BNC connectors. 

• Properly installed connectors and dust caps will cover the entire surface of the BNC, i.e., no 

BNC metal will be exposed. 


System Connections and Pinouts 2 

Overview 


P1 – DB37 Connector for Analog I/O …… 2-3 

P2 – DB37 Connector for Digital I/O …… 2-4 

P3 – DB37 Connector for Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O …… 2-5 

P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-6 

Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, P3 Correlation …… 2-9 

Primary data acquisition devices such as DaqBooks and DaqBoards are designed to accommodate a wide 

variety of applications. The number of possible system configurations that can be made via the use of DBK 

options is staggering. 

LogBooks can also be enhanced and expanded with the use of optional DBK cards and modules. In 

addition, LogBook systems can incorporate various options that do not fall within the DBK product line. 

These LBK options are detailed in the LogBook User’s Manual, p/n 461-0901. 

This chapter consists of three pinouts, one or more of which will apply to each specific DBK option. In 

many cases the use of a particular pin will vary, depending on the primary data acquisition device being 

used. For this reason it is important to look at the pinout of the primary device in its associated user’s 

manual. Another reason to look at a specific user’s manual is that you may find additional information, for 

example: correlation of a 37-pin connector’s pins to those found on a P4 100-pin connector. In addition, 

DB37 connectors for some products are achieved by connecting a cable to an onboard header. Those 

headers are not detailed in this DBK Options Manual. 

Reference Note: If you plan to use an expansion chassis (e.g., a DBK10, DBK41, orDBK60) for 

your data acquisition system, refer to the respective DBK section of this manual for product 

details. 

Reference Note: For additional information regarding the primary data acquisition devices, their 

pinouts and associated software programs, refer to the user’s manual associated with that device. 

Reference Note: You must set up your software to accommodate particular DBKs in your 

system. 

o Chapter 3 pertains to DBK Setup in DaqView. 

o Chapter 4 pertains to DBK Setup in LogView. 

o Refer to separate documentation for DaqCOM, API, DASYlab, 

and LabVIEW as applicable. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 877095 System Connections & Pinouts 2-1

CAUTION 

Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, 

P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment 

damage. 

CAUTION 

Turn off power to all devices connected to the system before connecting cables or 

setting configuration jumpers and switches. Electrical shock or damage to 

equipment can result even under low-voltage conditions. 

CAUTION 

The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components. 

Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should 

always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or 

circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD 

controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and 

wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures. 

2-2 System Connections & Pinouts 877095 DBK Option Cards and Modules

P1 Analog I/O 

This is a general P1 pinout for use with DBK cards. It is not to be confused with the more detailed pinouts found in 

the “device-specific” user’s manuals. In regard to pinouts for devices not depicted in the following table refer to 

the applicable user’s manual. 

DaqBook/2000 Series & 

DaqBoard/2000 Series Devices 

DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series 

DaqBoard/100 Series, /200 Series 

LogBook 

Pin Signal Type Pin Signal Type Pin Signal Type 

1 +5 VDC Power 1 +5 VDC Power 1 +5 VDC Power 

2 -15 VDC Power 2 CTR 0 Out / -15VDC power 2 -15 VDC Power 

3 Digital Out Bit 3 / Ch Select 3 Digital Out Bit 3 / Ch Select 3 Channel Select Bit 3 


5 Digital In Bit 1 / Gain Select 5 Digital In Bit 3 / Gain Select 5 Gain Select Bit 1 

6 Digital In Bit 0 / Gain Select 6 Digital In Bit 1 / Gain Select 6 Gain Select Bit 0 

7 DGND (Digital Ground) 7 DGND (Digital Ground) 7 DGND (Digital Ground) 

8 Negative Reference; -5 VDC 8 Negative Reference; -5 VDC 8 Negative Reference; -5 VDC 

9 Positive Reference; +5 VDC 9 DAC Output Channel 0 9 Positive Reference; +5 VDC 

10 -- Not Connected -- 10 DAC Ref. In Ch 0 (must invert) 10 -- Not Connected -- 

Differential Single-Ended Differential Single-Ended Differential Single-Ended 

11 Ch 7 LO IN Ch 15 HI IN 11 Ch 7 LO IN Ch 15 HI IN 11 Ch 7 LO IN Ch 15 HI IN 








19 SGND (Signal Ground) 19 AGND (Analog Ground) 19 AGND (Analog Ground) 

20 ADC Pacer Clock, Output / Input 20 CTR 2 Output (8254 chip) 20 Pacer Clock, Output / Input 

21 +15 VDC Power 21 CTR 0 Clock In / +15 VDC Power 21 +15 VDC Power 



24 -- Not Connected -- 24 Digital Input Bit 2 / CTR 0 Gate 24 Digital Input Bit 1 

25 Digital In / External TTL Trigger In 25 Digital Input Bit 0 / Trigger 0 25 External TTL Trigger Input 

26 Digital Out / SSH (Note 2) 26 DAC ref. Ch 1 / SSH (Note 2) 26 SSH (Simultaneous Sample & Hold) 

27 -- Not Connected -- 27 DAC Output to Channel 1 27 Calibration Output (+24 V @ 0.01 A) 

28 AGND (Analog Ground) 28 AGND (Analog Ground) 28 AGND (Analog Ground) 

29 AGND (Analog Ground) 29 AGND (Analog Ground) 29 AGND (Analog Ground) 

30 CH 7 HI IN 30 CH 7 HI IN 30 CH 7 HI IN 


32 

33 

CH 5 HI IN 

CH 4 HI IN 

Single-Ended or 

Differential 

32 

33 

CH 5 HI IN 

CH 4 HI IN 


Differential 

32 

33 

CH 5 HI IN 

CH 4 HI IN 




37 CH 0 HI IN 

37 CH 0 HI IN 

37 CH 0 HI IN 

Notes: 

(1) Daq PC Card users: With exception of pins 11 through 18, and 30 through 37, users of the Daq PC Card 

should not refer to this pinout; instead, refer to the Daq PC Card user’s manual. 

(2) SSH is “Simultaneous Sample and Hold.” 

(3) Software configuration commands determine P1 digital I/O pin functions. 


Differential 

(4) Refer to the user’s manual of the applicable primary data acquisition device for more additional information. 

(5) For devices that have 100-pin P4 connectors DBK200 Series adapters can be used to obtain one or more DB37 

connectors designated as P1, P2, and P3. 


P2 Digital I/O 





LogBook 


1 -- Not Connected -- 1 Interrupt Line Input (Note 1) 1 Interrupt Line Input (Note 1) 

2 -- Not Connected -- 2 Interrupt Line Enable (Note 1) 2 Interrupt Line Enable (Note 1) 

Port B Digital I/O Port B Digital I/O Port B Digital I/O 

3 B7 Port B Bit 7 3 B7 Port B Bit 7 3 B7 Port B Bit 7 









12 -- Not Connected -- 12 -- Not Connected -- 12 -- Not Connected -- 






18 +5 VDC Supply 18 +5 VDC Supply 18 +5 VDC Supply 




Port C Digital Input / Output Port C Digital Input / Output Port C Digital Input / Output 

22 C7 Port C Bit 7 22 C7 Port C Bit 7 22 C7 Port C Bit 7 








Port A Digital Input / Output Port A Digital Input / Output Port A Digital Input / Output 

30 A7 Port A Bit 7 30 A7 Port A Bit 7 30 A7 Port A Bit 7 








Notes: 

(1) There are no user functions for accessing Interrupt Line Input or Interrupt Line Enable. 

(2) No local lines are available when digital expansion lines are used. 



P2 expansion cables must be kept short for proper operation. 

Do not exceed 14” per attached DBK card. 


P3 Pulse/Frequency/High-Speed Digital I/O 

This is a general P3 pinout for use with DBK cards. It is not to be confused with the more detailed pinouts 

found in the primary “device-specific” manuals. In regard to pinouts for devices not depicted in the following 

table refer to the applicable user’s manual. 





LogBook 


1 DGND (Digital Ground) 1 Interrupt Line Input 1 Interrupt Line Input 

2 DGND (Digital Ground) 2 Interrupt Line Enable 2 Interrupt Line Enable 

High-Speed Low Byte Channels High-Speed Low Byte Channels High-Speed Low Byte Channels 

3 Digital 7 Digital I/O Bit 7 3 SDI 7 Digital I/O Bit 7 3 HSD 7 Digital I/O Bit 7 









12 Expansion 2 – reserved 12 CTR 5 Gate 9513 chip 12 C/D – Command Data Note 1 

13 Expansion 3 – reserved 13 CTR 5 In 9513 chip 13 WR – Write Strobe Note 1 

14 Expansion 4 – reserved 14 CTR 4 Gate 9513 chip 14 RD – Read Strobe Note 1 

15 Timer 0 Output 15 CTR 4 In 9513 chip 15 TMR 0 Out, Timer 0 Output 

16 Timer 1 Output 16 CTR 3 Gate 9513 chip 16 TMR 1 Out, Timer 1 Output 

17 Counter 2 Input 17 CTR 3 In 9513 chip 17 CNT 2 In, Counter 2 Input 

18 Counter 0 Input 18 CTR 2 Gate 9513 chip 18 CNT 0 In, Counter 0 Input 

19 +15 VDC Supply 19 CTR 2 In 9513 chip 19 +15 VDC Supply 


21 DAC Pacer Clock Input or Output 21 D in Strobe -- Not Connected -- 21 -- Not Connected -- 

High-Speed High Byte Channels High-Speed High Byte Channels High-Speed High Byte Channels 









30 AGND (Analog Ground) 30 OSC (Frequency Out) 9513 chip 30 AGND (Analog Ground) 

31 DAC3 Analog Out Note 3 31 CTR 5 Out 9513 chip 31 AOUT 0 / Scan 

32 DAC2 Analog Out Note 3 32 CTR 4 Out 9513 chip 32 AOUT1 / Trigger 

33 DAC1 Analog Out Note 3 33 CTR 3 Out 9513 chip 33 AOUT2 / Clock 

34 DAC0 Analog Out Note 3 34 CTR 2 Out 9513 chip 34 AOUT3 / Digital Out 

35 Counter 3 Input 35 CTR 1 Out 9513 chip 35 Counter 3 Input 

36 Counter 1 Input 36 CTR 1 In 9513 chip 36 Counter 1 Input 

37 -15 VDC Supply 37 CTR 1 Gate 9513 chip 37 -15 VDC Supply 

Notes: 

(1) LogBook P3 pin 12, 13, and 14 functions are not user accessible. 

(2) For DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204, the 37-pin P3 connector is obtained by connecting a CA-60 cable to an onboard 

40-pin header. 

(3) Consult your user’s manual in regard to DAC analog output availability for your specific device. For example: 

DaqBook/2020 connects to DACs via BNC connectors and DaqBook/2005 has no DACs. 




P4 to P1, P2, and P3 Correlation 

The following table lists the correlation between the P4 I/O lines and their respective P1, P2 and P3 pin 

locations on the DBK200 Series boards. Ground correlation is provided in a subsequent table. 

P4 Pin Signal Type Description P1, P2, P3 Correlation 

A1 +5VDC Power Expansion +5 Volts P1 pin 1 

P2 pin 18, 20 

P3 pin 20 

B1 +5VDC Power Expansion +5 Volts P1 pin 1 

P2 pin 18, 20 

P3 pin 20 

A2 Port A bit 7 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port A, bit 7 -or- 

P2 expansion Data bit 15 

P2 pin 30 

B2 Port A bit 6 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port A, bit 6 -or- 


P2 pin 31 



P2 pin 32 



P2 pin 33 



P2 pin 34 



P2 pin 35 



P2 pin 36 



P2 pin 37 

A6 Port C bit 7 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port C, bit 7 -or- 


P2 pin 22 

B6 Port C bit 6 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port C, bit 6 -or- 


P2 pin 23 



P2 pin 24 



P2 pin 25 



P2 pin 26 



P2 pin 27 



P2 pin 28 



P2 pin 29 

A10 Ground Dig I/O Digital Common See Ground Tables 

B10 Port B bit 7 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port B, bit 7 -or- 

P2 expansion address bit 0 

P2 pin 3 

A11 Port B bit 6 Dig I/O P2 Digital Port B, bit 6 -or- 


P2 pin 4 



P2 pin 5 



P2 pin 6 



P2 pin 7 

This table is continued. 




P2 expansion RESET 

P2 pin 8 


P2 expansion WRITE 

P2 pin 9 


P2 expansion READ 

P2 pin 10 

B14 Ground Dig I/O Digital Common See Ground Tables 

A15 P3 Dig bit 14 Dig I/O P3 Digital Port bit 14 P3 pin 23 

B15 P3 Dig bit 15 Dig I/O P3 Digital Port bit 15 P3 pin 22 
















B23 XCK Dig I/O Reserved No Connection 


B24 Timer 0 Dig OUT P3 Timer 0 Output P3 pin 15 

A25 Timer 1 Dig OUT P3 Timer 1 Output P3 pin 16 


A26 DAC Pacer Dig I/O External DAC Pacer Clock Input / 

Internal DAC Pacer Output 

P3 pin 21 

B26 ADC Pacer Dig I/O External ADC Pacer Clock Input / 

Internal ADC Pacer Output 

P1 pin 20 

A27 TTL Trigger Dig IN External TTL Trigger Input P1 pin 25 


A28 Counter 3 Dig IN P3 Counter 3 Input P3 pin 35 

B28 Counter 2 Dig IN P3 Counter 2 Input P3 pin 17 

A29 Counter 1 Dig IN P3 Counter 1 Input P3 pin 36 

B29 Counter 0 Dig IN P3 Counter 0 Input P3 pin 18 

A30 CD ACK- Dig IN Reserved No Connection 

B30 SDI Dig IN Reserved No Connection 

A31 Ground Analog Analog Signal Common See Ground Tables 

B31 XI/O Gain 1 Dig OUT Analog Expansion Gain Select bit 1 P1 pin 5 

A32 XI/O Gain 0 Dig OUT Analog Expansion Gain Select bit 0 P1 pin 6 

B32 XI/O Address 3 Dig OUT Analog Exp. Address Select bit 3 P1 pin 3 

A33 XI/O Address 2 Dig OUT Analog Exp. Address Select bit 2 P1 pin 22 

B33 XI/O Address 1 Dig OUT Analog Exp. Address Select bit 1 P1 pin 4 

A34 XI/O Address 0 Dig OUT Analog Exp. Address Select bit 0 P1 pin 23 

B34 External SSH Dig OUT Analog Expansion Simultaneous 

Sample/Hold Signal 

P1 pin 26 


B35 Positive Ref Analog Analog +5 Volt Reference P1 pin 9 

A36 Negative Ref Analog Analog -5 Volt Reference P1 pin 8 

B36 Analog In Ch15 Analog Analog Input Chan 15 (SE) 

Analog Input Chan 7L (DIF) 

P1 pin 11 

A37 Analog In Ch7 Analog Analog Input Chan 7 (SE) 

Analog Input Chan 7H (DIF) 

P1 pin 30 

B37 Ground Analog Analog Signal Common See Ground Tables 



P1 pin 12 



P1 pin 31 


This table is continued. 





P1 pin 13 



P1 pin 32 




P1 pin 14 

B41 Analog In Ch Analog Analog Input Chan 4 (SE) 


P1 pin 33 




P1 pin 15 



P1 pin 34 




P1 pin 16 



P1 pin 35 

A45 Signal Ground Analog Sense Common (SGND) P1-19 



P1 pin 17 



P1 pin 36 




P1 pin 18 



P1 pin 37 

A48 -15VDC Power Expansion -15 Volts P1 pin 2 

P3 pin 37 

B48 +15VDC Power Expansion +15 Volts P1 pin 21 

P3 pin 19 

A49 DAC 0 Analog DAC 0 Output P3 pin 34 

B49 * DAC 2 Analog DAC 2 Output P3 pin 32 

A50 DAC 1 Analog DAC 1 Output P3 pin 33 

B50 * DAC 3 Analog DAC 3 Output P3 pin 31 

* DAC 2 and DAC 3 (from P4 pins B49 and B50, respectively) only apply to DaqBoard/2001, /2003 /2004 

and the equivalent cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards. 


Ground Tables – P4 to P1, P2, and P3 Ground Correlation 

Digital Common (DGND) 

P4 Pin DBK200 DBK201 DBK202 

DBK203 


A10 

B14 

A23 

A24 

B25 

B27 

DBK206 DBK207 DBK208 DBK209 

------- ------- ------- P1-7 ------- ------- P1-7 P1 

------- P2-11 

P2-13 

P2-15 

P2-17 

P2-19 

P2-21 

------- ------- 

------- 

P3-11 

------- 

Analog Common (AGND) 

P2-11 

P2-13 

P2-15 

P2-17 

P2-19 

P2-21 

P3-1 

P3-2 

P3-11 

P3-30 

P4 Pin DBK200 DBK201 DBK202 



A31 

A35 

B37 

A39 

B40 

A42 

B43 

B46 

P1-7 

P1-28 

P1-29 

P1-7 

P1-28 

P1-29 

P1-7 

P1-28 

P1-29 

P2-11 

P2-13 

P2-15 

P2-17 

P2-19 

P2-21 

P3-1 

P3-2 

P3-11 

P3-30 

------- 

P2-11 

P2-13 

P2-15 

P2-17 

P2-19 

P2-21 

P2-11 

P2-13 

P2-15 

P2-17 

P2-19 

P2-21 

------- ------- P3-1 

P3-2 

P3-11 

P3-30 

DBK206 DBK207 DBK208 DBK209 

------- 

P1-28 

P1-29 

P1-7 

P1-28 

P1-29 

------- ------- 

P1-28 

P1-29 

------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- P2 

------- P3-30 ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 877095 System Connections & Pinouts 2-9 

P2 

P3 

P1 

P3


DBK Setup in DaqView 3 

Overview…… 3-1 

Setting up Analog DBKs …… 3-4 

Setting up Digital DBKs …… 3-6 

Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz …. 3-8 

Overview Most DBK card and module options provide for channel expansion and signal conditioning; however, 

some serve as power supplies, and others are no more than interfaces that allow the user to meet desired 

connection needs, for example, the use of BNC connectors. 

For proper operation with DaqBook or DaqBoard systems, most of the DBK options must be configured, 

both physically on the DBK, and in the data acquisition application. 

All DBK configuration-related parameters can be found in the DaqView’s Configure System Hardware 

screen. “Analog Input” type DBKs will be under the P1 section of the screen, “Digital Input” DBKs will 

be under the P2 section, and analog and digital outputs [if applicable] will be under P3. 

The following table, in addition to providing a brief description of DBK options, can be used to quickly 

identify whether the DBK option is of the P1-Analog or of the P2-Digital type. DBKs that require no 

software setup in DaqView are shown in a shaded row and display the comment “No configuration 

in DaqView.” 

DBK Reference for DaqView Users 

DBK Description Type Comment 

DBK1 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK2 4-Channel Voltage Output Card P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK4 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK5 4-Channel Current Output Card P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK7 4-Channel, Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK8 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card P1-ANALOG Must enter JP16 setting in H/W Conf. 

DBK9 8-Channel RTD Card P1-ANALOG Must enter JP4 setting in H/W Conf. 

DBK10 3-Slot Expansion Chassis Expansion No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK11A Screw-Terminal Option & BNC Option Card Interface Must select “Direct Signal Conn.” 

DBK12 Low Gain A/I Multiplexer Card P1-ANALOG For these three DBKs: In DaqView’s 



High Gain A/I Multiplexer Card 

Universal Current, Voltage Input Card 

P1-ANALOG 

P1-ANALOG 

Acquisition Setup tab select 100 kHz 

as the Internal Clock speed. 

DBK16 2-Channel Strain-Gage Card P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK17 4-Channel Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card P1-ANALOG Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Conf. 

DBK18 4-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card P1-ANALOG Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Conf. 

DBK19 14-Channel Thermocouple Card P1-ANALOG Must select T/C Type in DaqView’s 

Channel Setup Window. See Note 1. 

DBK20 Digital I/O Card, with screw terminals P2-DIGITAL Digital I/O (Note 2) 

DBK21 Digital I/O Card, with DB37 male connectors P2-DIGITAL Digital I/O (Note 2) 

DBK23 Isolated Digital Input Chassis P2-DIGITAL Digital I/O (Note 2) 

DBK24 Isolated Digital Output Chassis P2-DIGITAL Digital I/O (Note 2) 

DBK25 8-Channel Relay Output Card P2-DIGITAL Digital I/O (Note 2) 

DBK30A Rechargeable Battery Module Power No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card Power No configuration in DaqView. 

Note 1: If using a DBK19 with a /2000 Series Device, you should select 100 kHz as the Internal Clock speed in 

DaqView’s Acquisition Setup tab. 

Note 2: After the DBK option is selected in Hardware Configuration, the Digital I/O settings are made in 

DaqView’s Digital I/O Window. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual 968194 DBK Setup in DaqView 3-1



DBK33 Triple-Output Power Supply Card Power No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK34 Vehicle UPS Module Power No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK34A UPS / Battery Module Power No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK40 18-Connector BNC Analog Interface Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK41 10-Slot Expansion Module Expansion No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK42 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module P1-ANALOG 5B Module selection, see Note 3. 

DBK43A 8-Channel Strain-Gage Module P1-ANALOG Must enter J2 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK44 2-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card P1-ANALOG 5B Module selection, see Note 3. 

DBK45 4-Channel SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card P1-ANALOG Must enter SW6 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK46 4-Channel Analog Output Card 4 DAC No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK48 16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module P1-ANALOG 8B Module selection, see Note 3. 

DBK50 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG Must enter JP1C setting in H/W Config. 

DBK51 8-Channel Low-Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG Must enter JP1C setting in H/W Config. 

DBK52 14-Channel Thermocouple Input Module P1-ANALOG 

DBK53 16-Ch. Low-Gain Multiplexing Module P1-ANALOG 

DBK54 16-Ch. High-Gain Multiplexing Module P1-ANALOG 

For these three DBKs: In DaqView’s 

Acquisition Setup tab select 100 kHz as 

the Internal Clock speed. 

DBK55 8-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK60 3-Slot Expansion Chassis Expansion No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK65 8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module P1-ANALOG Must enter S1 setting in H/W Config. 

DBK70 Vehicle Network Interface Mux. Module P1-ANALOG Refer to the DBK70 User’s Manual 

DBK80 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Card with 

Excitation Output 

P1-ANALOG No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK81 7-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG 

DBK82 14-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG 

DBK83 14-Ch. T/C Card, High-Accuracy; uses 

Connection Pod 

P1-ANALOG 

DBK84 14-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG 

Must select the Thermocouple Type in 

DaqView’s Channel Setup Window. 

DBK85 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module P1-ANALOG No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK90 56-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG Must select the Thermocouple Type in 

DaqView’s Channel Setup Window. 

DBK200 P4-to-P1 Adapter Card Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK201 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK202 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, with 

Screw Terminals & Locators for RC Filter 

DBK203 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Chassis, with 

Screw Terminals & Locators for RC Filter 

Interface No configuration in DaqView. 


DBK204 DBK203 with a CA-209 CE Cable Kit Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK204c DBK203 with a CA-209c CE Cable Kit Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK205 P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK206 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, 

with Screw Terminals 


DBK207 16-Channel, 5B Carrier Board P1-ANALOG 5B Module selection, see Note 3. 

DBK207/ 

CJC 

DBK207 with Cold Junction Compensation P1-ANALOG 5B Module selection, see Note 3. 

Note 3: After selecting the DBK option in the Hardware Configuration window, 5B [or 8B] Module 

selection is made in the DaqView main window, on the Channel Setup tab (for Analog and Scanned 

Digital Inputs). Clicking on the Units column brings up the 5B [or 8B] Module selection function. 

3-2 DBK Setup in DaqView 968194 DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual



DBK208 Relay Carrier Board, Opto-22 Compatible P2-DIGITAL Must enter S1, JP-0, and JP-1 settings 

in the H/W Configuration window. 

DBK209 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK210 Grayhill TM 70M-Series Mini-Module Carrier 

Board. 

P2-DIGITAL Must enter S1 settings and set the banks 

for Input or Output in the H/W 

Configuration window. 

DBK213 Screw-Terminal & Exp. Card Module Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK214 16-Connector BNC Interface Module Interface No configuration in DaqView. 

DBK215 16-Connector BNC Connection Module Interface No configuration in DaqView. 


thru 


Rear Panels for use with DaqBoard/260, 

DBK60, and LogBook/360. 

Connector 

Panels 

No configuration in DaqView. 


Setting Up Analog DBKs 

If you have not already done so, review the applicable individual DBK section to ensure that the DBK 

option is physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require configuration. 

Understand your DBK’s physical configuration before attempting to set the device in 

DaqView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a 

DBK45 in DaqView, you would need to know the physical setup of rotary switch SW6 

to properly set the address. To expedite the configuration, it is a good idea to have the 

identity and setting information ready for each DIP-switch, rotary switch, and jumper, 

as applicable. 


If you need to go beyond the basic software setup information that follows, refer to the 

DaqView documentation. Note that you can access PDF versions of documents from the 

data acquisition CD by using the button on the CD’s intro page. 

Complete the following steps to set up analog DBKs in DaqView. 

1. From DaqView’s main screen, pull down the Device menu, and select “Configure Hardware 

Settings.” 

Selecting Configure Hardware Settings from the Device Pull-down Menu 

The Configure System Hardware screen appears, showing the channel assignments. 

Configure System Hardware Screen 


The DBKs typically have a channel address set physically on the device, by either a 

switch or a header. The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware 

setting. Thus, in step 2 below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK when 

that DBK is physically set for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more 

information, if needed. 

2. Under Analog I/O Option Cards External Connection, select the expansion down-arrow for the 

chosen Daq Device channel, for example, P1 Channel 0. A “drop-down” will list the available 

analog DBK options. 

An alternative to using the expansion down-arrow to access the external connection dropdown 

list, is to click within the text box. For example, in the following figure, after clicking 

on P1 Channel 0’s “Direct Signal Connection” text, the drop-down list appeared. 

Configure System Hardware Screen Showing Analog I/O Option Cards, 

External Connection, P1 Channel Pull-down List for Channel 0 

3. Select the applicable DBK card from the drop-down list. 

If the card has jumper or switch setups that need to be set in DaqView, a related window will appear. 

Three extracted examples follow: (a) Switch Settings: S1 Sub Address, (b) Switch Settings: SW6 

(rotary), and (c) Shunt Settings: JP16 (3-pin shunt). 

Examples from Setup Windows 

4. Set the software DIP-switch settings, shunt-settings, and so forth to match the hardware settings on the 

actual DBK(s). 

5. When all the channels and sub-addresses are set correctly, select OK to return to the DaqView main 

screen. 

6. From DaqView, complete the channel setup, acquisition setup, and data destination setup for each of 

the new DBKs. 


If needed, refer to the DaqView documentation for more information. Note that you can 

access PDF versions of documents from the data acquisition CD by using the button on the CD’s intro page. 

This completes the software setup for analog DBK options. 


Setting Up Digital DBKs 

If you have not already done so, review the applicable DBK section to ensure that the DBK option is 

physically set as desired. Note that certain DBKs do not require hardware or software configuration. 


If you need to go beyond the basic software setup information that follows, refer to the 

DaqView documentation. Note that you can access PDF versions of documents from the 

data acquisition CD by using the button on the CD’s intro page. 

Complete the following steps to set up digital DBKs in DaqView. 

1. From DaqView’s main screen, pull down the Device menu, and select “Configure Hardware 

Settings.” 

Selecting Configure Hardware Settings from the Device Pull-down Menu 

The Configure System Hardware screen appears, showing the channel assignments. 

Configure System Hardware Screen 


DBKs typically have a channel address set on the device, by either a switch or a header. 

The channel designated in software must agree with the hardware setting. Thus, in step 2 

below, Channel 0 will only be used to select a specific DBK when that DBK is physically set 

for Channel 0. Refer to the specific DBK section for more information, if needed. 

2. Under Digital Option Cards, select the expansion down-arrow for the chosen Daq Device 

channel, for example, P2 Channel 0. A “drop-down” will list the available digital DBK 

options. 

An alternative to using the expansion down-arrow to access the external connection drop-down 

list, is to click within the text box. For example, in the following figure, after clicking on P2 

Channel 5’s “None,” a drop-down list will appear, like the one shown for Channel 0. 

Configure System Hardware Screen Showing Digital Option Cards, 

External Connection, P2 Channel Pull-down List for Channel 0 

3. Select the applicable digital DBK card. 

If the card has jumpers or switches, a related window will appear. Two examples follow. The first is 

for DIP-switch and jumper settings for a DBK208. The other is for a DBK25 DIP-switch. 

Examples from Setup Windows (These vary according to the DBK) 

4. If applicable, set the software DIP-switch and other settings (such as jumpers) to match the 

hardware settings on the actual DBK(s). 

5. After all the settings are confirmed correct, select OK to return to the DaqView main screen. 

6. From DaqView, complete the channel setup, acquisition setup, and data destination setup for 

each of the new DBKs. 


If needed, refer to the DaqView documentation for more information. Note that you can 

access PDF versions of documents from the data acquisition CD by using the button on the CD’s intro page. 

This completes the software setup for digital DBK options. 


Setting Internal Clock Speed to 100 kHz 

This section applies to DaqView users who are using one or more of the following DBK options in 

conjunction with a DaqBook/2000 Series Device, DaqBoard/2000, DaqBoard/2001, DaqBoard/2005 or a 

compact PCI counterpart of these boards; i.e., cPCI DaqBoard/2000c, cPCI DaqBoard/2001c, and cPCI 

DaqBoard/2005c. 

DBKs impacted at the time of this writing are: DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK19, DBK52, DBK53, and 

DBK54. 

Note: In DaqView’s Configure Systems Hardware window, after selecting DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, 

DBK19, DBK52, DBK53, or DBK54 a message box should prompt you to select an internal clock 

speed of 100 kHz. 

A Message Box Regarding Specific DBKs and the 100 kHz Internal Clock Speed Setting 

To select an “Internal Clock Speed” of 100 kHz: 

1. Select the Acquisition Setup tab on DaqView’s main window. 

2. On the lower left corner of the window, under Scan Configuration, 

click the Preferences button. 

The Advanced Options window will appear (following figure). 

Note: The Advanced Options box can also be accessed from the 

Windows pull-down menu. 

3. Under “Internal Clock Speed,” 

select 100 kHz. 

4. Click the OK button to return to 

DaqView’s main window. 

The internal clock is now set for 

100 kHz. 


DBK Setup in LogView 4 


Setting up Analog DBKs …… 4-4 

Setting up Digital DBKs …… 4-7 

Overview Most DBK card and module options provide for channel expansion and signal conditioning; however, 

some serve as power supplies, and others are no more than interfaces that allow the user to meet desired 

connection needs, for example, the use of BNC connectors. 

For proper operation with LogBook systems, most of the DBK options must be configured, both physically 

on the DBK, and in the LogView program. All DBK configuration-related parameters can be found in the 

program’s LogBook Hardware Configuration Window, sometimes referred to as a hardware tree. “Analog 

Input” type DBKs will be under the P1 branch of the tree, “Digital Input” DBKs will be under the P2 

branch, and analog and digital outputs [if applicable] will be under P3. 

The following table, in addition to providing a brief description of DBK options, can be used to quickly 

identify whether the DBK option is of the P1-Analog or of the P2-Digital type. DBKs that require no 

software setup in LogView, or do not apply to LogBook systems are shown in a shaded row and have a 

comment regarding the status of “no configuration” or “not used with LogBook.” 

DBK Reference for LogView Users 


DBK1 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module Interface No configuration in LogView. 

DBK2 4-Channel Voltage Output Card P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK4 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card P1-ANALOG Set the Filter Mode to “On” or “Bypass.” 

DBK5 4-Channel Current Output Card P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK7 4-Ch. Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK8 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card P1-ANALOG Select Input Voltage Range. 

DBK9 8-Channel RTD Card P1-ANALOG Select the RTD Type (resistance). 

DBK10 3-Slot Expansion Chassis Expansion No configuration in LogView. 

DBK11A Screw-Terminal & BNC Option Card Interface No configuration in LogView. 

DBK12 Low Gain A/I Multiplexer Card P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK13 High Gain A/I Multiplexer Card P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK15 Universal Current, Voltage Input Card P1-ANALOG Set RA and RB resistor settings. 

DBK16 2-Channel Strain-Gage Card P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK17 4-Ch Simultaneous Sample & Hold Card P1-ANALOG Enter Gain Resistor (RG) information. 

DBK18 4-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card P1-ANALOG Enter Gain Resistor (RG) information. 

DBK19 14-Channel Thermocouple Card P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK20 Digital I/O Card, with screw terminals P2-DIGITAL Select Mode & Control Resolution (Note 2). 

DBK21 Digital I/O Card, with DB37 male 

connectors 

P2-DIGITAL Select Mode & Control Resolution (Note 2). 

DBK23 Isolated Digital Input Chassis P2-DIGITAL Select Control Resolution (Note 2). 

DBK24 Isolated Digital Output Chassis P2-DIGITAL Select Control Resolution (Note 2) 

DBK25 8-Channel Relay Output Card P2-DIGITAL Select Control Resolution (Note 2) 

DBK30A Rechargeable Battery Module Power No configuration in LogView. 

DBK32A Auxiliary Power Supply Card Power No configuration in LogView. 

Note 1: The “note 1” comment indicates that LogView’s Hardware/Configuration window is used to select the DBK; but 

does not provide any other configuration options for that specific DBK. 

Note 2: For the P2-DIGITAL type DBKs, Mode permits selection of “Input” or “Output.” The modes for DBK23, DBK24, 

and DBK25 are pre-set. Control Resolution permits selection of “Individual Bits” or “Single Port of Bits.” 

DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual 987693 DBK Setup in LogView 4-1



DBK33 Triple-Output Power Supply Card Power No configuration in LogView. 

DBK34 Vehicle UPS Module Power No configuration in LogView. 

DBK34A UPS / Battery Module Power No configuration in LogView. 

DBK40 18-Connector BNC Analog Interface Interface No configuration in LogView. 

DBK41 10-Slot Expansion Module Expansion No configuration in LogView. 

DBK42 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module P1-ANALOG Select 5B Modules. 

DBK43A 8-Channel Strain-Gage Module P1-ANALOG Can set CAL/NORM switch. 

DBK44 2-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card P1-ANALOG Select 5B Modules. 

DBK45 4-Ch. SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card P1-ANALOG Enter Gain Resistor (RG) information. 

DBK46 4-Channel Analog Output Card 4 DAC Not used with LogBook. 

DBK48 16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module P1-ANALOG *** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 *** 

DBK50 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK51 8-Channel Low-Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK52 14-Channel Thermocouple Input Module P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK53 16-Ch. Low-Gain Multiplexing Module P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK54 16-Ch. High-Gain Multiplexing Module P1-ANALOG (Note 1) 

DBK55 8-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module P1-ANALOG *** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 *** 

DBK60 3-Slot Expansion Chassis Expansion No configuration in LogView. 

DBK65 8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module P1-ANALOG *** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 *** 

DBK70 Vehicle Network Interface Mux. Module P1-ANALOG Refer to the DBK70 User’s Manual 

DBK80 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Card 

with Excitation Output 

P1-ANALOG No configuration in LogView. 

DBK81 7-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK82 14-Channel T/C Card, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK83 14-Ch. T/C Card, High-Accuracy; uses 

Connection Pod 

P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK84 14-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG Select Thermocouple Type (J, K, T, E, etc.) 

DBK85 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module P1-ANALOG *** See Special Case Table, page 4-3 *** 

DBK90 56-Ch. T/C Module, High-Accuracy P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK100 DBK100 Series; In-Vehicle T/C 

Measurement System 

P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK200 P4-to-P1 Adapter Card Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK201 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK202 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, with 

Terminals & Locators for RC Filter 

DBK203 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Chassis, with 

Terminals & Locators for RC Filter 

Interface Not used with LogBook. 


DBK204 DBK203 with a CA-209 CE Cable Kit Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK204c DBK203 with a CA-209c CE Cable Kit Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK205 P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK206 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board, 

with Screw Terminals 


Note 1: The “note 1” comment indicates that LogView’s Hardware/Configuration window is used to select the DBK; but 

does not provide any other configuration options for that specific DBK. 

4-2 DBK Setup in LogView 987693 DBK Option Cards and Modules User’s Manual



DBK207 16-Channel, 5B Carrier Board P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK207/ 

CJC 

DBK207 with Cold Junction 

Compensation 

P1-ANALOG Not used with LogBook. 

DBK208 Relay Carrier Board, Opto-22 Compatible P2-DIGITAL Not used with LogBook. 

DBK209 P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK210 Grayhill TM 70M-Series Mini-Module 

Carrier Board. 

P2-DIGITAL Not used with LogBook. 

DBK213 Screw-Terminal & Exp. Card Module Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK214 16-Connector BNC Interface Module Interface Not used with LogBook. 

DBK215 16-Connector BNC Connection Module Interface Not used with LogBook. 


thru 


Rear Panels for use with DaqBoard/260, 

DBK60, and LogBook/360. 

Connector 

Panels 

No configuration in LogView. 

SPECIAL CASES – DBK Recognition in LogView for DBK48, 55, 65, and 85 

LogView does not include the means to directly select the following DBK options. However, these DBKs will 

still function fine with LogBook and LogView. To do so we get the system to recognize these devices by 

selecting a different, but related DBK option. 

DBK48 16-Slot 8B Signal Conditioning Module 

To use a DBK48 and its 8B modules with LogBook: Select DBK42 in LogView. This will recognize the 

DBK48, but will identify it as a DBK42. For each 8B module, select the 5B module that exhibits the same 

measurement ranges; three examples follow: 

For SC-8B30-01 select SC-5B30-01 as both have an Input Range of ±10 mV; and an Output Range of ±5V. 

For SC-8B34-02 select SC-5B34-02 as both are Type 100 Ohm Pt; with an Input Range of 0°C to +100°C. 

For SC-8B47-T-07 select SC-5B47-T-07 as both are a Type T Thermocouple, with an Input Range of 0°C to +200°C. 

DBK55 8-Ch. Frequency to Voltage Input Module 

A single DBK55 has the functionality of two DBK7 cards. When using a DBK55 with LogBook, select 

DBK7 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK55, but will identify it as a DBK7. Next do one of the 

following, as applicable: 

(a) If the DBK55 is set to the L sub-address, Select DBK7 (0) and DBK7 (1) 

(b) If the DBK55 is set to the H sub-address, Select DBK7 (2) and DBK7 (3) 

DBK65 8-Ch. Transducer Interface Module 

To use a DBK65 with LogBook: First select DBK80 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK65, but will 

identify it as a DBK80 (which has eight additional channels). Next do one of the following as applicable: 

(a) If the DBK65 is set to the L sub-address, use channels 0 through 7; and ignore the displayed 

unused channels (8 through 15). 

(b) If the DBK65 is set to the H sub-address, use channels 8 through 15; and ignore the displayed 

unused channels (0 through 7). 

DBK85 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module 

To use a DBK85 with LogBook, select DBK80. This will recognize the DBK85, but will identify it as a 

DBK80. 


Setting-up Analog DBKs 




LogView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a 

DBK4 in LogView, you would need to know the physical setup of jumpers JP7 and JP8 

in order to properly set the Filter Mode for each channel. 


The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView, 

and should be referred to if you need to go beyond the basic setup information that follows. 

Complete the following steps to set up analog DBKs in LogView. 

1. Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the Hardware Configuration 

button in LogView’s toolbar. A window similar to the following should appear. 

Selecting P1, Analog IO, and a Mode of Single-Ended 

2. Select P1, Analog IO and verify that its mode is set to Single-Ended. See preceding figure. 






3. Select an available channel, such as P1_CH00, and assign it to the specific DBK option. As in the 

above note, the DBK option’s physical channel must agree with the channel selected in LogView. In 

the ongoing example we have selected one DBK4. Up to 8 DBK4s could be selected for P1_CH00. 


Expanding P1_CH00 with a DBK4 

4. Configure the DBK option(s) as applicable for your situation. For example, when configuring 

DBK4s, ensure the filter mode (“On” or “Bypass”) agrees with the setup on the actual card(s). 

Setting the DBK4 Filter Mode for Channel 0 to Bypass 

Note: Setups in software must agree with the physical settings on the DBKs. Refer to the applicable 

DBK section for detailed information. 

5. Click the OK button to accept the settings. 

6. Click the Analog Input button to view the new setup in the Analog Input Channel Configuration 

Window. Verify all channel numbers. Assign user labels as desired. 

The analog input spreadsheet (see following figure) uses four tabs to group analog 

input parameters. Always visible are the Physical Channel, User Label, On/Off, realtime 

Reading, Range, Units, and Channel Type columns. 

Clicking a tab exposes one of the four sub-windows of parameters: 

• Storage 

• DBK Parameters 

• User Scaling 

• 2-Point Calibration 

If beneficial, adjust column width by placing the cursor on the line between 

columns (in the column header) and drag the line left or right as needed; for 

example -- to make room for a longer, more descriptive user label. 


Analog Input Channel Configuration Window 

7. From the Analog Input Channel Configuration window, select the DBK Parameters tab to view the 

specific settings for each DBK channel. 

Some DBKs have settings that are physically set on the hardware via jumpers or 

switches. In these cases, the designated parameter settings in LogView must agree 

with those on the hardware. Setting one does not automatically set the other; in 

other words, you must make configuration settings in both software and hardware, 

when applicable. For information regarding DBK hardware configuration, refer to 

the specific DBK sections, as applicable. 

8. Ensure that the DBK parameters are correctly set at this time. If necessary, refer to the applicable 

DBK section for an explanation of the parameters; for example, DBK4 programmable filter values. 

You can resize the Analog Input Channel Configuration window by dragging its right 

edge further to the right. This allows you to see up to four parameters for each channel. 

When possible, use User Label names that closely resemble the Physical Channel 

names. This practice makes channel identification easier to remember and helps 

avoid confusion. 

Example: If Physical Channel P1_CH01 was being used for an alarm, then Alarm-P101 

would be a logical User Label. 

A note regarding the Range column: 

All LogBook channels and many DBK channels have a programmable gain amplifier (PGA) that 

provides multiple ranges. Adjusting the range allows you to zoom in or out on your signal for 

maximum signal resolution for the range needed. If the Units and/or Scale (from the User Scaling 

tab) are changed, the available ranges are presented in terms of the new units. For example, if a user 

scaling of ×20 is applied to a channel to convert volts to PSI (pounds per square inch), the available 

range choices for that LogBook channel would be ±200 PSI, ±100 PSI, ±50 PSI, 0-400 PSI, 0-200 

PSI, etc. 

Some DBKs have hardware switches and jumpers for configuration. When using 

such DBKs, corresponding parameters may need to be set in the LogBook Hardware 

Configuration window. 


Setting-up Digital DBKs 




LogView’s Hardware Configuration window. For example, if you were configuring a 

DBK23, you would need to know the physical setup of switch S1 in order to select the 

correct channel in LogView. 


The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView, 

and should be referred to if you need to go beyond the basic setup information that follows. 

Complete the following steps to set up digital DBKs in LogView. 

1. Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window by clicking the Hardware Configuration 

button in LogView’s toolbar. A window similar to the following should appear. 

Selecting P1, Analog IO, and a Mode of Single-Ended 

2. Select P2, Digital IO and verify that its mode is set to Expansion Channels. See preceding figure. 






3. Select an available channel, such as P1_CH00, and assign it to the specific DBK option. As in the 

above note, the DBK option’s physical channel must agree with the channel selected in LogView. In 

the ongoing example we have selected one DBK4. Up to 8 DBK4s could be selected for P1_CH00. 

Expanding P2, Digital IO_Bank 0 with a DBK20 


4. Configure the DBK option(s) as applicable for your situation. For digital DBKs this typically 

consists of selecting the correct location under P2, Digital IO. 

Note: Setups in software must agree with the physical settings on the DBKs. Refer to the applicable 

DBK section for detailed information. 

5. Click the OK button to accept the settings. 

6. Click the Digital Input button to view the new setup in the Digital Input Channel Configuration 

Window. Verify all channel numbers. Assign user labels as desired. 

Digital & Counter Input Channel Configuration Window 

This completes the software setup for digital DBK options. 


o The DBK sections contain parameter definitions and information regarding DBK 

hardware and software settings. 

o The LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) contains a detailed description of LogView, 

which should be referred to if you need additional information regarding the out-of-thebox 

software. 


Troubleshooting 5 

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), Handling Notice …… 5-1 

Troubleshooting Checklist …… 5-1 

Frequently Asked Questions …… 5-3 

Customer Assistance …… 5-7 

Please read through this chapter before calling for help. Many customers have solved problems without 

factory assistance. 


A list of API error codes appears in the Programmer’s Manual included on your CD-ROM. Note 

that API does not apply to LogBook. 

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), Handling Notice 

The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components. Semiconductor 

devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always handle components 

carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuit components unless you are 

following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD controlled area. Such guidelines include the use 

of properly grounded mats and wrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures. 

Troubleshooting Checklist 

For most problems, proceed through the following checklist. When applicable, be sure to follow ESD 

prevention guidelines to avoid damaging components. 

1. Power. Check power and fuses to all affected units. 

2. If the System Parameters Need Reset. Cycle the power “off” then back “on.” This will often reset 

system parameters to the correct values. 

3. Signal. Check signal lines and connectors. Connectors must be free of corrosion. All lines should 

be undamaged and free of sharp bends and twists. Signal paths should avoid potential sources of 

noise such as high voltage and electromagnetic interference. 

4. Self-Test. Run system diagnostic tests to confirm the LogBook or Daq device is properly connected 

to the PC. 

5. Software. Try to acquire data with the DaqView windows application if you are using a Daq device 

or LogView windows application if you are using a LogBook. If you are unable to acquire data in 

either DaqView or LogView and another program, a hardware problem is likely. If you can obtain 

readings by enabling the input reading column, but cannot log data to disk, an interrupt problem is 

indicated. 

6. Interrupt. Make sure the interrupt selected matches the interrupt used by the parallel port [for 

LogBooks and DaqBooks] or the interrupt selected by the hardware switches [on the DaqBoard]. 

The program MSD.EXE (comes with DOS 6.0 and later) reports the interrupt usage of the computer. 

In some cases, an interrupt conflict may arise due to a Windows printer driver stealing the interrupt. 

For such a problem, you must edit the SYSTEM.INI file and remove lines loading the printer 

drivers. In other cases, the hardware is incapable of accepting interrupts through the parallel port. 

7. Parallel port. Make sure the parallel port selected is the same as the port to which the LogBook or 

DaqBook is connected. Also, make sure the correct protocol is selected. For Daq device users, Daq 

device configuration or DaqTest.exe will verify this. Also see Parallel Port Troubleshooting Tips. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 967094 Troubleshooting Tips 5-1

8. Software setup. Make sure the device selected in software matches the hardware being used. Verify 

that setup parameters are correct for your application and attached DBK cards and modules. 

9. Power management. The POWER.EXE power management program that is used by some notebook 

computers is known to affect proper operation of the parallel and PCMCIA ports. If you are having 

such trouble, remove the line loading this program from your AUTOEXEC.BAT file. 

10. Device drivers. Some computers are pre-configured for numerous device drivers in their 

AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS files. These drivers often conflict and can be a source of 

trouble. It is helpful for diagnostic purposes to boot the machine and test the system with the 

minimum number of device drivers loaded. 

Parallel Port Troubleshooting Tips 

Note: Does not apply to LogBook 

After completing the Test Hardware function within the Daq device Configuration control panel applet, if a 

connection is not made, try the following troubleshooting tips: 

Windows 95/98/Me/2000 

1. Check the power supply to make sure power is applied. 

2. Check the parallel port cable for tight connections. 

3. Try all of the protocols listed in the Daq device Configuration control panel. The parallel port 

might have a communication protocol other than standard or normal mode. 

4. If you still have not established communications, go to Control Panel, System, Device Manager, 

Ports, LPT1 and verify the following: 

(a) Under the General and Driver sections, make sure the parallel port is a standard parallel 

port with a driver installed and that no resource conflicts are present. If no driver is 

installed or resource conflicts are present, you need to resolve these issues with your 

computer manufacturer or information services department. 

(b) Under the Resource section, make sure the parallel port has an interrupt level assigned. 

If not, add one by unchecking the “Use automatic settings” button, selecting “Basic 

configuration 0001” so the same base address is maintained but an interrupt level is 

added, and double-clicking on the interrupt level so you can add the interrupt level. 

Generally, 7 is reserved for parallel ports but pick one to avoid conflicts. Reboot the 

computer. 

(c) If the parallel port is configured as an ECP parallel port and there are connection 

problems, you need to access the BIOS and change the parallel port to a standard or 

normal mode. You can generally access the BIOS by pressing F2 or Esc during booting 

of the computer. You should see a message “Press F2 to enter setup.” Change the parallel 

port mode from ECP to standard or normal. Reboot the computer. 

(d) Windows/2000 users: 

(1) In the Device Manager’s list, expand “Ports (COM & LPT)” 

(2) Highlight “ECP Printer Port (LPT1)” and ‘right-click.’ 

(3) On the Properties box that appears, select the “Port Settings” Tab. 

(4) Select the radio-button option that reads, “Use any interrupt assigned to the port.” 

5-2 Troubleshooting Tips 967094 DBK Option Cards and Modules

Windows NT 

1. Check the power supply to make sure power is applied. 

2. Check the parallel port cable for tight connections. Try all of the protocols listed in the Daq device 

Configuration control panel. The parallel port might have a communication protocol other than 

standard or normal mode. 

3. If you still have not established communications, go to Control Panel, Devices, Hardware Profiles, 

Parallel Port and verify the parallel port drivers are installed. If the drivers are not installed, you 

need to resolve this with your computer manufacturer. Also, check that the parallel port has an 

interrupt level assigned to it by looking at the parallel port resources in the Daq device 

Configuration control panel. 

4. If it is necessary to add an interrupt level or to change the parallel port communication port, you 

need to access the BIOS during computer booting. You should see a message that reads similar to 

“Press F2 to enter setup.” If the parallel port is configured for ECP or EPP, change it to standard 

or normal; then reboot the computer. 

Frequently Asked Questions Note: Most of these questions pertain to older devices. 

Q: What are the input and output signal levels on P2 and P3? 

A: P2 and P3 are TTL compatible with high levels no greater than 5 volts and low signals at 0 volts or 

ground. 

Q: What DBK options require the SSH jumper on JP2 to operate? 

A: The SSH jumper must be installed on DaqBook/100 Series devices, DaqBook/200 Series devices and 

ISA-Type DaqBoards to operate the following DBK options: DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK17, 

DBK45, DBK50 and DBK51. Daq PC Cards do not have a JP2, but will operate these cards as long as 

power for these cards is available. 

Q: How do I set a DaqBook/112 to measure single-ended vs differential analog input signals? 

A: DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 models are set by JP4's position. DaqBook/200, 

DaqBook/216, and all DaqBoard models and Daq PC Cards are set by software commands. 

All Daq devices must be set to single ended mode in order for DBK options to operate. 

Q: How do I set a DaqBook/100 device to measure bipolar (+5v to -5v) instead of unipolar (0 to 10v) 

analog input signals? 

A: DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 models are set by JP3's position and are unable to 

mix bipolar and unipolar input signals (unless using a DBK15 option). DaqBook/200, DaqBook /216, 

all DaqBoard models and Daq PC Cards are set by software commands and are able to mix bipolar and 

unipolar inputs by channel. 

Q: I am trying to measure differential signals, but my Daq device is not reading the signal correctly. 

What could be wrong? 

A: The Daq device must be configured to measure differential signals. Differential signals are measured by 

reading the signal at the high input with respect to common and then subtract the signal at the low input 

with respect to common. In addition, common must be connected at the Daq device in order to measure 

the differential signal accurately. If the signal being measured only has 2 wires, connect a 100 KΩ 

resistor between low and common to provide a reference. 


Q: I can read analog inputs at the primary Daq device, but my ISA-type DBK option card doesn’t 

work. What could be wrong? 

A: The analog DBK cards require power to operate. This power can be provided by the DaqBook or ISAtype 

DaqBoard (via JP1), DBK32A, or a DBK33. The following voltages [with respect to P1’s pin 7] 

must be present to power up analog DBK option cards: 

• +15 volts on P1, pin 21 

• -15 volts on P1, pin 2 

• +5 volts on P1, pin 1 

Note: Daq PC Cards do not have power available. If all power is present, there could be a failure in the 

DBK option or the Daq device. If the first channel of the DBK option can be read, but other 

channels cannot, then the failure is in the primary Daq device. 

Q: How does the Daq P1 expansion bus work? 

A: All Daq products have 16 single-ended analog inputs. Each of these analog inputs can be expanded to 

16 additional inputs with DBK options, providing up to 256 analog inputs. The primary Daq device uses 

4 digital output lines on P1 to multiplex the DBK option channels through each analog input of the Daq 

device. 

Channel numbers on the Daq device are numbered 0 through 15; and expansion channels are numbered 

16 through 271. Since each Daq channel can have up to 16 option channels, multiple DBK options that 

have 2, 4, or 8 channels can be multiplexed through one primary Daq device channel. 

Q: How do I get analog outputs, other than the 0 to 5 volt analog outputs, from my DaqBook/100 

Series device, DaqBook/200 Series device, or my ISA-type Daq device? 

A: DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, and ISA-type DaqBoard device analog outputs (12 bit D/A 

converters) are 0 to 5 volts using the internal -5 volt reference. For different or higher analog output 

ranges (-10 to +10 volts max), you must provide and external reference voltage equal to the maximum 

analog output value desired times -1 (-10 volts for 0 - 10 volt range). 

This reference voltage must be applied to pin 10 for D/A channel 0 and pin 26 for D/A channel 1 with 

respect to pin 28 or 29 on P1. JP2 on the Daq device must be set to DAC EXT for each channel used. 

You cannot use the SSH line for smart DBK options (DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK17, DBK45, 

DBK50 and DBK51) when using an external reference on D/A channel 1. 

Failure to remove the SSH jumper on JP2 when applying an external reference voltage to D/A 

channel 1 (pin 26) will result in damage to the Daq device. 

Note: Daq PC-Cards do not have analog outputs. 

Q: My computer uses ECP is that the same as EPP? 

A: No. ECP (Enhanced Computer Port) is a different protocol than EPP (Enhanced Parallel Port). 

• ECP will function with DaqBooks. 

• ECP will function with LogBooks. 

• ECP will work with WaveBooks only if, 

(a) the WaveBook has a 262-0301 rev b or later chip. Note that chip upgrades are available. 

(b) the version of WaveView being used is higher than version 7.8. 

Q: I cannot find where the software settings for the DBK7 and the DBK4 cards are located in 

DaqView. Where do I find these? 

A: After selecting a DBK4 or DBK7 card in "Configure Hardware Settings," a dialog box appears that 

allows you to select the number of cards and the sub address settings. There is a button in 

the lower right hand corner. After clicking on the button the software settings for these 

cards can be set. 


Q: The DBK4 seems to kill my system. When the DBK4 is removed, the system functions properly. 

Does this imply that the DBK4 is defective? 

A: More often than not this indicates a lack of available power. The most common symptom of low 

power is a "dead" unit. Failure to provide adequate power can damage one or more components in 

your system, but more frequently, the system simply won’t work. 

It is important that you calculate your system's power demand before connecting the DBK4, as you 

may need an auxiliary power supply. Each DBK4 draws 2750 mW, which is high in comparison to 

the power drawn by other DBK cards. As can be seen in the following table, when using a 

DaqBook/100 Series product you will always need additional power, while other systems can typically 

power at least one DBK4 card. 


Refer to Power Management in the DBK Basics section, located near the front of the 

manual, for more information on calculating the system power demand for all your DBK 

cards. 



LogBook +5 VDC @ 0.10 A from P1-1, P2-18, P2-20, P3-20 

+15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-21 

+15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-19 

-15 VDC @ 0.15 A from P1-2 

-15 VDC @ 0.05 A from P3-37 













& /2000c Series 

5000 mW; 5 V at 1 A; ±15 V at 75 mA each (with 

exception of DaqBoard/2002 and /2002c) 

DaqBook/2000 Series 15000 mW; 5V at 1 A; ± 15 V at 500 mA each 




DBK32A 15000 mW 


DBK34 5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A 

DBK34A 5 A-hr in 12 V mode; fused at 8 A 


Q: How do I calculate the total amount of power needed for all my DBK options? 

A: You can calculate your power needs with the tables in Power Management, in the DBK Basics section 

located near the front of this manual. 

Q: The CA-134 cable does not work with my Daq PC-Card. Why not? 

A: Daq PC-Cards Daq/112B and Daq/216B that have a serial number equal to or greater than S/N 151044 

use cable CA-134. This cable’s latching connector does not work with the older PC-cards. 

Daq PC-Cards Daq/112B and Daq/216B that have a serial number preceding 151044 require cable 

CA-134Q. 

Q: I cannot read signals with the DBK12 or DBK13. What could be wrong? 

A: To measure single-ended signals with the DBK12 and DBK13: 

1) the JP3 jumper on those boards must be set to SE (Single Ended) 

2) the signal must be connected to the analog input High terminal and Common. 

When measuring SE signals, the Low input is ignored. 

To measure differential signals with the DBK12 and DBK13: 

1) the JP3 jumper on those boards must be set to DIFF (Differential) 

2) the signals must be connected to the High, Low, and Common input terminals. 

If only 2 wires exist for your signal, connect them to the High and Low inputs and install a 1K ohm 

resistor between the Low and Common [in the area between the terminal strips and the electronics] on 

the DBK12 or DBK13. The place to install the resistor is labeled by channel number and is designated 

by the letter "L." The letter "H" designates where to install a resistor between the high and common 

terminals if balanced inputs are desired. 

Note: Cards are presently manufactured with 100K ohm resistors installed in the "L" locations. 

Q: My DIP switch settings appear to be giving my DBK card an incorrect address. 

A: There have been a few instances in which a DBK modification included replacing one type of DIP 

switch with another; for example, replacing a slide-type switch with a rocker-type switch or a toggletype 

switch. Although the actual setting of “0” and “1” values remains unchanged for configuring an 

address, using a “toggle-Type” switch diagram for a “Slide-switch” results in what looks like an 

opposite setting, i.e., 0-0-0-0 would look like 1-1-1-1 if the diagram was not replaced. 

The following example may help you determine if you have a “0 / 1” DIP switch reversal: 

Example: 

If you have a 4 micro-switch DIP switch, an address of zero would require 0-0-0-0. Thus, regardless 

of what your diagram may look like, the following holds true: 

For a slide-type switch… the slides would all be toward “0.” 

For a toggle-type switch… the depressed part of the switch would be at “0.” 

For a rocker-type switch … the rocker-arm (like a standard light switch) would be toward the “0.” 

Please contact the factory if you believe your DIP switch documentation is incorrect. 


Customer Assistance 

To report problems and receive support, refer to the contact information provided on the cover page of the 

manual. When you call, please have the following information available: 

• Hardware model numbers 

• Hardware serial numbers 

• Contents of your CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT, and SYSTEM.INI files 

• Software version numbers (including DOS and Windows) 

• Type of computer and features 

• Results of performance tests 

All equipment returned to the factory must be accompanied by an RMA# (Return Merchandise 

Authorization number). Use original shipping containers or equivalent to prevent shipping damage. 

Include the information above plus: 

• The name of a contact person who can discuss the problems encountered 

• The contact’s phone number 

• The return shipping instructions 

• All troubleshooting notes and comments on tests performed and all problem-related conditions 

Note: Before calling for assistance, please take a few minutes to review documentation segments that 

appear relevant to the problem conditions. Also, if you have not already done so, please look over 

the FAQs and the Troubleshooting Checklist that are presented earlier in this chapter. 




Chassis for Primary Data Acquisition Devices and Optional Modules 

Note: With exception of the 11” x 8.5” x 2.63” category, either one [of two] dimensional drawings could apply to your device, depending on 

the unit’s assembly date. Legacy chassis have notable grooves on the left and right sides of the enclosure. The modern chassis 

have smooth surfaces. Refer to the associated drawing, modern or legacy, as applicable. 

11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category …… page DD-2 

Two drawings provided: Modern Chassis and Legacy Chassis. 

DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216; DBK1, DBK10, DBK23, DBK24, DBK30A, DBK43A, 

DBK50, DBK51, DBK52, DBK53, DBK54, DBK84, DBK203, DBK204, TempBook/66; 

WaveBook/512, WaveBook/512H; WBK10, WBK10H, WBK10A, WBK14, WBK15, WBK16, 

WBK17 



DBK34A, DBK70; LogBook/300; WaveBook/512A, WaveBook/516, WaveBook/516A, 

DaqBook/2000A 


One drawing provided. 

DaqBook/2000E, DaqBook/2000X, WBK40, WBK41, WaveBook/516E 

11” x 14” x 3.44” Category …… page DD-7 


DaqBook/260, DBK60, LogBook/360 

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series) …… page DD-9 

3.26” x 8.32” Category 

DBK2, DBK4, DBK5, DBK7, DBK8, DBK9, DBK11A, DBK12, DBK13, DBK15, DBK16, 

DBK17, DBK18, DBK19, DBK20, DBK21, DBK25, DBK32A, DBK33, DBK44, DBK45, 

DBK81, DBK82, DBK83 

Dimensions for DBK200 Series Devices …… page DD-10 




DBK203 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category) 

DBK204 Module (See 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category) 




DBK207/CJC 



Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components …… page DD-17 

DIN-1 (DIN rail mounting kit for DBK206, /207, /207CJC, /208, /209) …… page DD-17 

DIN-2 (DIN rail mounting for DBK209) …… page DD-18 

POD-1 (for use with DBK83) …… page DD-19 

TB-100 Terminal Connector Option (68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board) …. Page DD-20 

Dimensional Drawings 949794 DD-1

Chassis for Primary Devices and Modules 

11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Modern Chassis 

FRONT VIEW 

LEFT SIDE 

VIEW 

TOP VIEW 

RIGHT SIDE 

VIEW 

These dimensions apply to the following: 

DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216 





DBK30A 









TempBook/66 

WaveBook/512 

WaveBook/512H 

WBK10 

WBK10H 

WBK10A 

WBK14 

WBK15 

WBK16 

WBK17 

WBK25 

DD-2 949794 Dimensional Drawings 

REAR VIEW


11” x 8.5” x 1.40” Category, Legacy Chassis 


DaqBook/100, /120, /112, /200, /216 














TempBook/66 

WaveBook/512 

WaveBook/512H 

WBK10 

WBK10H 

WBK10A 

WBK14 

WBK15 

WBK16 

WBK17 




FRONT VIEW 

VENT SIDE 

VIEW 

TOP VIEW 

FAN SIDE 

VIEW 


DaqBook/2000A 



LogBook/300 

WaveBook/516 

WaveBook/512A 

WaveBook/516A 

WBK18 


REAR VIEW


11” x 8.5” x 1.72” Category, Legacy Chassis 




LogBook/300 

WaveBook/516 

WaveBook/512A 

WaveBook/516A 




FRONT VIEW 

VENT SIDE 

VIEW 

TOP VIEW 

FAN SIDE 

VIEW 

These dimensions apply to the 

following: 

DaqBook/2000E 

DaqBook/2000X 

WaveBook/516E 

WBK40 

WBK41 


REAR VIEW


11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Modern Chassis 

FRONT VIEW 

VENT SIDE 

VIEW 

TOP VIEW 

FAN SIDE 

VIEW 


following: 

DaqBook/260 


LogBook/360 

Dimensional Drawings 949794 DD-7 

REAR VIEW


11” x 14” x 3.44” Category, Legacy Chassis 


following: 

DaqBook/260 


LogBook/360 

DD-8 949794 Dimensional Drawings

Dimensions for DBK Cards and Boards (excludes DBK46 and DBK200 Series) 

3.26” x 8.32” Board Size Category 

These dimensions apply to 

the following: 
























DBK82 (Note 1) 

DBK83 (Note 2) 

Note 1: DBK82, being significantly thicker than other boards, does not fit into 1-slot enclosures such as the DBK10 and 

the DaqBook/216. DBK82 does fit into DBK41 enclosures and in drawer type products such as DaqBoard/260. 

Note 2: DBK83 makes use of an external screw-terminal connector designated as POD-1 (see page DD-19). 


DBK200 Series Boards 





Note: DBK203 and DBK204 are modules that house a DBK202 board. Refer to the 11” x 8.5” x 1.40” category for applicable dimensions. 







DBK207/CJC 

These dimensions apply to the both the DBK207 and the DBK207/CJC. 






Dimensions for Miscellaneous Components DIN-1 


DIN-2 


POD-1 (for DBK83) 


TB-100 Terminal Connector Option 

68-pin SCSI III, Screw-Terminal Board 


DBK Cards & Modules 

Part 1 of 2

DBK Cards & Modules

DBKs included in Part 1 of 2 

DBK1, 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module 

DBK2, 4-Ch. Voltage Output Card 

DBK4, 2-Ch. Dynamic Signal Input Card 

DBK5, 4-Ch. Current Output Card 

DBK7, 4-Ch. Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card 

DBK8, 8-Ch. High-Voltage Input Card 

DBK9, 8-Ch. RTD Card 


DBK11A, Screw-Terminal and BNC Option Card 

DBK15, Universal Current, Voltage Input Card 

DBK16, 2-Ch. Strain-Gage Card 

DBK17, 4-Ch. SSH Card 

DBK18, 4-Ch. Low-Pass Filter Card 

DBK20 and DBK21, Digital I/O Cards 

DBK23, Isolated Digital Input Chassis 

DBK24, Isolated Digital Output Chassis 

DBK25, 8-Ch. Relay Output Card 

DBK30A, Rechargeable Battery Module 

DBK32A, Auxiliary Power Supply Card 

DBK34A, UPS / Battery Module 

957795 DBK Cards & Modules

DBK Cards & Modules

DBK1 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module 

Overview 

Overview …… 1 

Hardware Setup …… 2 

DBK1 Configuration …… 2 

JP4 Configuration in DaqBook …… 2 

Software Configuration …… 2 

DBK1 – Specifications …… 2 


o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to your 

system, as needed. 

o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near 

the front of this manual. 

The DBK1 provides a convenient means of attaching analog input signals from BNC cables to a LogBook 

or Daq Device via the P1 interface. Each of the 16 inputs has a switchable 100 KΩ bias resistor to 

accommodate floating signal sources. The 16 inputs can be used as 16 single-ended inputs (channel 0 to 

15) or as 8 differential pairs (channel 0 to 7). The BNC inputs are grouped to reflect use in the differential 

mode (ch 0, ch 8, ch 1, ch 9, ch 2, ch 10 ...) where channel 8 serves as the low-signal line of channel 0 and 

so forth. 

DBK Expansion Options 886995 DBK1, pg. 1

Hardware Setup 

DBK1 Configuration 

Factory Default: 100KΩ Bias resistors are Enabled 

The only configuration option is to enable or disable the 100 KΩ bias 

resistors, 1 per channel. Two resistor networks (RN1 and RN2) contain the 

resistor elements that are switched by SW1 and SW2 DIP switches. The 

rocker-arm switches must be depressed in the desired orientation: OPEN for 

disabled (shunted). Default is enabled. Enable bias resistors to make 

differential measurements of signal sources with floating voltages. As 

shown in the figure and silk-screened on the board, 

• SW1 controls channels 0, 8, 1, 9, 2, 10, 3, 11 

• SW2 controls channels 4, 12, 5, 13, 6, 14, 7, 15 

JP4 Configuration in DaqBook/100 Series 

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 devices you must set the DaqBook’s JP4 jumper for 

single-ended, or for differential input as needed. Refer to your DaqBook User’s Manual (p/n 457-0906) 

for additional information. 

Software Configuration 

None Required. Treat as a direct signal connection in both DaqView and LogView. 

DBK1 - Specifications 

Name/Function: 16-Connector BNC Adapter Module 

Connectors: 

DB37 male, mates with P1 

BNC connectors for signal input 

Analog Input Connection: 1 BNC connector for each of 16 analog input channels 

Dimensions: 221 mm wide × 285 mm long × 25 mm high (8.5” × 11” × 1.375”) 

Weight: 1.3 kg (3 lb) 

DBK1, pg. 2 886995 DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK2 4-Channel Voltage Output Card 

Overview 



Card Configuration …… 2 

Card Connection …… 2 

Software Setup …… 3 

Use of CA-115 Cables and DIN5 Power Connectors …… 3 


This product is not used for LogBook applications. 






The DBK2 provides the ability to generate precise, bipolar output voltages. The DBK2 connects to the 

Daq device P1 port. Like other P1-compatible DBK cards, the DBK2 is addressed using one of 16 base 

channels. Up to 4 DBK2s can share a single base channel for a maximum of 256 channels. The DBK2 can 

control an array of external devices including programmable power supplies, proportional actuators, analog 

indicators, and process controllers. 

The DBK2 generates output voltages using a 4-channel 14-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC). A 

precision bipolar reference is used onboard to provide accurate and stable output voltages. Each output 

channel is independently jumper configurable for either ±5 V or ±10 V operation. A 14-bit DAC can have 

values from 0 to 16,383 (a value of 8192 should produce a voltage of 0). Thus in the ±5 V mode, the 

voltage out VOUT = [10 V × (DAC/16383)] - 5 V. 

DBK2 Block Diagram 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 886995 DBK2, pg. 1


Card Configuration 

Card Connection 

Factory Default: Voltage Range ±5V 

The Daq Device channel and the output level must be configured. 

A 6-position DIP switch provides for address selection. The card address refers to the Daq device base 

channel. Any card address in the range of 0 to 15 is valid. The sub-address allows up to 4 DBK2s to share 

a single base channel. Any sub-address in the range of 0 to 3 is valid. (With 4 local channels on a card and 

4 cards on each of 16 base channels, a maximum of 256 channels are possible.) 

DBK2 Configuration Settings 

The DIP switch uses binary weighted values. To select the desired address, set the corresponding switch 

values to one. For example, if the desired card address is 11, switches 1, 3, & 4 should be set to one. To set 

a switch to a value, depress the corresponding side of the rocker-arm switch. 

Each local channel can be set for either ±5 V or ±10 V output. Four 3-pin headers (JP1 through JP4) 

correspond to output channels 0 through 3. To configure a channel for ±5 V output, place the shunt jumper 

across positions 1 & 2 (default setting) of the corresponding header (see figure). To configure a channel for 

±10 V output, place the shunt jumper across positions 2 and 3 of the channel header. 

Output voltage connections are provided via convenient screw terminals or J1. Each terminal has an 

adjacent analog common terminal for convenience. After all connections are in place, secure the wires to 

the card for strain relief. Small nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. For convenience, 

there are also footprints on the board to accommodate BNC connectors. 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration 

Use of the DBK2 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and 

DaqBoards [ISA type]. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series or DaqBoard [ISA-type] 

JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode, as indicated for JP1 in the following figure. 

Jumper Configurations On DaqBoard [ISA] and DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series 


Software Setup 

Note: JP1, in the previous figure, is indicated in its default position. The default position is necessary to 

power the interface circuitry of the DBK2 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. 

CAUTION 

If using auxiliary power cards, DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1 

jumpers entirely from JP1. 


o In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to DBK Basics located 

near the front of this manual. 

o Refer to the DBK32A or DBK33 Document Modules if applicable to your 

application. 

CAUTION 

When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1. 

Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will 

result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26. 

2. Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position. 

3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended 

mode. 

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series 

No jumper configurations are required for these 2000 series devices. 


o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView. 

o LogView users - Not Applicable. 

Use of CA-115 Cables and DIN5 Power Connectors 

CA-115 is a 6-inch cable with a male DIN5 connector on both ends. CA-115 is used to connect DBK32As 

or DBK33s in parallel (when powered by a common power supply). 


DBK2 – Specifications 

Name/Function: 4-Channel Voltage Output Card 

Connectors: DB37 male, mates with P1. Screw terminals for signal output 

Resolution: 14-bits (monotonic) 

Output Ranges: ±5 V or ±10 V (jumper selectable per channel) 

Accuracy: 0.05% of FS 

Linearity: 0.02% of FS 

Hysteresis: 0.01% of FS 


DBK4 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card 

Overview 


DBK4 Power Notice …… 2 



Card Connections …… 6 

CE Compliance …… 6 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 7 

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series …… 7 


Hardware Description …… 7 

Current Source (Transducer Biasing) …… 7 

Signal Coupling ……8 

Amplifier …… 8 

Low-Pass Filter …… 8 

Sample and Hold …… 8 

Power Management …… 8 

Software Controls …… 9 


Accelerometer Tutorial …… 11 

What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer? …… 11 

Accelerometer Specification Parameters …… 11 

Physical Setup …… 13 

Electrical Grounding …… 14 

Practical Limitations ……15 

Cable-Connector Handling Precautions ……15 

Cable Driving ……16 




o In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK4 Power Notice on page 2 

of this section and to DBK Basics located near the front of this manual. 

DBK4 is a 2-channel signal conditioner for dynamic signals. The unit provides a means of interfacing the 

data acquisition device with piezoelectric transducers that include, but are not limited to: accelerometers, 

microphones, and force/pressure transducers. The DBK4 interfaces with the LogBook’s or Daq Device P1 

connector. 


DBK4 Power Notice 

DaqBook/100 cannot provide adequate power for a DBK4. For information regarding the use of power 

cards and power modules see Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section near the front of this 

manual. 

CAUTION 

Power-Requirement Worktable 

Quantity x milli-Watts = power required 

Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage. Option Qty x mW = power 

Calculate system power requirements before adding a DBK4 

to the system. 



x 

x 

0 

565 

= 

= 

DBK4 x 2750 = 

Note: It is important to carefully read this DBK4 power notice and other DBK5 x 135 = 

sections of the manual that apply to your LogBook or Daq device DBK7 x 420 = 

system. 


In comparison to other DBK cards, the DBK4 demands significant power. 

It is important that you calculate your system’s power demand, as you may 

need to add auxiliary power supplies. This document provides a worktable 

for calculating system power demand. 






x 

x 

x 

x 

x 

560 

0 

455 

455 

485 

= 

= 

= 

= 

= 

To use the worktable: list the quantities of the applicable DBK options, and 

multiply these by the mW value. Place the results in the Power column and 

add them. The result is the total power required. 





x 

x 

x 

x 

1040 

905 

1085 

200 

= 

= 

= 

= 

If the power required exceeds, or is close to the available 

power, you must add a power module or card (for example 

a DBK30A or DBK32A). 

The following two charts provide information regarding available power. 



DBK23** x 10 = 






DBK43A** 35 

A/D Available Power Chart Auxiliary Power Supplies DBK44 x 330 = 

Product 

Available 

mW 

Product Available mW DBK45 x 1565 = 

LogBook/300, /360 (Note 2) 5000 DBK32A 15000 (Note 1) DBK46 x 2600 = 

DaqBook/100, /112, /120 2100 DBK50** x 35 = 

DaqBook/200, /216, /260 4000 DBK51** x 35 = 

DaqBook/2000A, E, X 

DaqBook/2001, /2005 

15000 

10000 

For information regarding 

Battery and UPS Modules, 



x 

x 

200 

455 

= 

= 

DaqOEM/2001, /2005 10000 refer to the following sections DBK54 x 455 = 

DaqBook/2020 7500 of the DBK Options Manual: DBK55 x 950 = 

DaqBoard/100A, /112A 

DaqBoard/200A, /216A 


3300 

3000 

2250 




DBK70** 


x 

x 

x 

35 

35 

755 

= 

= 

= 

DaqLab/2000 Series 10000 DBK81 x 1060 = 

DaqScan/2000 Series 10000 


Daq PC-Cards 0 DBK83 x 1810 = 



Note 1: DBK32A provides an additional 15000 mW of power for Daq and LogBook 

data acquisition systems. Its output is ±15 VDC. DBK32A is not to be 

used for Daq PC-Cards. 

Note 2: DBK2 and DBK5 are not to be used with LogBooks. 

** Two asterisks indicate that the module has an internal power supply that is powered separately. 

DBK90 1400 = 



Total Power Required ⇒ 

(Column Total) 




Factory Defaults 

If using a DaqBook/200, DaqBook/216, DaqBoard/200A, or DaqBoard/216A that has a 

serial number of 103350 or earlier, you must contact the factory for a hardware 

upgrade (EO-1911) before using the DBK4. 

Software calibration for each DBK4 requires a set of unique constants supplied on a 

diskette identified by a serial number matching the DBK4 card. To install these 

constants, follow instructions on the “readme” file included on the calibration disk. 

• Current Level – 4ma 

• Coupling – 10 Hz 

• Current Source – On 

• 40Khz Filter – In-Line 

Both hardware and software are used in configuration. This section focuses on the hardware. Jumpers and 

switches are used to set: current source (current level and source enable/disable), filter bypass, signal 

coupling, and channel addressing. It is best to remove power from the card to perform these selections. 

The figure reveals the jumper and switch locations. 

Note: The hardware jumper settings referenced in the following subsections are per-channel selections 

unless otherwise specified. 

DBK4, Board Layout (not to scale) 


Signal Coupling (JP2 & JP3) 

The figure shows jumper settings for selecting AC coupling, 10 Hz or 0.1 Hz High Pass Filter (HPF), or 

DC coupling. 

Signal coupling is application specific. 10 Hz HPF suits most applications for acceleration measurements 

on “light” structures. When performing seismic measurements (or measurements on “massive" structures) 

the 0.1 Hz HPF rejects the DC bias component while preserving the low-frequency signals. 

DC coupling may be used when making a voltage mode measurement. 

CAUTION 

JP2 Default: 0.1 Hz 

JP3 Default: 0.1 Hz 

When the input signal is DC-coupled, the current source must be deselected (Jumper JP4 

and/or JP5 removed). Failure to do so could result in damage to the transducer. 

Current Source for Transducer Biasing (JP4 & JP5) 

The DBK4 provides a current source for transducer biasing. Bias current is selected (enabled or disabled) 

via jumpers JP4 (channel 0) and JP5 (channel 1) as shown in the figure. 

CAUTION 

When the input signal is DC coupled, the current source must be “off-line” (jumper 

removed) to protect the transducer. While DC coupled, the output voltage of the current 

source can approach 30 V depending on the output impedance of the transducer. 


Current Level (Transducer Biasing) (JP6) 

Current level is not channel-specific. The level selected applies to 

both channels. The figure shows the JP6 jumper settings for 

current level. Most transducers operate with either 2 or 4 mA of 

bias current. However, biasing at 4 mA allows the transducer to 

drive longer cables. 

Filter Bypass (JP7 & JP8) 


For more information, refer to the Cable Driving section of the DBK4 Accelerometer Tutorial. 

Jumpers JP7 and JP8 are used to enable or disable programmable 

filtering for channel 0 and 1 respectively. This selection determines 

the bandwidth of the signal to be processed. When disabled 

(bypassed) the DBK4 can process a signal with a bandwidth up to 40 

kHz. The gain in bypass mode is greater than in the filter mode by a 

factor of 1.583. For example, When the PGA gain is set to 10, the 

filter-mode gain is ×10 and the bypass-mode gain is ×15.83. 

Main Channel and Sub Channel Selection 

Up to 8 DBK4 cards can use 1 of 16 main channels. 

Each DBK4 has 2 inputs; thus the input capacity is 

256 channels (2 inputs × 8 cards × 16 main channels). 

The DBK4 uses JP1 and SW1 for channel and subchannel 

selection. (Position s8 on SW1 is not used.) 

The DBK4 card or a group of DBK4 cards (0-7) must 

have a dedicated main channel. Do not intermix 

DBK4 cards with other types of DBK cards in a 

channel. LogBook or Daq device will not function 

properly if channel settings are in conflict. 

DBK4 Channel Hierarchy 

Record all channel settings and label the transducers for future reference. 

JP1 on the DBK4 is a 2×16 header located on the far left side of the card. A shunt jumper setting on JP1 

allows a card to reside in 1 of 16 possible main channels. Any main channel in the range 0-15 is valid. 

The figure below shows that sub-switches s1 to s4 of SW1 can be set by binary values to equal the main 

channel selection. This setting must match the jumper on JP1 so the onboard microcontroller knows the 

JP1 selection. The card then interprets and responds to only the correct card-related commands via P1. 


The DBK4’s sub-channel address is selected using switches s5 - s7 of DIP switch SW1 (located above and 

to the right of JP1). As a 2-channel card, 3 switches are used to select 8 sub-channel addresses. Therefore, 

it is possible for each main channel to use up to 8 DBK4s. The figure below shows 16 switch settings for 

the main channel and 8 settings for the sub-channel (card) selection. 

Card Connections 

The DBK4 connects to the LogBook’s or Daq device’s P1 port or a P1 port on a DBK Expansion Module. 

CE Compliance 

For signal inputs, a BNC connector interface is provided for each channel. The DBK4 PC Board has a 

microdot connector footprint that is wired in parallel with each BNC connector. The user is can customize 

the input connector as needed. As a factory default, the DBK4 is not populated with microdot connectors. 

Special Cables and Connectors for CE Compliance 

To insulate BNC connectors from high-voltage sources such as static charges that can enter the circuitry 

via an exposed connector and cause ESD damage. Specific cables and connectors that must be used (as 

stated in the Declaration of Conformity), PVC dust caps (p/n CN-96) must cover all unused BNC 

connectors. With dust caps removed, special coaxial cables with insulated end-connectors and rubber Orings 

(p/n 418-0800) must be used (see figure). Properly installed connectors and dust caps ensure that no 

metallic surfaces are exposed. 



Several setup steps of DaqBooks /100 

Series & /200 Series devices and 

DaqBoards [ISA type] are required to use 

DBK4 cards in a system. Note that the 

Daq PC-Card is configured in software; it 

cannot supply power to DBKs. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place 

the JP1 jumper in the expanded 

analog mode (Analog Option Card 

Use). In this mode jumpers are at 

JP1’s –15 V and +15 V positions. 

Note: This default position is necessary 

to power the interface circuitry of 

the DBK4 via the internal ±15 

VDC power supply. If using 

auxiliary power DBK32A or 

DBK33, you must remove both 

JP1 jumpers. 

DaqBook/100 & /200 & DaqBoard [ISA] 

Settings for the DBK4 

The DBK4 is power intensive; refer to the DBK4 Power Notice (DBK4 page 2) and to 

Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section near the front of this manual. 

2. Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position. 

CAUTION 




3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP3 jumpers in bipolar mode. 

4. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumpers in single-ended 

mode. 



No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices. 

Hardware Description 


o DaqView users - Refer to the chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView. 

o LogView users - Refer to the chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView. 

Current Source (Transducer Biasing) 

Each channel has a constant-current source that can be jumper-set to 2 mA or 4 mA. The bias current is 

sourced through the center conductor of a coaxial lead and returns to the DBK4 from the transducer’s case 

via the outer conductor. The current source provides a dynamic load of more than 1.4 MΩ and has a 

negligible loading effect on the transducer’s output. If bias is not required, removing a jumper and 

coupling the signals directly to the input preamplifier can disable the current source. 

Note: Use the 4 mA for long cables, high peak voltages, and high signal frequencies. 


Signal Coupling 

Amplifier 

Low-Pass Filter 

Sample and Hold 

Power Management 

The input can be configured via jumpers to maximize the usable signal spectrum. The DBK4 provides 

two, 1-pole High-Pass Filters (HPF) and one DC path. The HPF can be set to 0.1 Hz, 3 dB cut-off 

frequency. In this case, the system frequency response is limited by the source characteristics. The HPF 

can also be set to 10 Hz, 3-dB cut off frequency, for high-frequency measurements. The 10 Hz setting is 

useful in attenuating setup-induced low-frequency signals that can reduce the dynamic range (e.g., when 

using tape recorders as signal sources). 

Note: When using 0.1 Hz coupling, you should set the baseline (via software) to one-shot mode. 

The DC path allows the DBK4 to be used in voltage-mode measurements that convey DC as well as AC 

information. For example, when motion is measured with a DC LVDT, the transducer is biased with an 

independent power supply and its output is referenced to ground. 

CAUTION 

JP4 or JP5, as applicable, must be removed to disable the current source whenever the 

input is DC-coupled. Failure to remove JP4 or JP5, when the input is DC-coupled, can 

result in transducer damage. 

The DBK 4 includes a Programmable Gain Amplifier (PGA) with three gain settings (×1, ×10, and ×100). 

The gain settings are set for each channel via software. These gain settings are performed at configuration 

and remain unchanged during a measurement sequence. The PGA has a flat response up to 100 kHz for 

in-band and out-of-band frequencies. 

To protect the in-band components from distortion caused by aliases of the out-of-band spectrum, the 

DBK4 features a 12-pole programmable Butterworth Low-Pass Filter (BLPF). There are eight 3 dB cut-off 

frequency (Fc) settings per channel, the lowest frequency is 141.6 Hz and the highest is 18 kHz. In 

general, high order BLPF introduce amplitude and phase distortion near the 3 dB cut off frequency. 

Limiting the measurement range can reduce this error. A typical measurement range is 70% to 80% of the 

3-dB cut-off frequency. 

For narrowband measurements, the anti-alias filter can be bypassed providing an extended bandwidth of 

40 kHz. In this configuration, the channel has lower distortion and a gain factor of 1.583. This setup may 

be useful when calibrating accelerometers with sinusoidal motion. However, in this case, special attention 

should be given to external noise since high-frequency noise will be aliased into the signal band. 

The switched capacitor clock must be turned on in software for the filter to work. 

The card’s sample and hold amplifier samples all channels within a system (up to 256) within 50 ns of one 

another and preserves their phase information. Measurement of transmissibility can be made between any 

two of the 256 possible channels. 

The Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is triggered on the first channel of a scan sequence; after which, 

the A/D converter sequentially measures the output of each of the SSH amplifiers. In a scan sequence, the 

first channel should be a non-SSH channel. However, if the scan sequence contains only SSH channels the 

first channel will contain data taken in the sample mode. This data is inaccurate and therefore should be 

discarded; however, the second sample (valid) can be a repeat of the first. 

The DBK4 has circuits for a variety of measurement environments. When not needed, the filters and/or 

current source can be powered down via software. This feature can be useful in field units to reduce 

overall power consumption. 


Software Controls 

Power management, the PGA, and the low-pass filter’s cut-off frequency are all software controllable. 

These parameters are sent via the external address bus in the P1 connector to the DBK4. The microcontroller 

decodes the configuration message, sets the PGA and filter controls, and illuminates the onboard 

LED. However, if transmission errors are detected, the micro-controller flashes the LED and ignores 

the message. The error is cleared when an error-free message is received. At power up, the current source 

and filters are powered off and the LED is off. The LED will remain off until the DBK4 is successfully 

addressed for the first time. 


Name/Function: 2-Channel Dynamic Signal Input Card 

Physical Specifications 

Channels: 2 

Signal Connection: 1 BNC connector per channel 

Dimensions: 8.28" W × 3.25" H 

Operating Specifications 

Power Consumption (typical): 20 mA @ +5 V, 95 mA @ +15 V, 80 mA @ -15 V 

Current Source: 

Output Impedance: >1.4 MΩ 

Compliance: 27 VDC 

Current Levels: 2 & 4 mA 

Broadband Noise: 0.3 µA RMS (Bw = 100 kHz) 

Input Impedance: 150 kΩ 

Gain: 

Bypass Mode: ×1.583 ×15.83 ×158.3 

Filter Mode: ×1 ×10 ×100 

Input Ranges: ±5 V ±500 mV ±50 mV FS 

Coupling: AC, DC 

AC: 1-pole, 10 Hz HPF 

1-pole, 0.1 Hz HPF 

Input Signal/Noise: >96 dB (Bw = 100 kHz) 

Filter(Typical): 

Distortion (typical) 

Bypass Mode: The jumpers JP7 and JP8 in the 1-2 position disabling 

the programmable low pass filter. 

@ 100 Hz - 81 dB 

@ 1 kHz - 82 dB 

@ 5 kHz - 81 dB 

Filter Mode: The jumpers JP7 and JP8 in the 2-3 position enabling the 

programmable low pass filter. With the following cutoff 

frequencies selected via software. 

4.5 kHz cutoff frequency: 

@ 100 Hz - 79 dB 

@ 1 KHz - 75 dB 

18 kHz cutoff frequency: 

@ 100 Hz - 68 dB 

@ 1 KHz - 68 dB 

@ 5 kHz - 58 dB 

*Note the filter mode measurements were taken at the +5 V range 

with the software enabled switched capacitor clock and excitation. 


Cut-off(Fc): 

18 kHz 9 kHz 4.5 kHz 2.25 kHz 

1125 Hz 562.5 Hz 281.2 Hz 141.6 Hz 

Flatness DC - 80% Fc: ±0.2 dB 

Channel Matching DC - 80% Fc: Phase: ±6° 

Accuracy Passband Center: ± 0.5 dB 


Accelerometer Tutorial 

This accelerometer tutorial covers the following topics. Page numbers refer to DBK4 document module 

pages. 

What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer?......11 

Accelerometer Specification Parameters......11 

Physical Setup......13 

Electrical Grounding......14 

Practical Limitations...... 15 

Cable-Connector Handling Precautions......15 

Cable Driving......16 

What is a Piezoelectric Accelerometer? 

A low-impedance piezoelectric accelerometer consists of a piezoelectric crystal and an electronic amplifier. 

When stretched or compressed, the two crystal surfaces develop a charge variation that is related to the 

amount of stress, shock, or vibration affecting the crystal. The amplifier outputs a corresponding signal 

and transforms the sensor’s high impedance to a lower output impedance of a few hundred ohms. Besides 

acceleration, such sensors can measure pressure and force. 

The circuit requires only 2 wires (coaxial or twisted pair) to transmit both power and signal. At low 

impedance, the system is insensitive to external or “triboelectric” cable noise. Cable length does not affect 

sensitivity. 

The figure shows a simple sensor-DBK4 connection. The MOSFET is powered from a constant-current 

source of 2 or 4 mA at 27 volts. In the quiet state, the MOSFET circuit will bias off at about 12 V. As the 

system is excited, a voltage develops across R and the crystal and is applied to the gate of the MOSFET. 

This voltage will cause linear variation in the impedance of the MOSFET and a proportional change in bias 

voltage. This voltage change will be coupled to the DBK4 input amplifier through the capacitor C. The 

value of R and the internal capacitance of the crystal control the low-frequency corner. Units weighing 

only a few grams can provide high-level outputs up to 1 V/g with response to frequencies below 1 Hz. 

Accelerometer Specification Parameters 

Noise in Accelerometers 

The noise floor or resolution specifies the lowest discernible amplitude (minimum “g”) that can be 

measured. There are two main sources of noise: 

• Noise from the crystal and circuit inside the accelerometer. Some types of crystals, such as 

quartz, are inherently more noisy than others. A good noise floor is 10 to 20 µV. 

• Noise from electrical activity on the mounting surface. Since the signal is a voltage, 60 Hz or 

other voltages (induced or ground loop, etc) may interfere. The best protection is to 

electrically isolate the accelerometer. 


Sensitivity 

The sensitivity of an accelerometer is defined as its output voltage per unit input of motion. The unit of 

motion used is the “g”. One “g” is equal to the gravitational acceleration at the Earth’s surface, which is 

32.2 ft/(sec)(sec) or 981 cm/(sec)(sec). The output is usually specified in millivolts per “g” (mV/g). 

Sensitivity is usually specified under defined conditions (frequency, testing levels, and temperature), for 

example: 100 mV/g at a frequency of 100 Hz, level +1 g, at 72°F. 

While a given sensor model may have a “typical” sensitivity of 100 mV/g, its actual sensitivities may range 

from 95 to 105 mV/g when checked under stated conditions. The manufacturer typically provides sensor 

calibration values. 

Transverse Sensitivity 

An accelerometer is designed to have one major axis of sensitivity, usually perpendicular to the base and 

co-linear with its major cylindrical axis. The output caused by the motion perpendicular to the sensing axis 

is called the transverse sensitivity. This value varies with angle and frequency and typically is less than 5% 

of the basic sensitivity. 

Base-Strain Sensitivity 

An accelerometer’s strain sensitivity is the output caused by deformation of the base due to bending in the 

mounting structure. In measurements on large structures with low natural frequencies, significant bending 

may occur. Units with low base-strain sensitivity should be selected. 

Inserting a washer smaller than the accelerometer base under the base to reduce the contact surface area 

can substantially reduce base-strain effects. This technique lowers the usable upper frequency range. 

Acoustic Sensitivity 

High-level acoustic noise can induce outputs unrelated to vibration input. In general, the effect diminishes 

as the accelerometer mass increases. Using a light, foam-rubber boot may reduce this effect. 

Frequency Response 

An accelerometer’s frequency response is the ratio of the sensitivity measured at frequency f to the basic 

sensitivity measured at 100 Hz. This response is usually obtained at a constant acceleration level, typically 

1 g or 10 g. Convention defines the usable range of an accelerometer as the frequency band in which the 

sensitivity remains within 5% of the basic sensitivity. Measurements can be made outside these limits if 

corrections are applied. Care should be taken at higher frequencies because mounting conditions greatly 

affect the frequency range (see Mounting Effects below). 

Dynamic Range 

The dynamic measurement range is the ratio of the maximum signal (for a given distortion level) to the 

minimum detectable signal (for a given signal-to-noise ratio). The dynamic range is determined by several 

factors such as sensitivity, bias voltage level, power supply voltage, and noise floor. 

Bias Level 

Under normal operation, a bias voltage appears from the output signal lead to ground. There are two basic 

MOSFET configurations commonly used. One exhibits a 7-8 V bias and the second a 9-12 V bias. 

Operation of the two circuits is identical except for the available signal swing. The low-voltage version 

typically exhibits 5-10 µVrms versus 10-20 µVrms for the high voltage. 

Thermal Shock - Temperature Transients 

Piezoelectric accelerometers exhibit a transient output that is a function of a temperature’s “rate-ofchange”. 

This “thermal shock” is usually expressed in g/°C and is related to: 

• Non-uniform mechanical stresses set up in the accelerometer structure 

• A pyroelectric effect in piezoelectric materials—an electrical charge is produced by the 

temperature gradient across the crystal. 


Physical Setup 

This quasi-static effect produces a low-frequency voltage input to the MOSFET amplifier. This voltage is 

usually well below the low-frequency corner, but the effect can reduce the peak clipping level and cause 

loss of data. This effect does not affect the accelerometer’s basic sensitivity or the data unless the thermal 

shift in the operation bias level results in clipping. Where drastic thermal shifts are expected, use 12 V bias 

models. The effect’s severity is related to the mass of the accelerometer. In 100 mV/g industrial units, the 

effect is usually negligible. Using rubber thermal boots can reduce the effect significantly. 

Overload Recovery 

Recovery time from clipping due to over-ranging is typically less than 1 ms. Recoveries from quasi-static 

overloads that generate high DC bias shifts are controlled by the accelerometer input RC time constant that 

is fixed during manufacture. 

Power Supply Effects 

The nominal power supply voltage recommended by most manufacturers is 15 to 24 V. Units may be used 

with voltages up to 28 volts. Sensitivity variations caused by voltage change is typically 0.05%/volt. 

Power supply ripple should be less than 1 mVrms. 

Connector 

This parameter specifies the connector type and size (4-48, 6-40, 10-32 coaxial etc) and the location on the 

sensor, i.e., top or side (usually on the hex base). Where there is no connector on the sensor, an integral 

cable is specified with the length and the connector, i.e., integral 6-ft to 10-32. 

Mounting Effects 

Adding an accelerometer to a test object may influence the object’s mechanical resonance and/or reduce 

the resultant vibration level. The mass of the structure and accelerometer as well as the position on the 

structure can affect the measurement. For example, an accelerometer with a small mass relative to a car’s 

mass will affect measurements on the hood when placed directly in the hood’s center. The same 

accelerometer placed on the more massive frame will have little effect. 

The resonance change in a simple spring-mass system caused by adding an accelerometer may be 

approximated by: 

∆f = fn {1 - [m/(m - ma)] ½ } 

Where: 

∆f = Change in Resonant Frequency 

fn = Original Resonance Frequency without Accelerometer 

m = Spring Mass 

ma = Mass of Accelerometer 

Threaded Stud Mount 

The preferred method for attaching an accelerometer to the test surface is by the threaded stud mount. This 

method fuses the accelerometer and test surface. When the stud mount is impractical, an adhesive 

installation is usually a good alternative. 

Adhesive Mounts 

Some accelerometers can be glued directly to the test surface. Others must use mounting adapters (bases). 

These adapters are normally glued to the test surface and the accelerometers are stud-mounted to them. 

When applying a layer of adhesive, keep in mind that the adhesive creates a new spring-mass system with 

lower high-frequency response. To avoid a thick glue line, Cyanocrylate adhesives work well because: 

• They cure quickly, within seconds. 

• Glue lines can be kept ultra-thin by using glue sparingly and pressing the accelerometer to the 

surface with adequate force. 

• Cleanup is easy since these adhesives will dissolve with acetone. 


Removal of Adhesive Accelerometers 

Many accelerometers and adhesive adapters have been damaged by improper removal. A safe removal 

method is to torque the accelerometer or its adapter with a wrench using the flats provided. Adhesives are 

generally weakest in the shear mode and will yield under steady torque. 

Magnetic Mounting Adapters 

Electrical Grounding 

Accelerometer Mounting 

CAUTION 

Never strike an accelerometer to remove it. The trauma will likely damage the 

accelerometer and affect calibration. 

Magnetic mounting adapters can attach accelerometers to ferromagnetic surfaces such as machinery and 

structures where the sensor is to be moved quickly from place to place. The accelerometer is attached to 

the magnet (usually by stud mount) and the assembly is then applied to the surface. 

In general, use magnetic adapters with caution and never beyond 1 kHz. Expect response degradation in 

proportion to accelerometer mass. To ensure the best accuracy from the magnetic mount: 

1. If possible, attach the magnet to bare metal. Paint will lessen the holding force of the magnet and can 

affect response. 

2. Clean mounting area to remove oil, grease and foreign matter, which could reduce the contact for a 

strong magnetic bond. 

3. Select a flat area to achieve maximum surface contact. 

4. Attach the magnet to the test surface CAREFULLY. Remember that the pull of the magnet rises 

sharply just before contact with the ferromagnetic surface. This force could pull the assembly from 

your hand resulting in a severe metal-to-metal shock. This could over-range the accelerometer beyond 

its maximum shock limit and damage it. 

5. If possible, calibrate the magnetic/accelerometer assembly. 

Case-Grounded Design 

In case-grounded designs, the common lead on the impedance-matching circuit is tied to the accelerometer 

case. The accelerometer base/stud assembly forms the signal common and electrically connects to the shell 

of the output connector. Case-grounded accelerometers are connected electrically to any conductive 

surface on which they are mounted. When using these units, take care to avoid errors due to ground noise. 

Isolated-Base Design 

To prevent ground-noise error, many accelerometers have a base-isolated design. The outer case/base of 

the accelerometer is isolated electrically off ground by means of an isolation stud insert. The proprietary 

material used to form the isolation provides strength and stiffness to preserve high-frequency performance. 


Practical Limitations 

Mass Loading 

The accelerometer mass should be less than 10% of the rigidly-coupled mass of the test object. The test 

object should be rigid at the mounting point, such as a bearing housing rather than a sheet metal cover. 

Upper Frequency Response 

Piezoelectric accelerometers will attenuate below the low-frequency 3-dB point, but they will amplify at or 

near their resonant frequency. The mounted resonant frequency of the accelerometer should be about five 

times the highest frequency of interest (for ±0.5 dB accuracy). Refer to the frequency response data 

supplied with each accelerometer to establish the usable range. For general surveys or broader tolerances, 

smaller multiples may be used. For example, for frequencies up to 1/2 the mounted resonance, sensitivity 

would typically be 12% higher than nominal. 

Cable-Connector Handling Precautions 

Connectors 

Clean the connector ends periodically with a stiff-bristle brush (such as a glue brush or small paintbrush 

with clipped bristles) dipped in a solvent. This will remove metal slivers (which can peel off connector 

threads and short across contacts), oil and other contaminants. 

When connecting 10-32 or 5-44, thread the cables to sensor jacks. Do not use pliers to torque knurled 

coupling nuts in place. Hand tightening is sufficient for most applications. If the nut tends to loosen under 

severe shock or vibration, you may use a mild thread-locking compound. Use it very sparingly and apply 

only to the male thread to avoid contamination of the electrical contact. 

Because of their size, 10-32 (and smaller) connectors are relatively fragile. Always hold the transducer 

steady and twist off the knurled coupling-nut. Never hold the coupling-nut and twist the transducer. Use 

10-32 (and smaller) connectors only when necessary. 

Cables 

The weakest point on the cable assembly is at the intersection of the wire and connector; so, avoid stress at 

this point. Sharp bends can overstress the conductors and insulation causing shorting or breakage. 

The figure shows the preferred methods of cable 

routing to the connector. The flexure occurs away 

from the intersection point. Relative cable motion 

at the sensor body or connector can cause erroneous 

output signals at frequencies where cable motion is 

amplified (cable “whip”). Miniature accelerometers 

are especially susceptible due to their small size and 

low mass. This problem is remedied by proper tie 

down as shown. A “strain relief loop” will ensure 

that cable flexure does not occur at the connector 

when the cable is fastened to a stationary surface. 

Triboelectric Noise 

Accelerometer Connections 

Triboelectric noise is caused by the potential developed in a flexing cable. The cable shield may rub 

against the cable’s insulator, and the interior friction generates a charge that produces noise. The 

triboelectric noise voltage or charge is coupled to the signal leads by inner conductor capacitance and may 

be represented by a voltage source in series with a capacitance. In general, triboelectric noise is associated 

with bending of signal cables when low-frequency vibrations (below 10Hz) are being measured. If moving 

or securing the cable alters the output compared to an external reference, triboelectric noise is a likely 

suspect. 


Cable Driving 

Operation over long cables is a concern with all types of sensors. Concerns involve cost, frequency 

response, noise, ground loops, and distortion caused by insufficient current available to drive the cable 

capacitance. 

Coupling a short (e.g., 1m) adapter cable from the accelerometer to a long, low-cost cable like RG-58U or 

RG-62U with BNC connectors can reduce the cost of long cables. Since most cable failures occur at the 

accelerometer connection where vibration is the greatest, only the short adapter cable would need 

replacement. 

Capacitive loading in long cables acts like a low-pass, second-order filter and can attenuate or amplify 

high-frequency signals depending on the output impedance of the accelerometer electronics. Generally this 

is not a problem with low-frequency vibration (10 Hz to 2000 Hz). For measurements above 2000 Hz and 

cables longer than 100 ft, the possibility of high-frequency amplification or attenuation should be 

considered. 

The DBK4 constant-current source provides 2 or 4 mA to integral electronics. Use the higher current 

setting (4 mA) for long cables, high peak voltages, and high signal frequencies. 

The maximum frequency that can be transmitted over a given length of cable is a function of both the cable 

capacitance and the ratio of the maximum peak signal voltage to the current available from the constant 

current source: 

f 

K 

= 

⎛ V ⎞ 

2πC⎜ 

⎟ 

⎝ Icc − Ib⎠ 

Where: 

f = Maximum frequency in Hz 

K = 3.45 ×10 9 (K is the scale factor to convert Farads to picoFarads and 

Amperes to milliAmperes and a factor to allow cable capacitance to 

charge to 95% of the final charge.) 

C = Cable capacitance in picoFarads 

V = Maximum peak measured voltage from sensor in volts 

Icc = Constant current from current source in mA 

Ib = Current required to bias the internal electronics, typically 1 mA 

Drive Current Cable Length 

Frequency Response to 5% of 

Maximum Output Signal Amplitude 

(mA) @30 pF/ft (Ft) ± 1 V ± 5 V 

2 10 185 kHz 37 kHz 

2 100 18.5 kHz 3.7 kHz 

2 1000 1.85 kHz 370 Hz 

4 10 550 kHz 110 kHz 

4 100 55 kHz 11 kHz 

4 1000 5.5 kHz 1.1 kHz 


DBK5 4-Channel Current Output Card 

Overview 


Hardware Setup ……. 2 

Card Configuration ……. 2 

Card Connection ……. 3 

CE Compliance ……. 3 

Software Setup ……. 4 

DBK5 – Specifications ……. 4 

This product is not used for LogBook applications. 




o In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to DBK Basics located near the 

front of this manual. 


The DBK5 can control four 4 to 20 mA current loops. The card connects to the Daq Device’s P1 port and 

uses one of the Daq Device’s 16 base channels. Up to four DBK5s can share a single base channel for a 

maximum of 256 channels. The DBK5 card neither sources nor sinks current; instead, it modulates current 

in an externally powered loop. In this way, the DBK5 acts as a current-loop transmitter. The DBK5 is 

compatible with both regulated and unregulated loop supplies, providing these supplies are within the 

range of 12 to 45 V and have a loop resistance that does not exceed 1.95 kΩ, according to the following 

relationship: 

VSUPPLY = VTRANSMITTER + (ILOOP * RLOOP) 

where: VTRANSMITTER = 6 V, and ILOOP = 20 mA max DAC mA 

The DBK5 provides loop-current control through 12-bit digital-to-analog converters 

(DACs). The 12-bit range of 0 to 4095 corresponds with 0 to 100% of full-span and an 

output of 4 to 20 mA. As shown in the table, the current output IOUT = 4 mA + 

(DAC/4095 × 16 mA). Thus, the DAC values for currents between 4 and 20 mA is 

equal to 255.94 × (IOUT - 4 mA). 

0 4 

... ... 

1000 7.9 

... ... 

4095 20 




The 4 channels are optically isolated from the Daq Device and from each other. Isolation allows the loop 

voltages to float beyond the Daq Device’s common mode range. An externally powered loop allows the 

DBK5 to continue to modulate the loop current in the event of a fault or power loss in the Daq Device. If 

the loop is powered-up before the Daq Device, the DBK5 will maintain the loop current at 4 mA. After a 

fault, the DBK5 will maintain the loop current at the last level set. 

Up to four DBK5 cards can be assigned to a single Daq device channel. With 16 Daq device channels, 4 

cards per channel, and 4 inputs per card, up to 256 inputs are possible (16 x 4 x 4). 

Each card must appear unique to the Daq device. Micro-switches 1 through 4 (On DIP switch S1) set the 

card address for the Daq device channel. A card address can be set to a value in the range of 0 to 15, 

inclusive. Micro-switches 7 and 8 set the sub address to a value of 0, 1, 2, or 3 to distinguish one card 

from another, for a given Daq device channel. 

Both addresses are determined by binary-weighted values of the micro-switches. In the following figure 

the DIP switch is set for a card address of 15 since micro-switches 1 through 4 are in the “1” position. This 

means the binary weights add up to fifteen (8 + 4 + 2 + 1). In the same figure the sub address is 3, since 

micro-switches 7 and 8 are in the “1” position giving us 2 + 1. Note that micro-switches 5 and 6 are not 

used. Since addresses start at “0” instead of “1,” a card’s 15 / 3 address would mean that it is assigned to 

the sixteenth Daq device channel and that it is the fourth card. 

Configuration DIP Switch 

Shown with a Card Address of 

15 and a Sub Address of 3. 

Switch 1-4 

Settings 

1 2 3 4 

Switch Settings & Resulting Addresses 

Resulting 

Card 

Address 

Switch 7-8 

Settings 

* * 7 8 

Resulting 

Sub 

Address 

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 

0 1 0 1 5 0 1 1 

1 1 0 0 12 1 0 2 

1 1 1 1 15 1 1 3 

8 4 2 1 -- 2 1 -- 

Weights associated with switches when set to “1” 

*Micro-switches 5 and 6 are not used. 



CE Compliance 

Current-loop connections are provided via dual screw terminal connections. The + and - loop connections 

are shown in the figure. Once all connections are in place, secure wires to the board at captive areas at the 

end of the board. Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. 

(1) An external loop-voltage supply must be provided. 

(2) To meet CE safety specifications, an edge guard (kit p/n 232-0806) must be attached 

to the DBK5 card before insertion into a DBK41 expansion chassis. This guard 

helps prevent accidental access to high-voltage circuits. 

DBK5 Current Loop Configuration 


Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer to 

the CE Compliance section of the Signal Management chapter. 


Use of the DBK5 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices 

and DaqBoards [ISA type]. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog (Analog Option Card 

Use) mode. In this mode JP1 jumpers are positioned in the –15 V and +15 V positions. 

Jumper Configurations in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and DaqBoards [ISA-Type] 

Note: The JP1 default position, indicated above, is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK5 via 

the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power cards DBK32A or DBK33 you must 

remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A 

and DBK33 sections of this manual. 



CAUTION 


Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will result 

in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26. 

2. Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position (see above CAUTION). 

3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended 

mode. 





o DaqView users - Refer to the DBK Setup section in the DaqView document. 

o LogView users - Not Applicable. 

Name/Function: 4-Channel 4-20 mA Current Output Card 

Connectors: DB37 male, mates with P1. Screw terminals for signal output. 

Accuracy/Linearity: 0.1% FS 

Resolution: 4 µA / LSB, monotonic 

Hysteresis: 0.02% FS 

Regulation: 0.05% FS 

Compliance: RLOOP = (VSUPPLY - 6) / 0.020 max 

Isolation: 500 V 


DBK7 4-Channel Frequency-To-Voltage Input Card 







DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series …… 9 


Hardware Function …… 9 

Input Signal Conditioning …… 9 

Edge Selection …… 11 

Debouncing …… 11 

Frequency Measurement …… 11 

D/A Conversion …… 12 

Specifications - DBK7…… 13 







Overview 


The DBK7 can be used for diverse frequency-monitoring applications. Typical uses include measuring the 

flow of liquids with a flowmeter and measuring rotation (rpm) with a shaft encoder. The monitored 

process must generate a series of electrical pulses whose frequency is related to the desired variable. 

Features of the DBK7 include: 

• Inputs can be analog (high or low level) or digital. 

• Each channel has a programmable frequency range. 

• Noise effects can be minimized by debounce, attenuation, and low-pass filtering. 

• Up to 64 DBK7s can be used with a single LogBook or Daq device for a maximum of 256 channels. 

The card’s basic function can be realized from the following block diagram. Each channel: 

• Conditions an input signal 

• Selects the signal’s rising or falling edge 

• Debounces the edge 

• Measures the signal’s frequency. 

The D/A converter outputs a voltage from -5 V to +5 V to correspond with the selected frequency range. 

The LogBook directs the card’s D/A converter to convert the data from the proper input channel. 

CAUTION 

DBK7 must be configured before connecting the card to inputs and outputs. 

Failure to do so could result in card damage. 

Hardware-related steps for setting up DBK7 include: 

• Configuring the DBK7 onboard jumpers and switches for the application 

(see previous CAUTION). 

• Configuring the Daq device (see page 8) 

• Connecting the input cables to sensors and the output cable to a Daq device or LogBook. 



Several jumpers and one switch must be set on the DBK7 card to match both the system setup and the 

signal-conditioning requirements. This section describes a typical configuration. The following table 

indicates the factory default settings of each jumper. The below figure shows the location of the jumpers 

and DIP-switch (S1). 

Factory Defaults for DBK7 On-board Jumpers 

Configuration Jumpers Applies to … 

Channel Selection, pg. 4 

• 

• 

• 

The default is channel 0 

Up to 4 cards can share the same J1 

channel. 

See switch S1 information in regard to 

card selection. 

Input Circuit Selection, pg. 6 

• The default is Analog Input 

• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2 

Attenuation Selection, pg. 6 

• The default is Attenuation Enabled 

(reduced sensitivity) 

J1 16 Channels 

JP3 and JP4 CH 0 




JP1 CH 0 

JP21 CH 1 

JP41 CH 2 

• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2 JP61 CH 3 

Low Pass Filter Selection, pg. 7 

• The default is 100 kHz 

• Each jumper connects pins 1 and 2 

DBK7 Board Layout 

JP2 CH 0 

JP22 CH 1 

JP42 CH 2 

JP62 CH 3 


Channel and Card Selection Configuration (J1 and S1) 

Up to 4 DBK7 cards can connect to a single main channel. Thus, a 16-channel LogBook or Daq device 

can connect to 64 DBK7 cards. Since each card has 4 input channels, a fully populated system can use 256 

input sensors. To keep these inputs organized, the card is configured by physically setting a jumper (J1) 

and a DIP switch (S1). 

• J1 is a 24-pin (3×8) header requiring two pins in a row to be connected. Up to 4 cards can share the 

same channel. 

• S1 is a 6-position DIP switch (positions 3-6 set the main channel). Each card sharing a main channel 

can have one of four sub-addresses (card number) as set by S1 (positions 1 & 2). 

J1, S1, and the software must all be set to the same channel. 

Set the main channel and sub-address as follows: 

1. Determine the main channel and card number for each DBK7 used. It may be necessary to check the 

software setup and other cards in the system to avoid a conflict. Note that a DBK7 may share a 

channel with 3 other DBK7s. Each card sharing a LogBook or Daq device base channel must use a 

unique card number sub-address. 

2. Set the J1 jumper across the 1st and 2nd or the 2nd and 3rd pin of a row to the desired channel. 

Refer to the silk screening just above the jumper for proper positioning (see previous figure). 

3. Set S1 DIP switches 3-6 (OC0 to OC3) to match the channel selected on J1, and verify both settings 

(S1 and J1) are correct (see previous figure). 

4. Set S1 DIP switches 1 & 2 (CRD0 and CRD1) to give the card a unique sub-address with the chosen 

main channel. Any unused sub-address in the range 0-3 is valid (see following figure). 


DBK7 Channel Configuration 

Note: Each of the 16 main Daq device channels can support 4 DBK7 cards; and each DBK7 card can 

support 4 analog channels. Both J1 and S1 (3-6) select the main channel (they must match). S1 (1- 

2) selects the card. Every card must have a unique address of channel and card. 


Input Signal Conditioning Configuration 

Hardware settings affect 3 aspects of signal conditioning: 

• Input circuit selection: analog or digital 

• Attenuation selection 

• Low-pass filter selection. 

Input Circuit Selection 

Each input channel can be set for the analog or digital circuit. Two jumpers must be set for each channel. 

Select the input circuit for each input channel as follows: 

1. Determine the best circuit type for each channel. 

• The digital input circuit works best for DC-coupled signals where the low level is less than 

0.5 V and the high level is above 2.5 V and the voltage does not exceed ±15 V. By using a 

pull-up resistor, switches and relays can create the signal. Frequencies can be as high as 

960 kHz. The digital input circuit does not attenuate or filter the input signal. 

• The analog input circuit is AC-coupled and is sensitive to signals from 100 mV to 84 V p-p. 

It also provides attenuation and low-pass filtering to reduce the effects of noise. 

2. Position the input circuit jumpers for analog or digital (see figure). Verify that both jumpers for a 

channel are set the same (JP3 and JP4 for channel 0; JP23 and JP24 for channel 1; 

JP43 and JP44 for channel 2; and JP63 and JP64 for channel 3). 

Default 

Analog 

Attenuation Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only) 

When measuring strong analog signals, the attenuator can reduce the input sensitivity and the effects of 

noise. If enabled, the attenuator reduces the input sensitivity by a factor of about 20. 

Set the attenuation for each channel as follows: 

1. Determine the best attenuation for each channel. 

• Use attenuation and reduced sensitivity if the input signal’s peak level exceeds 1 V. 

• Disable attenuation for full sensitivity if the input signal’s peak level is less than 1 V. 

2. For attenuation, position the jumper across pins 1 and 2. Attenuation is enabled (the default setting). 

(See figure.) 

Default 

Attenuation Enabled 

(Reduced 

Sensitivity) 

3. To disable attenuation, position the jumper across pins 2 and 3. 

The full-strength signal is used. 



4. Verify the jumper position for each input channel. 

- JP1 for channel 0 




Low-Pass Filter Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only) 

The low-pass filter removes high-frequency noise that could otherwise fool 

the DBK7 into detecting a higher frequency. To set the low-pass 

filter: 

1. Determine the highest frequency you expect 

to measure on each input channel. 

2. Select the next higher cutoff frequency (30 Hz, 

300 Hz, or 100 kHz) for each corresponding channel 

(see figure Typical Sine-Wave Sensitivity vs Frequency 

later in this section). Verify that the DBK7’s sensitivity 

will accommodate the expected input signal strength. 

3. Set jumpers for low-pass filter selection. 





Default 

100 kHz 

After the DBK7 hardware is configured, the card can be safely connected to the signal inputs and to the 

primary acquisition device. You can connect up to four sensors to the DBK7’s input BNC connectors. 

A CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable is used to connect the card to a LogBook or Daq device [possibly through 

an expansion module] via the card’s DB37 connector. Connection steps follow. 

WARNING 

Electric shock hazard! Do not exceed a sensor input of 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p) 

for analog or ±15 Volts for digital. Exceeding these values may present an electric 

shock hazard that could possibly result in injury or death, in addition to DBK7 

damage. 

Connect the DBK7 card as follows: 

1. Connect each sensor’s BNC connector to a mating connector on the card. Channel labels (CH0 to 

CH3) are printed just below the corresponding connector. Label each sensor with its corresponding 

channel, card sub-address, and DBK7 input channel. 

2. For a single DBK7 card, connect one end of the P1 cable to the card’s male DB37 output connector. 

• 

• 

• 

• 

For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-1 cable 

For DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards - use a CA-37-1 with a DBK200 Series 

adapter 

For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-1 cable 

For Daq PC-Card, use a CDK10 (expansion, power module) with CA37-1 and CA-134 

cables. 


CE Compliance 

3. Connect the other end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK7 

cards, use a CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable to daisy-chain several cards or an expansion module. For 

example, three DBK7s (or 2 DBK7s and an expansion module) can be connected to a LogBook or a 

Daq device with a CA-37-3. 

4. For multiple cards from a Daq PC-Card, cable CA-134 must first connect to an expansion module (a 

CDK10 or a DBK41 with a DBK33 power card) then through a CA-37-x to the DBK7s. 

Note: For longer cable runs, use a CA-113 to add 6 ft of cable length where needed. 

If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards, the DBK7 must be placed in a 

DBK41/CE 10-slot analog expansion module that is connected to the LogBook or Daq device by a 

CA-143-x cable. 

Note that in the presence of 3 V/m RF fields, the following conditions must exist in order to meet CE 

requirements: 

• 500 mVpp signals are required to maintain 0.1% accuracy. 

• Metal shells of the BNC connectors must be directly connected to the chassis ground in order 

to maintain 100 mV sensitivity and 0.1% accuracy. 

• The host computer must be properly grounded. 

• The host computer and peripheral equipment must be CE compliant. 

Reference Notes: If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards 

refer to the following: 

o The CE Compliance section of Chapter Signal Management. 

o The DBK41 document module. 


Several setup steps of DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series 

devices and DaqBoards [ISA type] are required to use 

DBK7 cards in a system. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in 

the expanded analog mode. 

Note: This default position is necessary to power the 

interface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal 

±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power 

(DBK32A/33), you must remove both JP1 

jumpers. In regard to calculating system power 

requirements refer to Power Requirements in the 

DBK Basics section near the front of the manual. 

DaqBook/100 & /200 and 

DaqBoard [ISA] Settings for DBK7 

CAUTION 





2. Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position (See previous CAUTION). 

3. For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP3 jumpers in bipolar mode. 

4. For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP4 jumpers in single-ended mode. 



Hardware Function 



o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 2, DBK Setup in DaqView. 


This section explains DBK7 functions that affect user settings to ensure the best performance. For setup 

questions or noise problems, refer to the related section. The figure provides an overview of signal 

conditioning function blocks and can be referred to for the following discussions. 

Input Signal Conditioning 

The DBK7 conditions the input signal in several ways to provide the best output accuracy. Reducing noise 

and limiting the bandwidth are the first steps in the conditioning process and are done in hardware. 

Software can further clean up the signal by selecting the cleanest edge to read and by setting a debounce 

delay to ignore spurious signals. 

Analog Input Signal Conditioning 

The equivalent analog input circuit is shown in the figure. Input voltages should be at least 50 mV peakto-peak. 

The maximum analog input signal is 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p). Stronger signals may 

damage the DBK7 or present an electrical shock hazard. 

When the input circuit jumpers are set for analog, the center conductor of the BNC connector is ACcoupled 

through a 0.33 µF capacitor to the attenuator. The outside conductor connects directly to ground. 

With the attenuator disabled for full sensitivity, input-protection diodes limit the signal to about 1.5 Vp-p. 

Larger signals will see an impedance of 6.7 KΩ (rather than 20 KΩ) in series with 0.33 µF. With the 

attenuator enabled, the input impedance remains 20 KΩ regardless of the input level. 

After AC-coupling, attenuation and filtering, a comparator converts the input signal into a clean digital 

signal. The comparator output is high when the center-pin signal is higher than the outside-conductor 

signal (and low when the center-pin is lower). The comparator has hysteresis to reduce the effects of noise 

by ignoring small signals. 


The following graph shows typical sine-wave sensitivity in peak-to-peak voltage vs frequency. Six 

combinations of attenuation (on/off) and low-pass filtering (30 Hz, 300 Hz, and 100 kHz) are graphed. 

Digital Input Signal Conditioning 

The equivalent digital input circuit is shown in the figure. The 

input signal may range from -15 to +15 V. Higher voltages may 

damage the DBK7. 

When the input circuit jumpers are set for digital, the outside 

(shield) conductor of the BNC connector connects directly to 

ground. The center conductor is pulled up with 27 KΩ to +5 V 

and then passes through a 2.7 KΩ protection resistor before being 

detected by a Schmitt-trigger buffer with input-protection diodes. 

The input thresholds are fixed TTL levels. Below 0.5 V (0.8 V 

typical), the Schmitt-trigger buffer output is low. Above 2.1 V (1.6 V 

typical), the buffer output is high. The 27 KΩ pull-up resistor allows 

the digital inputs to sense switches or relays connected directly to the 

DBK7 as shown in the figure. The debounce circuit can remove noise 

effects of switching. 

The input impedance for digital signals depends on the signal level. For signals between 0 and 5 V, the 

input-protection diodes do not conduct, and the digital input impedance is just the 27 KΩ pull-up 

resistance. For signals less than 0 V or greater than 5 V, the input-protection diodes conduct and the 

impedance drops to about 2.4 KΩ. The figure shows the approximate digital-input current/voltage 

relationship. 


Edge Selection 

Debouncing 

The DBK7 determines the frequency by measuring the time between successive rising or falling edges of 

the input signal. Which edge is electrically cleaner depends on the application and related components. If 

rising edges are used, the edge-selection circuit does not modify the signal. If falling edges are used, the 

circuit inverts the signal so falling edges appear as rising edges to the subsequent circuits. Through 

software, each channel can be independently set for rising- or falling-edge. 

Debouncing is a process of ignoring signals too short to be real events. When a relay or switch closes, the 

electrical contacts may not initially make good contact. Mechanical vibrations can occur, and contact is 

made and broken several times stabilizing. Counting all these signals would yield too high a frequency. 

The debounce circuit solves this problem by ignoring rising edges not preceded by a sustained low signal. 

The sustain interval can be set in software to 0, 0.6, 2.5, or 10 ms for each channel. Debouncing may be 

disabled (0 ms) for clean, high-frequency signals. Long debounce times will limit high-frequency response 

(e.g., a 10 ms debounce will limit the frequency to about 100 Hz). In general, use “0” (debounce disabled) 

for clean, high-frequency signals; increase the debounce as needed for noisy, low-frequency signals from 

switches and relays. 

The figure shows the effect of 10 ms debouncing on a noisy signal. To be counted, a rising edge must be 

preceded by a low sustained for at least 10 ms without any other edges. Rising edges a and f are counted 

because they are preceded by low signal levels sustained for at least 10 ms (the debounce time). All other 

rising edges (b, c, d, and e) are ignored. Any falling edge makes (or keeps) the debounced output low, 

regardless of preceding edges. Thus, the DBK7 can detect short pulses even with debouncing. 

Frequency Measurement 

After debouncing, the signal’s frequency is ready to be measured. Frequencies are measured to 12-bit 

accuracy between a minimum frequency (F min) and maximum frequency (F max). This frequency range can 

be programmed individually for each channel. The limitations on F min and F max are: 

• The frequency range must be within 0 to 1 MHz. 

• F max - F min must be at least 1 Hz. 

• F max / F min must be at least 100/99 (1.010101). 

Based on F min and F max , the DBK7 measures the frequency by counting input cycles during a variable time 

interval. The length of the interval depends on the difference between F min and F max . 

• For a wide range (when F min and F max are far apart), each bit of the 12-bit result represents a 

large frequency change and can be measured quickly. 

• For a narrow range (when F min and F max are close together), each bit of the 12-bit result 

represents a small frequency change and takes longer to measure. 


The following equation determines the time interval needed to measure a frequency: 

Minimum Measurement Period (sec) = (4096 x 0.5 µs) [Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin)] 

In this equation: 4096 derives from 12-bit precision; 0.5 µs is the resolution of the DBK7’s timing circuits; 

and F max / (F max - F min) is the ratio the measurement time must be increased to achieve 12-bit accuracy over 

the selected range. 

To see how the measurement period varies, consider two examples: 

• To measure frequencies from 59 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least 

4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/2 = 62.5 ms, or about 16 measurements per second. 

• To measure frequencies from 1 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least 

4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/60 = 2.1 ms. Note that as the DBK7 only measures frequency once per 

cycle, it would take from 1 to 61 measurements per second. 

Thus, measuring frequencies over a narrow range takes longer than over a wide range as the ratio of 

Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin). The actual measurement time is the sum of several items: the minimum measurement 

period (from the equation above), the actual input period, and a variable processing time of 0 to 4 ms. 

Note: If the Sequence Rep Rate is set faster than the measurement rate, multiple readings of the 

same measurement will occur. 

After the frequency (F) is measured to the required accuracy, it is scaled to a 12-bit number (D) for use by 

the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). This 12-bit number is determined by the formula: 

D = 4096 [(F - Fmin) / (Fmax - Fmin)]; where: 0 < DAC < 4096 

If the measured frequency is Fmin, then the scaled result is 0. If the measured frequency were Fmax, then the 

scaled result would be 4096 but is limited to 4095. Measured frequencies below Fmin are scaled as 0; 

frequencies above Fmax are scaled as 4095. The highest frequency that produces an accurate result is the 

one that converts to a DAC value of 4095; that is, Fmin + 4095/4096 (Fmax - Fmin) which is the same as 

Fmax - 1/4096 (Fmax - Fmin). 

D/A Conversion 

The 12-bit scaled result is stored in the DAC to be read by the data acquisition system. Instead of having 

four DACs with their associated circuits, the DBK7 shares a single DAC among the four channels. Using 

the DAC this way makes the DBK7 more reliable, cost-efficient, and easier to calibrate. Each time the 

LogBook or Daq device addresses a different DBK7 channel, the DAC supplies the corresponding voltage 

(Vout) according to the formula: 

Vout = 10.0 (D/4096) - 5.0 V 

Since DAC values (D) range from 0 to 4095, DBK7 output voltages range from -5.0000 to +4.9976 V. 

Calibration for the DBK7 is automatic. When the DBK7 is initialized through software, its gain and offset 

errors are measured. The output circuits are then adjusted so the LogBook or Daq device measurements 

correspond to the DAC setting. The DBK7’s software-adjustable gain and offset can correct for small 

errors in the DBK7 or the LogBook/Daq device. This automatic calibration eliminates the periodic need 

for manual calibration. 


Specifications - DBK7 

Name/Function: 4-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card 

Input Channels per Card: 4 

Maximum Cards per System: 64 

Maximum Channels per System: 256 

Input Connector: 1 BNC connector per channel 

Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 

Frequency Ranges: (programmable) 0 Hz to 960 kHz 

Output Voltage Range: -5 V to +5 V 

Debounce Delays: (software selectable) 0, 0.6, 2.5, 10 ms 

Measurement Rate: up to 500 per second per channel, 1000 per second total 

Accuracy: 0.1% 

Analog Input 

Low-level: 

50 mV typical (100 mV max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz 

Any edge of 50 (100 max) mV amplitude and 5 V/s rate. 

Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground. 

15 mV hysteresis. 

High-level: 

0.75 V typical (1.25 V max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz 

Any edge of 0.75 V (1.25 V max) amplitude and 50 V/s rate. 

Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground. 

250 mV hysteresis. 

Maximum Input Voltage: 30 Vrms (84 Vp-p) 

Low-Pass Filters: (hardware selectable) 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 100 kHz 

Digital Input 

TTL-Level: 0.001 to 960 kHz. 

Input Impedance: 27 KΩ pull-up to +5 V || 50 pF 

V Low (“0”): 0.8 V typ, 0.5 V min 

V High (“1”): 1.6 V typ, 2.1 V max 

Hysteresis: 400 mV min 

Pulse Width (high or low): 520 nsec min. 

Maximum Input Voltage: -15 V to +15 V 



DBK8 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card 

Overview 







DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 3 

Daq Device Connection …… 3 

Safe Mounting …… 3 








Note: DBK8 has a footprint for installing a second DB37 connector, to accommodate input signals. 

Pins 30 to 37 correspond to channels 7 to 0; pins 11 to 18 correspond to channels 15 to 8 

(or low 7 to 0 in differential mode). This pinout [for the footprint] is the same as P1 for the 16 main 

channels, with exception that the non-channel pins are not wired. Chapter 2 includes P1 pinouts. 

The DBK8 reads voltages up to ±100 V from DC to 10 kHz. The inputs are balanced differential and 

referenced to the LogBook or the Daq Device analog common. No external biasing resistors are used. The 

input impedance of each DBK8 channel is 10 MΩ to minimize loading of the circuit being measured. Two 

DBK8s can share the same base channel to allow a maximum of 32 DBK8s and 256 high-voltage inputs. 





CE Compliance 

Each DBK8 channel has 3 user-set voltage ranges: ±10 V, ±50 V, and ±100 V. The ranges are selected by 

the placement of shunt jumpers on pin headers for each channel. While the channel-to-channel resistance 

is 10 MΩ, there is no other inherent isolation between the channels. The common of the host computer has 

a direct connection to the LogBook or the Daq Device analog common. Either side of any input channel is 

5 MΩ from analog common. 

The DBK8 has 3 attenuation factors. 

• The ±100 V range attenuates the input by a factor of 20. 



Note: The signal coming from the DBK8 into the LogBook or Daq Device does not exceed ±5 V. 

Factory Defaults: Voltage Range (each channel) - ±10V 

Inputs from 1 or 2 DBK8s are multiplexed into 1 of the base channels. 

Channel selection is made on 2×16-pin header JP1A by placing the shunt 

jumper on the pair of pins next to the chosen base channel. 

The addressing scheme allows for 16 inputs on each analog channel. The 

DBK8 is an 8-input card; and 2 DBK8’s can use the same channel if one 

is configure for low channels and the other for high channels. Placing the 

shunt jumper on JP16 in the 2-1 position sets the card address for the 

lower 8 channels (0-7) in an address group. Placing the shunt jumper on 

JP16 in the 2-3 position sets the card address for the upper 8 channels (8- 

15). 

Each of the 8 input channels has 3 voltage ranges that are manually 

selected by the placement of a pair of shunt jumpers on a channel range 

select header. It is important that both jumpers are placed on the same 

range value or incorrect voltage readings will be received by the system. 

The DBK8 is equipped with screw terminal connectors for easy access to 

all of the analog inputs. Connections are provided for 8 pairs of inputs 

and 2 analog-commons. There is a high and a low terminal in each 

channel pair to maintain consistent polarity signs with voltage readings. For AC signals, the polarity is 

arbitrary unless multiple signals are being connected 

with an interest in channel-to-channel phase relationships. After all connections 

are in place, captive areas are provided at the end of the DBK8 for securing the 

wires to the board. Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. 






Use of the DBK8 expansion card with DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and 

DaqBoards [ISA type] requires 3 jumper settings. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog (Analog Option Card Use) 

mode. This is indicated for JP1, in the following figure. 

JP1 Default 

Analog Option Card 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Jumper Settings for the DBK8 

Note: JP1’s default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal 

+15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power cards DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove 

both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section, as well as to the 

DBK32A and DBK33 sections of the manual. 

2. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar Mode. 

3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in Single-Ended 

Mode. 

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration 

Daq Device Connection 

Safe Mounting 



Several options exist for placement of the DBK8 card in a system. Because the inputs can be high-voltage, 

the card should be physically secure and out of harm’s way. DBK8 will install in the 3-position DBK10 

chassis, 10-position DBK41 card cage, the card slot in either the DaqBook/112 or /216, or in a section of a 

snap-in mounting track (mounted to a secure surface), or used as an insulated holder for a loose DBK8. 

Several options exist for placement of the DBK8 card in a system. Because the inputs can be high-voltage, 

the card should be physically secure and out of harm’s way. The DBK8 will install readily in the 3position 

DBK10 chassis, the 10-position DBK41 card cage, or in a section of a snap-in mounting track 

mounted to a secure surface or used as an insulated holder for a loose DBK8. 



o LogView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in LogView. 



Name/Function: 8-Channel High-Voltage Input Card 

Connectors: 

DB37 male, mates with P1 

screw terminals 

DB37 footprint, for signal inputs 

Voltage Input Ranges: ±10 VDC, ±50 VDC, ±100 VDC; selection by jumper for each channel. 

Input Impedance: 10 MΩ 

Attenuation: 

@ 10 V, Vout=Vin/2 

@ 50 V, Vout=Vin/10 

@ 100 V, Vout=Vin/50 

Output Voltage Range: ±5 VDC 

Bandwidth: 15 kHz 

Attenuation Accuracy: 0.5% 

Offset Voltage: Typical: 0.5 mV; Maximum: 2.0 mV 

Offset Drift : Typical: 4 µV/ºC; Maximum: 10 µV/ºC 

Common Mode Rejection: 

Range Typical Min. 

10 V -68 dB -55 dB 

50 V -65 dB -53 dB 

100 V -63 dB -51 dB 


DBK9 8-Channel RTD Card 





DBK9 Calibration …… 3 

DaqBook /100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 3 

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 3 



Overview 






Temperatures sensed by RTDs are attached to the LogBook or the Daq Device through the DBK9 RTD 

expansion card. 

Up to eight RTDs can attach to each DBK9 and up to 8 DBK9s can attach to the LogBook or the Daq 

Device for measuring a maximum of 256 temperatures. The DBK9 card supports 3- or 4-wire RTDs and 

operates by reading 3 voltages and using them in the following equation: 

RTD = [Va - Vd - 2(Va - Vb) Rsense] / Vd (Result in Ohms) 

Where: Rsense = 100 Ω (a constant derived from the actual hardware) 

The result of this equation is converted into a temperature via software (using a complex formula and 

lookup tables). The DBK9 features an on-board Programmable Gain Amplifier for measuring 100 Ω, 

500 Ω, or 1000 Ω type RTDs. For each RTD, the DBK9 can measure temperatures in a range of 

-200 to +850°C. 





The DBK9 is equipped with screw terminals for the connection of 3-wire or 4-wire RTDs as shown in the 

figure. 

Factory Defaults: JP2 RTD Type: 100ohm 

JP3 RTD Source Type: 100 ohm 

Two aspects of card configuration are the channel address and the RTD type. 

Channel Address Jumpers 

Channel Group Select (JP4) 

One or two DBK9s may be connected to each channel (2×8 signals × 16 channels for a maximum of 256 

inputs). Since this is a daisy-chain type of interface, each card must appear unique to the LogBook or the 

Daq Device. This is accomplished by setting the Channel Select jumper (JP1) and the Channel Group 

Select jumper (JP4) of each DBK9. JP4 selects either Upper (8-15) or Lower (0-7) channels. 

No two cards in a system are to have the same channel settings. 

RTD Type Selection Jumpers (JP2 and JP3) 

The DBK9 was designed to measure 100 Ohm, 500 Ohm, and 1000 Ohm RTDs (all 8 RTDs must be the 

same type for each DBK9). The different RTD types can be selected by changing the RTD Type jumper 

(JP2) and the RTD Voltage Source jumper (JP3). The default settings are shown in the figure. 

JP2 and JP3 must use the same setting. 


DBK9 Calibration 

The DBK9 is default-calibrated for a 100 Ω RTD. To use the 

DBK9 with a 500 Ω or a 1000 Ω RTD, the user must calibrate 

the card as follows: 

1. Purchase the resistors above for the given RTD type. 

2. Measure the resistor with a reliable meter, and record the 

exact value. 

3. Refer to the charts, and match up the proper temperature 

with the measured Resistance. 

4. Connect the resistor to Channel 0 on the DBK9. 

5. Run DaqCal from the Windows support for DBK9. 

6. Adjust RP1 for the temperature that was found in the 

charts. 

7. After the temperature is matched, the DBK9 is calibrated. 

8. Repeat this procedure to use a different RTD type. 

RTD Type Required Resistor* 

100 Ω 374 Ω, 1.0% 

500 Ω 1870 Ω, 1.0% 

1000 Ω 3740 Ω, 1.0% 

* These resistors are theoretical 

values that correspond to 795°C. 

Note: Be sure JP2 & JP3 

settings are correct for the RTD 

type that is being calibrated. 


Use of the DBK9 expansion card with 

DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and 

DaqBoards [ISA type] requires three jumper 

settings. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 

jumper in the expanded analog mode. 

Note: This default position is necessary to 

power the interface circuitry of the 

DaqBook/DaqBoard Jumpers for the DBK9 

DBK9 via the internal ±15 VDC power 

supply. If using auxiliary power cards 

DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the 

DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A and DBK33 sections of the manual for more information. 

2. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar mode. 

3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in Single-Ended 

Mode. 

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration 








Name/Function: 8-Channel RTD Measurement Card 

Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 pinout; screw terminals for signal connections 

Configurations: 3-wire or 4-wire 

Alpha: 0.00385 

Inputs: 8 channels 

Temperature Ranges: -200 to +850°C 

RTD Excitation Current: 

100 Ω 500 µA 

500 Ω 227 µA 

1000 Ω 160 µA 

Accuracy: ±1.5°C (wide band) 

Resolution: 0.3°C 

Range and RTD Type Adjustments: Jumpers on circuit board 


DBK10 3-Slot Expansion Chassis 



DBK10 - Specifications…… 2 

Overview 







DBK10 is a metal enclosure that holds up to 3 expansion cards. Cards can slide into their slots without 

removing the signal connections. Two DBK10s are ideal for applications that require 6 or fewer DBK 

cards. Multiple enclosures can be stacked to accommodate many cards. For applications that require more 

than six cards, the DBK41 is recommended. 

Note: Cards can be used alone without an enclosure if they are secured and protected as needed. 

Note: DBK10 requires no software configuration; however, the installed analog DBK cards do. 

The DBK10 has 3 card slots for easy access to the analog expansion cards. Set up hardware as follows: 

1. Complete all DBK card configurations to fit your application and channel assignments. 

2. Attach signal input wires (with strain relief as needed) or BNC connectors before inserting card into 

DBK10 slot. 

3. Secure card in slot by tightening screw and washer to hold card securely in place. 

4. Attach the card’s DB37 connector to the P1 connector with the appropriate cable 

(CA-37-x or CA-131-x) to daisy-chain all cards installed in the DBK10(s). 

Installing a Card in a DBK10 Expansion Chassis 



Name/Function: 3-Slot Expansion Chassis 

Size: 11" long x 8½" wide x 1 3/8" high 

Weight: 3 lb (empty); add 8 to 12 oz for each card 

Capacity: Accommodates 3 DBK expansion cards 

Material: Aluminum 

Finish: Black, powder-coated 


DBK11A Screw-Terminal and BNC Option Card 

Overview 



DBK11A Connections …… 2 

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration …… 3 



DBK11A - Specifications …… 4 






DBK11A is a passive card that provides screw-terminal connections and optional BNC connections in 

place of a 37-pin (DB37) connector; i.e., P1, P2, or P3. In addition to providing access to all 37 pins on a 

DB37 connector, the card includes sockets for optional passive-filtering components. 

In regard to the optional filtering aspect, the card provides connectivity between DB37 pins and screw 

terminals while passing through the card’s prototyping area, as can be seen in the following figure. This 

region of the DBK11A can accommodate resistors, capacitors, and custom wiring. The user can choose 

component values to meet application requirements. 

Note: DBK11A is compatible with DB37 connectors, for example the P1, P2, and P3 connectors on 

LogBook, DaqBook, and DaqBoard devices. The DBK11A card has footprints for 4 BNC 

connectors that can be soldered onto the card. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 879895 DBK11A, pg. 1


DBK11A Connections 

The DBK11A connects to a P1, P2, or P3 DB37 connector via a CA-37-x cable. The card has screwterminal 

blocks for easy access to analog inputs and outputs. Each screw-terminal has a number 

that corresponds to a pin number on the DB37 connector. 

The DBK11A prototyping area, see figure, contains standard 0.1” hole spacing for the optional installation 

of user-customized circuitry. 

BNC connectors can be soldered to the board at footprints labeled: CN0, CN1, CN2, and CN3. These will 

have connectivity to J6 and J12, as indicated in the figure. The J6 and J12 terminals can be wired to the 

other screw terminals to provide BNC connection for designated P1 pins. 

DBK11A Board Layout 


Refer to chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts, to verify the pin designations for P1, P2, or P3, 

as applicable. The DBK11A screw-terminals are labeled 1 through 37. These numbers correspond 

one-to-one with specific DB37 pins for P1, P2, and P3. 

To make wire connections to the card’s terminal blocks: 

1. Refer to the applicable pinout (P1, P2, or P3) in chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts. 

2. Using 14 to 26 gage signal wire, make the appropriate connections to the DBK11A terminal blocks. 

The screw-terminal numbers 1 through 37 correspond directly with the P1, P2, or P3 pins, depending 

on which DB37 connector applies. 

3. Once all connections have been made, secure all wires at the end of the DBK11A board. Nylon tie 

wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. 

DBK11A, pg. 2 879895 DBK Option Cards and Modules

If you want to add your own custom circuit to the DBK11A: 

The DBK11A includes spare terminals for optional circuitry, such as RC networks. The card includes 

several hundred unconnected solder pads and signal paths to the analog input terminals [pins 11-18 and 

30-37]. Note that the default circuit path is just a straight connection, with no options. 

Optional RC filters can be located on the card to correspond with the DB37 pins for the 16 analog input 

channels. Before adding components, drill out the 1/16” diameter jumper-removal holes. 

DaqBook and DaqBoard Configuration 

CE Compliance 


Due to the DBK11A’s simplicity and flexibility, no configurations are required other than those that may 

depend on the nature of the signal source. 



the CE Compliance section of chapter 1, Signal Management. 



o LogView users - No Setup in LogView. 

Note: DaqView Users – The DBK11A is not listed in DaqView’s Hardware Configuration window; 

however, to use the card you must configure the applicable DBK11A channel(s) for Direct Signal 

Connect. When you select Direct Signal Connect, the applicable channels are made available on 

the DBK11A, from within DaqView. Note that aside from the ability to read Analog accessed 

through P1, the digital I/O window of DaqView can access a DBK11A connected to P2; and the 

counter/timer window can access a DBK11A connected to P3. 


DBK11A - Specifications 

Name/Function: Screw-Terminal Card 

Connector: DB37 male, attaches to P1, P2 or P3 connector 

Wire Size Range: 14 to 26 gage 

BNC Option: DBK11A includes 4 BNCs for optional user-soldered connections 


DBK15 Universal Current, Voltage Input Card 

Overview 





DaqBook/100 & /200 and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Configuration …… 4 

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 4 


DBK15 – Specifications ……5 

DO NOT adjust the potentiometers! Evidence of adjustment voids the factory warranty! 






DBK15 uses a 16-channel multiplexer and a programmable gain input amplifier (PGA). Component 

sockets accept resistors that configure each channel for current-to-voltage conversion or for voltage 

attenuation. The differential signal input from the transducer must use 3 leads: high, low, and common. 

When configured by appropriate resistors, the DBK15 can measure voltages up to 30 VDC or currents up 

to 20 mA. Each of 16 input channels has a resistor “A” and “B” location. Installing various resistors in 

these locations yields channel-to-channel flexibility. The DBK15’s input amplifier is software 

programmable for ×1 or ×2 gain per channel, providing unipolar 0 to +10 V or bipolar -5 to +5 V ranges 

per channel. 




DO NOT adjust the potentiometers! Evidence of adjustment voids the factory warranty! 

Factory Default: Input range of ±5V 

1. Determine the LogBook’s or Daq device’s Analog Input Channel for each DBK15 

in your system. As few as one or as many as 16 DBK15’s may be connected to 

your device. Since this is a daisy-chain type interface, each card must appear 

unique. This is accomplished by assigning each card to a different Analog Input on 

the LogBook or the Daq device. 

2. Locate the 16×2 pin header labeled JP1 near the front of the board. Note the 16 

jumper locations on this header labeled CH0 through CH15 corresponding to the 

LogBook’s or Daq device’s Analog Input Channels. 

3. Set JP1 jumper on the pins for your intended output channel (CH0-CH15, see 

figure). Only one jumper is used on a single card. No two cards in the same 

system can have the same jumper setting. 

4. On enhanced versions of this board, bias resistors have been installed between the channel lows and 

analog common. If you have an early version of the board, you can still install bias resistors. The use 

of bias resistors is discussed in the Signal Management chapter. 

5. Determine values for RA and RB for each input signal channel. Standard RN55D (¼ watt, 1%, metal 

film) resistors or 22 gage bare wire (short) plug in pin sockets. See the following table. 

Note that a multiplexed input in sampled data systems must have low impedance to allow for 

accurate measurements. For 12-bit accuracy at 100 kHz, equivalent attenuator impedances should be 

less than 1 kΩ and signal sources must have impedances less than 1/4000 of the attennuator input 

impedance. For example, a 2:1 attenuator using 2 KΩ resistors will have 1 KΩ of equivalent 

impedance; but the source impedance must be less than 1/2 Ω (1/4000 of 2000) for 12-bit 

measurement accuracy to be attained. 


Input Range RA RB Gain Polarity 

±5 VDC 10 Ω 

Short 

Open ×1 Bipolar 

±10 VDC 2 KΩ 2 KΩ ×1 Bipolar 

±30 VDC 10 KΩ 2 KΩ ×1 Bipolar 

±20 mA Short 249 Ω ×1 Bipolar 



6. Install resistors in RA and RB sockets for each channel as desired (see figures). 

In voltage mode, RA and RB (installed by the user) form a resistor divider network. In current mode, RA is 

always shorted, RB is shunted with a resistor. 8 channels can be configured alike with 16-pin, 8-resistor DIP-8 

resistor networks. With no resistors, DBK15 provides 16 differential voltage inputs for +5 V full-scale inputs. 

CL positions are used for bias resistors if necessary. Two differential measurement configurations can be used: 

floating or referenced differential. Refer to the Signal Management chapter for more information. 



1. Connect the signal input wires to the appropriate screw terminals. The DBK15 is equipped with 

screw terminal connectors for easy access to inputs and ground access points. Connectors are 

provided for 16 differential inputs and are labeled by channel number and H and L for high and low 

analog inputs. On board, there are 100KΩ bias resistors in the CL locations per channel (the CH 

locations are not used). These resistors can be removed if desired. 

The DBK15 card only supports differential inputs (not single-ended). Connect the 

high end of the signal to the High input and the low end to the Low input of the 

desired channel. Ground referencing to Analog Common is important for optimum 

accuracy. 

2. Use tie wraps (not included) and the board’s edge-holes to secure all wires in a way that will not 

allow mechanical stress to affect the signal connection. In other words, be sure to provide a degree 

of slack, or “strain-relief.” 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA-Type] Configuration 

Use of the DBK15 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series and 


1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode. 

JP1 JP3 

-15 V 

-OCTOUT 

-OCLKIN 

+15 V 

Bipolar Single-Ended 

Analog Option 

Card Use 

Factory Default Factory Default 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard[ISA-Type] Jumpers for the DBK15 

Note: The JP1 default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK5 via the internal 

±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g., DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove 

both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A 

and DBK33 sections as applicable. 

2. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP3 jumper in Bipolar mode. 

3. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended 

mode. 

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages referenced to analog 

common. 

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration 

JP4 








DaqView Users: When DBK15 is used with DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series Boards, the 

Internal Clock Speed must be set to 100 kHz as described in the DaqView document module. 

Name/Function: Universal Current/Voltage Input Card 

Input Connectors: Screw terminals for signal connections 

Output Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 using CA-37-x cable 

Attenuation/Shunt Resistor Connector: Machine sockets accommodate standard ¼-watt resistors 

Gain Ranges: ×1, ×2 

Inputs: 16 differential 

Voltage Input Ranges: ±5 VDC max 

Current Input Range: ±20 mA max 

Attenuator Resistors: 

Accuracy: +1% 

Temperature Coefficient: 100 ppm/ºC 

Gain Accuracy: ±0.05% typ, ±0.25% max 

Maximum Input Voltage: ±35 VDC 

Slew Rate: 10 V/µs 

Settling Time: 2µs to 0.01% 

CMRR: 80 dB min 

Non-Linearity: 0.002% typ, 0.015% max 

Unattenuated Bias Current: 150 pA typ, 0.2 µA max @ 25ºC 

Offset Voltage: 

Offset Drift: 

±(0.5 + 5/G) mV @ 25ºC typ 

±(2.0 + 24/G) Mv @ 25ºC max 

±(3 + 50/G) µV/ºC typ 

±(12 + 240/G) µV/ºC max 

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice. 



DBK16 2-Channel Strain-Gage Card 




Excitation …… 5 


Calibrating DBK16, for Daq Devices …… 9 


DaqBook/2000 and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 10 


GageCal Program …… 11 

Example …… 12 

Using the DBK16 with 3-Wire Strain Gages …… 13 

Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBooks …… 15 


Calibration Methods …… 16 

Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) …… 17 

Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration …… 20 

Channel Calibration Procedure …… 23 

2-Point Calibration …… 26 

Shunt Calibration …… 28 

Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function …… 30 

Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots …… 31 







Overview The DBK16 will condition signals from most types of bridge circuit configuration transducers that have 

a signal output of less than 50 mV. Strain gages and load cells are common types of these transducers. 

For half- and quarter-bridge strain gages, the DBK16 can accommodate user-supplied bridge completion 

resistors that complete the bridge circuit. 

The bridge circuit must be complete for the DBK16 to operate correctly. 

Each channel of the DBK16 offers a selectable 3-pole, low-pass filter with a user-set cut-off frequency. 

Up to 8 DBK16 boards can be connected to each of 16 analog LogBook or Daq device base channels for 

a maximum of 256 input signals. Remote-sense terminals are used with 6-wire Kelvin connections. 

The DBK16 provides an amplifier gain range of ×100 to ×12,500 for use with strain gages having 0.4 to 

10 mV/V sensitivities. Most strain gages are specified for a full-scale value of weight, force, tension, 

pressure, or deflection with an output of mV/V of excitation. For example, a strain gage with a full-scale 

rating of 1000 lb of tension might output 2 mV/V of excitation at full load. With an excitation of 10 VDC, 

1000 pounds of load would produce an output of 20 mV. 

The card’s 0 to 5 VDC offset and output-scaling permit nulling of large quiescent (inactive or motionless) 

loads and expansion of the dynamic range for maximum resolution. Typically, the quiescent output is nonzero. 

Prior to a force being applied, a mounted strain gage can be in a state of partial deflection resulting in 

an output. In the case of a tension gage, this output may be due to the weight of a hook or empty container. 

DBK Option Cards and Module 879895 DBK16, pg. 1

Source (+) 

Source (-) 

Excitation (+) 

Sensing (+) 

Bridge (+) 

Bridge (-) 

Sensing (-) 

Excitation (-) 

BCR 2 

Excitation 

Regulator 

Lower Channel 

Upper Channel 

G0 Gain 

Adjust Offset 

Adjust AC 

Low-Pass Filter 

a LPF 

f 

Gain 

Adjust 

Scaling 

Amplifier 

MUX 

+ 

2 

- 

Input Gain 

Amplifier 

Jumper 

DC Coupling 

Jumper 

Filter Bypass 

MUX 

2 

Output 

Channel 

Select 

Header 

(JP1) 

Address Lines 

G 1 



(Note 1) 

V0 Adj 

These indicated lines connect to 

Source (+) and Source (-) lines of 

the Lower Channel Circuit. 

2BCR 

stands for Bridge-Completion 

Resistors. 

5 mV Unity Gain Address 

VRef Buffer 

Recog. 


A wide-range excitation regulator is adjustable from 1.5 to 10.5 VDC with a current limit of 50 mA. The 

DBK16 requires a 12 to 15 VDC external excitation voltage that can be supplied from the DBK30A battery 

module or other user-supplied source. 

1 

CAUTION 

Each regulator has a maximum current of 50 mA. The maximum amount of 

excitation that can be provided by the DBK16 excitation regulator is represented by 

the following equation: 

VEXC[MAX] = 0.05 × RGAGE 

Where RGAGE = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge circuit. 

Exceeding the maximum allowed excitation can cause the DBK16 to fail. 

For DBK16s, the strain gage is configured as a 4-element bridge. There are 4 legs in a bridge circuit; the 

quarter, half or full designation refers to how many elements in the bridge are strain-variable. A quarter 

bridge has 1 strain-variable element; a half bridge has 2; and a full bridge has 4. Each DBK16 channel has 

locations for bridge completion resistors. These resistors of fixed values are necessary to fill out the bridge 

configuration. 

In the following diagram, a 4-element bridge-type strain gage is referenced to the upper and lower channel 

bridge completion resistor designations for the DBK16. 

Bridge resistors are used in either the DBK16 or the strain gage, 

but not in both at the same time. 

DBK16, pg. 2 879895 DBK Option Cards and Modules 

S1 

P1

Connections are provided for Kelvin-type excitation. The excitation regulators stabilize the voltage at the 

points connected to the on-board sampling dividers. Unless you run separate sense leads to the excitation 

terminals of the strain gage, the voltage regulation is most accurate at the terminal blocks on the DBK16. 

In a Kelvin-type connection, six wires run to a 4-element strain gage, and the excitation regulation is 

optimized at the strain gage rather than at the terminal blocks. For high accuracy, this can be a worthwhile 

connection for as little as 10 feet of 22 gauge lead wire. 

Kelvin Excitation Leads 

Full Bridge, Resistor Configuration for DBK16 

The full bridge configuration makes use of all four elements of the strain gage. When 

using a full bridge external strain gage (all four elements), the following applies to the 

DBK16 on board resistor configuration: 

Upper Channel – R10, R11, R12, and R13 are not installed. 

Lower Channel – R22, R23, R24, and R25 are not installed. 


Half Bridge, ( ∆R1↓ and ∆R2↑) ⇒ ∆EOUT↑ ) 

Resistor Configuration for DBK16 

The half bridge configuration makes use of two elements of the strain gage. When using a half bridge external strain gage 

(two of four elements), the following applies to the DBK16 on board resistor configuration: 

Upper Channel – R10 and R13 are to be installed. 

Lower Channel – R22 and R25 are to be installed. 

Note that other Half Bridge scenarios exist. The one illustrated applies to the equation: 

∆R1↓ and ∆R2↑) ⇒ ∆EOUT↑ 

3-Wire, Quarter-Bridge, Negative ( ∆R↑⇒ ∆EOUT↑) for DBK16 

The quarter-bridge configuration makes use of one element of the strain gage. The three-wire, quarter-bridge can be 

configured as “positive” or “negative.” The above figure represents the negative (minus) configuration. In this setup, the 

magnitude of voltage out is directly proportional to the change in resistance ( ∆R↑⇒ ∆EOUT↑). When using a quarter-bridge 

external strain gage in the “negative” configuration, the following applies: 



An external BCR is to be placed in the –EXC to R1 line (see previous figure). 


3-Wire, Quarter-Bridge, Positive ( ∆R↓⇒ ∆EOUT↑) for DBK16 

The quarter-bridge configuration makes use of one element of the strain gage. The three-wire, quarter-bridge can be 

configured as “positive” or “negative.” The above figure represents the positive (plus) configuration. In this setup, the 

magnitude of voltage out is inversely proportional to the change in resistance ( ∆R↓⇒ ∆EOUT↑). When using a quarterbridge 

external strain gage in the “positive” configuration, the following applies: 



An external BCR is to be placed in the +EXC to R1 line (see previous figure). 

Excitation 

To supply excitation voltage to a single DBK16: 

Connect J1 (terminals SRC+ and SRC-) to a source of filtered (not necessarily regulated) DC between 

12 and 15 V. 

To supply excitation to multiple DBK16s: 

1. Connect J1 (terminals SRC+ and SRC-) 

to a source of filtered (not necessarily 

regulated) DC between 12 and 15 V. 

2. Connect J2 of the powered DBK16 to J1 

of the next DBK16 (see figure). The 

excitation power terminals are wired in 

parallel to daisy-chain multiple DBK16s 

(in systems with more than 2 

transducers). 

The user-supplied excitation source is attached to a voltage regulator in the DBK16 circuitry. This 

regulator provides the excitation to the actual transducer (there is a separate regulator for each transducer, 

hence two regulators per DBK16). Each regulator has a maximum current of 50 mA. The maximum 

amount of excitation that can be provided by the DBK16 excitation regulator is represented by the 

following equation: 

VEXC[MAX] = 0.05 × RGAGE 

Where RGAGE = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge circuit. 


The user-supplied excitation source should provide adequate current levels for all the DBK16s that are 

powered. The minimum current required for the user-supplied excitation source for each transducer 

(2 per DBK16) is: 

circuit) 


IMIN = Excitation voltage/R + 5 mA (where R = the resistance of 1 element in the bridge 

The user-supplied excitation source must be 12 to 15 VDC and connected with the proper polarity. 

Enhanced DBK16 cards contain two additional jumpers (JP6 and JP7). Their configuration determines 

whether the channel excitation regulator’s power source is external (default) or internal. Review the 

following note and CAUTION prior to selecting the internal power source. 

JP6 – Selects the upper channel’s source. Default is external. 

JP7 – Selects the lower channel’s source. Default is external. 

Factory Defaults: 

It is possible to power excitation regulators from an internal +15 V on the LogBook’s 

or Daq device’s P1 if no other DBKs are being used. On enhanced DBK16 cards, two 

3-pin headers (JP6 for upper channel and JP7 for lower channel) are set by default to 

use an external power source. Moving the jumpers to the internal position connects the 

excitation terminals to the +15 VDC rail from P1. 

CAUTION 

Avoid overloading LogBook’s , DaqBook’s or DaqBoard’s +15 VDC power supply. The 

power supply can be overloaded if DBK16 jumpers JP6 and/or JP7 are set to “Internal” 

and one or more of the following conditions exist: 

Additional DBKs are being used. 

120 Ω bridge-completion resistors are being used in the strain gage 

configuration. 

• Bridge configuration – Full 

• Coupling – DC 

• Excitation source – External 

• Low pass filter – Disabled (by-passed) 

The cutoff frequency, if enabled, has a default of 3.7 Hz. This is obtained using 100kΩ 

resistors for R17, R18, and R19 for the lower channel; and using 100kΩ resistors for R5, 

R6, and R7 for the upper channel. See the following board layout for resistor locations. 

The next few sections of this document module explain the following aspects of configuring DBK16. 

• AC Coupling and Low-Pass Filter Options 

• Channel and Card Address Selection 


DBK16 Board Layout 

AC Coupling, DC Coupling, and Low-Pass Filter Options 

Headers on the board accommodate the coupling and low-pass filter options and the output channel 

selection (see above figure). Resistors can be removed to lower filter gain from ×2 to ×1. A filter 

frequency determining resistor network can be inserted into an IC socket. 

The AC or DC coupling choice (on each channel) is set by the presence or absence of a shunt jumper on 

a two-pin header. If the shunt jumper is in place, the coupling is DC. If the shunt jumper is absent, the 

coupling is AC. JP3 is used to configure the upper channel’s coupling; JP2 is used to configure the lower 

channel. 

The choice of using or bypassing the low-pass filter (for each channel) is made by the orientation of 

shunt jumpers on a 2×2-pin header. When the shunt jumpers are oriented in the same way as the “bypass” 

symbol (horizontal, parallel with labels on card), the filter is bypassed. When the shunt jumpers are 

oriented in the same way as the “filter” symbol (vertical), the filter is in the signal path. JP4 is used to 

configure the upper channel; JP5 is used to configure the lower channel. 

The corner frequency of the low-pass filters is determined by 

three resistor values in each filter circuit. Located in the center 

of the card, the lower channel resistors are R17-R18-R19; and 

the upper channel resistors are R5-R6-R7. These resistor 

locations are arranged to allow the use of an 8-position DIP 

network (as a convenient means of changing all 6 resistors at 

once). The machined-pin socket allows you to insert 

individual resistors (should the two filter sections have 

different corner frequencies). The table to the right lists 

common frequencies, nominal resistance values, and Bourns 

part numbers. 

Resistance Bourns Part 

Frequency (Ω) 

Number 

37Khz 10 4116R-001-100 

19Khz 20 4116R-001-200 

7Khz 50 4116R-001-500 

3.7Khz 100 4116R-001-101 

1.9Khz 200 4116R-001-201 

700Hz 500 4116R-001-501 

370Hz 1K 4116R-001-102 

190Hz 2K 4116R-001-202 

70Hz 5K 4116R-001-502 

37Hz 10K 4116R-001-103 

19Hz 20K 4116R-001-203 

7Hz 50K 4116R-001-503 

3.7Hz 100K 4116R-001-104 

Note: Due to settling time, the filter should not be enabled during the DBK16 setup. 

DBK16’s active low-pass filters have an inherent gain of ×2. You must factor this gain 

into your setup calculations. To change the gain to ×1, remove the following 10 KΩ 

resistors: R44 for the upper channel, R46 for the lower channel. 

Reference Note: Methods of calibrating DBK16 are discussed in the calibration section. 


Channel and Card Address Selection 

The lower and upper channels on the DBK16 are multiplexed into one of 

the channels (0 to 15). The base channel (that the DBK16 is multiplexed 

into) is set by the shunt jumper on the16×2 header designated JP1 (see 

previous figure, DBK16 Board Layout). 

Each base channel can have up to 16 expansion channels multiplexed into 

it. Since the DBK16 represents two expansion channels, eight DBK16 

cards can be multiplexed into each base channel. To distinguish channels, 

there is a card address bank of three switches on each DBK16. These 

switches are binary-weighted with eight possibilities (0-7). 

DIP Switch Setting Card Channels (n) 

C B A Upper Lower 

Open Open Open 1 0 

Open Open Closed 3 2 

Open Closed Open 5 4 

Open Closed Closed 7 6 

Closed Open Open 9 8 

Closed Open Closed 11 10 

Closed Closed Open 13 12 

Closed Closed Closed 15 14 

Base First Expansion 

Channel Channel 

Number (N) 

0 16 

1 32 

2 48 

3 64 

4 80 

5 96 

6 112 

7 128 

8 144 

9 160 

10 176 

11 192 

12 208 

13 224 

14 240 

15 256 

The switch settings are: open = 0, closed = 1 (enabled). The weights (when closed) are: A = 1, B = 2, C = 4. 

The table above shows the switch settings. The table to the right lists card channels (n) with respect to the base 

channel. 

Since the LogBook or the Daq device has sixteen base channels, up to 128 DBK16s can be used, providing a 

maximum of 256 channels. To keep track of all base and expansion channels, the base channels are designated 

0 to 15 and the expansion channels are designated 16 to 271. Channel 16 is the first channel on the first 

expansion board (lower channel on card address 0 with JP1 set to CH0). Channel 271 is the last channel on the 

last expansion board (upper channel on card address 7 with JP1 set to CH15). 

To calculate the actual input channel, use the above tables and add the applicable “N” and “n.” The result is the 

expansion channel number. This number is needed when writing a program to read from that particular 

channel. For more information on multiplexing, refer to the Signal Management chapter. 


Calibrating DBK16 for Daq Devices 


This section covers calibrating a DBK16 that is being used in a Daq device application. 

LogBook users: refer to Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBook, which begins on page 15. 

Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the DBK16 is flexible enough to 

support most of them. Each DBK16 channel circuit has an excitation regulator, a high gain (100-1250) 

input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (1-10) amplifier, and a calibration 

multiplexer. 

There are 4 trimpots to set up each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following 

adjustments: 

EXC for adjusting the Excitation Voltage to the transducer 

GAIN for setting the gain of the input amplifier 

OFFSET for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance 

SCALE for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier 

Proper setup includes the use of software commands that control the calibration multiplexer in each circuit. 

The calibration multiplexer is used to switch the bridge circuit out and apply reference voltages to the input 

for use in the DBK16 setup. The calibration multiplexer also allows the Daq device to record the 

individual adjustments. The next table shows the setup commands, their binary codes, and a description of 

their function. These commands are accessible through DaqView and the Daq device driver as gain 

settings and through most third party software support as well as GageCal. 

Setup Command Code Description 

Dbk16ReadBridge 00 Reads bridge circuit with all gains and offsets included (normal operation) 

Dbk16SetOffset 01 Applies a grounded input and allows the user to read the circuit offset voltage 

multiplied by the input amplifier and the low-pass filter gain. 

Dbk16SetScalingGain 10 Applies 5 mV to the input and allows the user to read the voltage out of the 

circuit through the input gain amplifier, the low-pass filter* and the scaling 

gain amplifier. 

Dbk16SetInputGain 11 Applies 5 mV to the input and allows the user to read the voltage out of the 

circuit through the input gain amplifier and low-pass filter only. 

The following equations represent the voltage recorded by the Daq device when the calibration mux is 

set in 1 of 4 possible settings. 

Code Equation 

00 Vout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(InputGain)(bridge circuit voltage) - offset voltage] 

01 Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(-offset voltage) 

10 Vout = Filter Gain*(Scaling Gain[(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage]) 

11 Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage 

Asterisk (*) implies the filter is enabled. 

A typical setup procedure is as follows: 

1. Disable the low-pass filters (JP4 and/or JP5) and set DC coupling (install JP2 and/or JP3) for all the 

channels that are being setup. If you plan on using the filter during your acquisition, take note of the 

gain in the filter stage (default ×2, or ×1 with resistor removed) and allow for it in your setup. 

2. Determine what the excitation for the transducer will be from the transducer specifications and the 

current limitations of the DBK16 excitation regulator. 

3. Determine what the maximum voltage will be from the transducer at maximum load or strain, and 

calculate what the DBK16 channel total gain should be based on a full-scale Daq device 

(-5 V to +5 V for DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] in bipolar mode; 0 to +10 V for 

DaqBook [/100 & /200], DaqBoard [ISA type] and DaqBoard/2000 in unipolar mode; -10 to +10 V 

for DaqBoard/2000 in bipolar mode and Daq PC-Card). (See examples on page 12.) 


4. Determine how the total gain will be distributed between input amplifier gain, filter gain and scaling 

amplifier gain. (See examples on page 12.) 

5. Hook up the transducer to the terminal strips labeled Lower or Upper according to the figures in the 

Card Connection section. Install the appropriate bridge completion resistors if applicable. 

6. Set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC and measuring the 

voltage with a voltmeter across the +EXC and -EXC terminals on the DBK16. 

7. Send the DBK16SetOffset command (usually through a gain setting in the software support). Adjust 

the OFFSET trimpot for a reading of 0.00 volts. This removes all offset from the DBK16 channel 

circuit. 

8. Send the DBK16SetInputGain command (usually through a gain setting in the software support). 

Adjust the GAIN trimpot for a voltage reading equal to (.005)(the desired input amplifier gain). 

9. Send the DBK16SetScalingGain command (usually through a gain setting in the software). Adjust 

the SCALE trimpot for a voltage reading equal to (.005)(the desired input amplifier gain)(the desired 

scaling amplifier gain). 

10. Send the DBK16 ReadBridge command (default). With the quiescent (normal or inactive) load or 

strain applied, adjust the OFFSET trimpot for a reading of 0.00 volts. This adds offset to the circuit 

to compensate for the quiescent load and allows maximum resolution for the measurement. 

11. Enable the low-pass filter and/or AC coupling if required for your application. 

12. From the transducer specifications and the total gain of the DBK16 channel, calculate the Daq device 

voltage/transducer units and apply it to your Daq device voltage readings through software. 

13. Apply a known load or strain and verify the DBK16 and software settings. 

Set-Up Notes: 

• The offset adjustment is unipolar 0 to 5 V on the input amplifier output. If the offset can not be 

adjusted to 0.00 V at the end of the setup procedure, try swapping the +BRG and -BRG wire 

connections or dropping the input gain and increasing the scaling gain. 

• For very high system gains, the Scaling Gain might have to be set first with the Input Gain low and 

then set the Input Gain (the Daq device can only measure up to 10 V). 


Use of the DBK16 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series device 

and DaqBoards [ISA type]. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded 

analog mode. 

Note: This default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry 

of the DBK16 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using 

auxiliary power (e.g., a DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove 

both JP1 jumpers (refer to Power Management in the DBK Basics 

section and to the DBK32A or DBK33 sections as applicable. 

2. For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the 

JP4 jumper in single-ended mode. 

DaqBook/2000 and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration 


Configuration Jumpers 



GageCal Program 




GageCal is not used for LogBook applications. 

Note: GageCal is best suited for a load cell application 

To install the GageCal program on your computer, close all other programs and run SETUP.EXE on Disk 

1 (or CD-ROM, as applicable) from Windows 3.1, 3.11, or Windows 95/98/Me. Follow the installation 

instructions from the setup program. 

Execute GAGECAL.EXE from a Windows environment to start the program. The first screen that appears 

will set up the Daq device interface. Input the correct Daq device interface information and click OK. If 

the program does not detect the Daq device, please check connections and try again or refer to the 

troubleshooting tips in the Troubleshooting Tips chapter. 

Through GageCal, DBK16 channels can be configured and calibrated as needed. The typical procedure for 

using GageCal with a DBK16 is as follows: 

1. Highlight the expansion channel number you want to configure and calibrate. Notice the channel 

numbers are listed 16 to 271 with respect to the Daq device (if necessary, see the section entitled, 

Channel and Card Address Selection). 

2. Click on the CONFIGURE button. Setup and verify your hardware setting with the diagram on the 

screen. Please note that the coupling must be set to DC and the filter must be disabled to calibrate 

the DBK16. After the hardware is setup and verified, click on the ACCEPT button to configure the 

next channel or ACCEPT CONFIGURATION AND EXIT to return the main GageCal screen. 

3. Highlight the first configured channel and click on the button labeled CALIBRATE. The 

Application Parameters screen appears. There are 2 types of calibration that the DBK16 can 

accommodate. Nameplate calibration allows you to enter specifications of your transducer and 

application; 

Two-Point calibration allows you to enter two points of millivoltage out of the transducer vs 

pounds or other physical units. From the parameters you enter, GageCal instructs you how to set up 

the DBK16. 

Note: All application parameters entered will be used in the DBK16 setup. Any inaccuracies will result 

in the DBK16 being configured incorrectly. 

4. Click on the CONTINUE button, and follow the instructions from the GageCal program. GageCal 

has a help file that will explain any questions on the different screens or menus. If you have trouble 

in your setup, a DIAGNOSTIC window can show a DBK16 circuit to help you troubleshoot the 

problem. 

5. After GageCal completion, go to DaqView and convert ±5 V to engineering units using mx+b. 


Example 

The following examples perform selected steps for a typical setup. There will be strain gage and load cell 

examples. Referring to the typical setup procedure, step 3 says to determine the maximum voltage from 

the transducer at maximum load or strain. 

A strain gage example: 

Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF) used to calculate the approximate output of the bridge 

circuit with a typical strain value. The formula is: 

( Excitation Voltage)(Gage Factor)(Strain in strain units) 

4 

= *Bridge circuit output voltage 

*linear estimate, some strain gages are not linear, refer to strain gage theory for more information. 

If we have a 120 ohm strain gage with a gage factor of 2.1 and excitation voltage of 5 V (due to the current 

limitation of the excitation regulator on the DBK16, it must be less than 6 V) and we are measuring 4000 

microstrain: 

A load cell example: 

Bridge output voltage for 4000 microstrain = 

(5)(2.1)(4000 × 10 ) 

= 10.5 mV 

4 

Load cells come with a mV/V specification which means for each volt of excitation at maximum load, the 

load cell will output a specific millivolt level. 

Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 2.05 mV/V using 10 V of excitation (assume it is a 350 ohm load 

cell). When 3000 pounds are applied, the voltage out of the load cell is: 

(10)(2.05×10 -3 ) = 20.5 mV 

For 1000 pounds, it would be (1000/3000)(10)(2.05×10 -3 ) = 6.833 mV 

Now that we know what our full-scale voltage will be from our sensor, we can calculate what the voltage 

gain should be on the DBK16 so the full-scale sensor output will correspond to the full-scale Daq device 

input. Full-scale Daq device inputs are: 

-5 to +5 V for DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] in bipolar mode 

0 to +10 V for DaqBook, DaqBoard [ISA type], and DaqBoard/2000 in unipolar mode 

-10 to +10 V for DaqBoard/2000 in bipolar mode and Daq PC-Card 

To calculate the needed DBK16 gains, use the maximum voltage you want to represent the full-scale of 

the sensor (usually full-scale Daq device input with a little space to prevent saturation) divided by the fullscale 

sensor output. 

Example: The strain gage above at 4000 microstrain will output 10.5 mV. If using a DaqBook in bipolar 

mode, full-scale is +5 V. Also, we will allow 0.5 V space on the full-scale input. The DBK16 gain should 

be: 

4.5 V/10.5 mV = 428.6 

Now we must determine how to distribute the gain in the DBK16 (typical setup procedure step 4). There is 

the input amplifier that has a gain range of ×100 to ×1250, the filter gain (×1 or ×2) and the scaling 

amplifier that has a range of ×1 to ×10. If we round off our gain to ×420, any of these possible settings 

will work. 

Input Gain ×420 ×100 ×240 ×300 

Filter Gain (enabled) No Yes (×2) Yes (×1) No 

Scaling Gain ×1 ×2.1 ×1.75 ×1.4 

Total DBK16 Gain ×420 ×420 ×420 ×420 

After we determine how all our gains will be distributed, the sensor can be hooked up to the DBK16, the 

bridge completion resistors installed, and the excitation voltage set. Then we can proceed to set the gains. 

We will use DaqView for this. 

DBK16, pg. 12 879895 DBK Option Cards and Modules 

-6

Launch DaqView and set it up for the DBK16 at the correct Daq device input channel determined by the 

setting of JP1 and S1. On return to the DaqView main spreadsheet screen, notice the type column in the 

spreadsheet. All the DBK16 channels should say bridge. Changing the type will allow us to set the offset 

and gains in the DBK16. When setting up the DBK16 gains, enable only the channel you are setting up. 

Turn all the others off in DaqView. Also, set DC coupling and disable the on-board filter during the gain 

and offset settings. 

First, we want to remove all the offset adjustment from the circuit. Set the type to Offset Gain. Enable the 

input reading column from the Acquire menu or the tool bar. While reading the spreadsheet, set the 

trimpot labeled OFFSET to read a value of 0.00. Disable the input reading column. 

Next, set the type to Input Gain. This allows us to set the input amplifier gain. The DBK16 has a 5 mV 

signal on the input, so the reading that we want to set the trimpot labeled GAIN to is (.005)(Input Gain). 

Enable the input reading column and set the Input Gain. Disable the input reading column. 

Typical Input Gain settings: 

Gain DaqView Reading Gain DaqView Reading 

100 0.5 volts 200 1.0 volts 

300 1.5 volts 400 2.0 volts 

500 2.5 volts 600 3.0 volts 

700 3.5 volts 750 3.75 volts 

800 4.0 volts 900 4.5 volts 

1000 5.0 volts 1200 6 volts * 

* requires DaqBook/DaqBoard to be in unipolar mode. 

Next set the type to Scaling Gain. This allows us to set the scaling amplifier gain. When setting the 

scaling gain, the input gain is also present and must be considered when making the adjustment. The 

scaling gain reading you want to read is (.005)(input gain)(scaling gain). Enable the input reading column, 

and set the Scaling Gain. Disable the input reading column. 

For an input gain of 200, typical scaling gains are: 

Scaling Gain DaqView reading 

2 2.0 volts 

4 4.0 volts 

6 6.0 volts* 

8 8.0 volts* 

10 10.0 volts* 

* requires DaqBook/DaqBoard to be in unipolar mode. 

Now all the gains are set correctly, and we have to adjust the offset for any bridge circuit imbalance or 

quiescent loads. Enable the on-board filter. Set the type to Bridge. Make sure the quiescent load is 

applied. Enable the input reading column and adjust the trimpot labeled OFFSET for a reading of 0.00. If 

you can not adjust it to 0.00, try dropping your input gain and compensate for the drop by raising your 

scaling gain. If it still does not adjust to 0.00, swap the +BRG and -BRG wires to reverse the polarity of 

the signal. The offset adjustment is unipolar and only affects the input gain. After the final offset is 

made, the gain readings will be incorrect (if you want to go back and check them) unless the circuit 

offset is removed. (Step 7 in typical setup procedure.) 

Using the DBK16 with 3-Wire Strain Gages 

Each single-element 3-wire strain gage has 1 wire connected to one side of the gage element and 2 wires 

connected to the other. Follow these steps for using the DBK16 with the 3-wire single-element strain 

gages. 

1. Install bridge completion resistors R12 and R13 (R24 and R25 for lower channel). 

2. Attach the 1-wire side of the gage element to the -EXC and -SEN terminals. 

3. Attach one wire on the 2-wire side of the gage to +BRG terminal. 

4. Attach one more bridge completion resistor to the end of the other wire on the 2-wire side of the 

gage element. 

5. Attach the other side of the 3rd bridge completion resistor to the +EXC terminal. 



Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for LogBooks 

Overview 


This section covers calibrating a DBK16 that is being used in a LogBook application. 

Daq users: Refer to Calibrating DBK16 and DBK43A for Daq Devices, which begins on page 9. 


Calibration Methods …… 16 

Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) …… 17 

Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration …… 20 

Channel Calibration Procedure …… 23 

2-Point Calibration …… 26 

Shunt Calibration …… 28 

Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function …… 30 

Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots …… 31 

Calibrating a strain gage channel includes: 

• One-time adjusting of the bridge excitation. 

• One-time tuning of the electronic gains and offset via trimpots to maximize performance and dynamic 

range. 

• Applying a transfer function to the voltage output to convert it to engineering units, e.g., pounds, 

kilograms. 

• Executing a software scale and offset adjustment periodically to maintain accuracy. 

Example of a Unit Conversion from Voltage to Pounds 

The trimpots provide course tuning so large quiescent offsets can be nulled and the bridge signal can be 

amplified to match the A/D input range. Once these adjustments are made, the operator can periodically 

fine-tune the calibration via software using LogView’s 2-Point calibration feature. LogView’s scale and 

offset features provide a simple means to apply a transfer function that converts the voltage to user units, 

for example, pounds, as in the above block diagram. 

Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the strain gage signal conditioning 

modules are flexible enough to support most of them. Each channel circuit has an excitation regulator, a 

high gain (x100 to x1250) input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (x1 to x10) 

amplifier, and a calibration multiplexer. 


Calibration Methods 

By using software-controlled multiplexers, on-board reference voltages can be read by the data acquisition 

system so that precise gains and offsets can be set. LogView provides a means of easily controlling the 

calibration multiplexers so that the reference voltages can be displayed while the trimpots are being 

adjusted. 

There are four trimpots to set up each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following 

adjustments: 

• EXC - for adjusting the excitation voltage to the transducer 

• GAIN - for setting the gain of the input amplifier 

• OFFSET - for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance 

• SCALE - for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier 

Signal-FlowRelationship of Software Controlled Multiplexers and On-Board Reference Voltages 

This calibration procedure can only be executed while 

LogBook is attached to a PC that is running LogView. 

To adjust trimpots, use one of the following calibration methods, as appropriate: 

Nameplate, 2-Point, Shunt, or Manual. 

Several different calibration techniques are supported by strain gage signal conditioning modules. 

Calibration methods include; Nameplate, 2-Point, Shunt, and Manual. From the following discussion, 

select the calibration method that is best for your application. 

Nameplate –uses the transducer’s published specs. 

Nameplate calibration is typically used with packaged load cells with millivolt-per-volt (mV/V) transfer 

functions. Using the mV/V spec of the load cell or a strain gage’s Gage Factor (GF), the necessary system 

gain can be calculated and applied to a channel. 

2-Point – uses 2 known loads, one of which might be “no load.” 

The 2-Point calibration method requires the operator to apply two known loads to the load cell or strain 

gage, one at a time, while the data acquisition system takes measurements. Typically, the first point is with 

no load applied and the second point is close to the maximum load capacity of the gage. While measuring 

the first point the offset is nulled, and while measuring the second point the gain is adjusted to span the 

majority of the input range of the A/D. No gain calculations are required to perform this calibration 

method. 


Shunt – applies a shunt resistor to the bridge to simulate a load. 

Shunt calibration is identical to 2-Point calibration except that the second point is simulated so that 

applying a load near the gage’s maximum load is unnecessary. To simulate a bridge imbalance, a shunt 

resistor is placed across one leg of the bridge. Once the shunt resistor value has been calculated, it is 

applied to the bridge to provide the desired simulated load. No gain calculations are required to perform 

this calibration method. 

Manual – used to assign specific gains and offsets. 

If a particular gain and offset are already known, these values can be used to setup a strain gage channel. 

Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) 

Set the Selected Channel(s) to DC Coupling 

Since the applied calibration-signals are DC, set DC coupling for all the channels that are being adjusted. 

If your application requires AC coupling, don’t forget to remove the jumpers when the adjustment 

procedure has been completed. 

Determine Channel Parameters 

Before adjusting the trimpots, the excitation needs to be determined. Typically, the supplier of the gage of 

load cell will recommend a suitable value, but make sure that the maximum output current of the excitation 

regulator is not exceeded. 

Initialize LogView 

Launch LogView and use the LogBook Hardware Configuration window (hardware tree) to configure all 

of the DBK options that are to be used in the system. If needed, refer to the LogView chapter. 

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen 

Open the Analog Input Channel Configuration Window. Click the User Scaling Tab and verify that all of 

the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted have scale and offset values of 1 and 0, respectively. 


Analog Input Channel Configuration Window, Button and Screen … “User Scaling” Tab Selected 

For all of the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted, set their ranges to +5V. 

Click the DBK Parameters tab to expose the strain gage signal conditioning programmable settings. 

Click the Attach button to substantiate a connection between the PC and the LogBook. 

Adjust the Excitation - DBK16 

For DBK16, set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC and 

measuring the voltage with a voltmeter across the +EXC and -EXC on the bridge or at the terminals of the 

signal conditioning module. 

Adjust the Excitation - DBK43A 

DBK43A is equipped with a switch that allows the excitation voltage to be read by the LogBook and 

displayed in LogView. For all DBK43A units to be adjusted, you must: 

1. Reposition the DBK43A’s “physical” calibration switch (located next to the Power LED) to the CAL 

position. 

2. Select CAL in LogView. This is detailed in the following paragraph. 

Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select DBK43A (see following figure). In 

the Configurations settings box, set the CAL/NORM Switch to CAL. If the DBK43A is not displayed 

click the + to the left of the base channel (to which it is attached), this action expands the hardware 

tree in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window. Repeat this process for all DBK43A units that 

are to be adjusted. Click OK to lock in the changes. 

Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL” 


Download 

Button 

3. In the Param1 column (see next figure for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be 

adjusted. 

4. Set Mode equal to Excitation from the drop down list (located above the DBK Parameters tab). 

5. Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted. 

Selecting “Mode = Excitation” for DBK Parameter 1 

6. Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook. 

7. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the excitation values for 

each channel. 

Selecting “Enable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu) 

8. Set the excitation voltage for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC for the associated 

channel while reading their values in LogView. 

9. Select Indictors \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar. 

Selecting “Disable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu) 


10. Return the physical calibration switches (of the applicable DBK43As) to the NORM position. 

11. In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window (hardware tree) and select NORM 

for each DBK43A. 

This completes the section entitled: “Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required)” 

Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration 

To properly calibrate a strain gage channel using the Nameplate method, the required gain must first be 

calculated. If the desired gain and offset are already know [as in the Manual calibration method] skip to 

the section, Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage. 

The following examples outline the necessary steps for determining the required gain for 

Nameplate calibration. Both strain gage and load cell examples are provided. 

Calculating the Required Gain 

Determining a Strain Gage’s Maximum Output Voltage 

Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF) used to calculate the approximate output of the bridge 

circuit with a typical strain value. The formula is: 

VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4 [See following important notice] 

Where: VBR = Bridge output voltage 

VEXC = Excitation Voltage 

G = Gage Factor 

S = Strain in user units (in uStrain) 

B = Configuration factor (1 for ¼ bridge, 2 for ½ bridge, 4 for full bridge) 

The equation, VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4 produces a linear estimate. If you are 

using a non-linear strain gage you should refer to strain gage theory for additional 

information as needed. 

For a 120 ohm strain gage with a gage factor of 2.1 and excitation voltage of 5 V, applying 

4000 microstrain would produce an bridge output of 10.5mV for a ¼ bridge configuration. 

VBR = (5 * 2.1 * 4000x10 -6 ) / 4 = 10.5mV 

Determining a Load Cell’s Maximum Output Voltage 

Load cells come with a mV/V specification—for each volt of excitation at maximum load, the load cell 

will output a specific millivolt level. 

VLC = R * VEXC 

Where: VLC = Load cell output voltage 

R = Load cell spec (mv/V) 

VEXC = Excitation voltage 


Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 2.05 mV/V using 10 V of excitation (assume a 350Ω load cell). 

When 3000 pounds is applied, the voltage out of the load cell is 20.5mV. 

VLC = (10 * 2.05×10 -3 ) = 20.5 mV 

If 1000 pounds were applied, we would see 6.833 mV. This is arrived at as follows: 

(1000/3000) * 10 * 2.05×10 -3 = 6.833 mV 

Using the Calculated Maximum Voltage to Determine the Necessary Gain 

To maximize the resolution and dynamic performance of the system, the sensor’s output should be 

amplified to correspond to the data acquisition system’s input range. 

Using the LogBook’s +5V input range, the required gain is calculated by dividing 5V by the maximum 

output voltage of the sensor. Before performing the calculation, it is typically a good idea to pad the 

maximum sensor voltage by about 5% so that, once amplified, it won’t bump into the limit of the 5V range. 

G = VLB / (VGO + VGO * 5%) 

Where: G = Gain 

VLB = LogBook input range 

VGO = Maximum gage output 

For the strain gage in the previous example with a maximum output of 10.5mV, the required gain is: 

G = 5.0V / (0.0105V + 0.0105V * 0.05) = 453.5 

For the above load cell with a maximum output of 20.5mV, the required gain is: 

G = 5.0V / (0.0205V + 0.0205V * 0.05) = 232.3 

Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage 

The system’s total gain is: 

GT = GI * GF * GS 

Where: GT = Total gain 

GI = Input amplifier gain 

GF = Filter gain 

GS = Scaling amplifier gain 

Note: Maximum gain calibration is x1000 for +5V range. 


The majority of the gain should be assigned to the Input Amplifier, with the Scaling Amplifier used for 

fine-tuning. If the filter is enabled, a gain of x2 is automatically introduced. 

The input amplifier has a gain range of ×100 to ×1250; the filter gain ×1 or ×2; and the scaling amplifier 

has a range of ×1 to ×10. For the strain gage example, if we round off our gain to ×420, any of these 

possible settings will work. 

Option 

A 

Option B Option C Option D 

Input Gain ×420 ×100 ×240 ×300 

Filter Gain (enabled) No Yes (×2) Yes (×2) *See Note No 

Scaling Gain ×1 ×2.1 ×1.75 ×1.4 

Total Gain ×420 ×420 ×420 ×420 

For Option C, the LPF gain is typically x2. 

For gains of x1 (if the filter is enabled), the following apply: 

DBK16 - For a gain of x1 (if the filter is enabled),10KΩ resistors R44 and R46 must have been previously 

removed (for the low and high channels, respectively). 

DBK43A - For a gain of x1 (if the channel filters are enabled), removal of the following 10 KΩ resistors 

applies: Ch0 – R144, Ch1 – R244, Ch3 – R444, Ch4 – R544, Ch5 – R644, Ch6 – R744, Ch7 – R844. 


Channel Calibration Procedure 

Adjust the Offset 

The following steps are used to adjust the offset. 

1. In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be 

adjusted. 

2. Select Mode = SetOffset from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands the 

calibration multiplexer to route the 0.0V reference through the entire analog path (see following 

figure). 

“Mode = Offset” 0.0 Volt Reference is Routed 


4. Click the Download button. This sends the current configuration to the LogBook. 

5. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar. This displays the offset values for 

the enabled channels. 

6. Set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET for the 

associated channel. 


Adjust the Input Amplifier Gain 

Perform the following steps to adjust the Input Amplifier Gain. 


adjusted. 

2. Select Mode = SetInputGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands the 

calibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through the Input Amplifier and bypass the Scaling 

amplifier (see following figure). 

Note: If the filter is enabled (not bypassed) accommodate an additional x2 gain stage. 


“Mode = SetInputGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route 



5. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values for each 

channel. 

6. For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GI * GF * 0.005] for each transducer by adjusting the 

trimpot labeled GAIN. Use the Input Amplifier Gain (GI ) calculated earlier. 

Note: If the filter is enabled, the filter gain (GF ) is 2; otherwise GF = 1. 

Example 1: If GI = 250 and the filter is disabled; 

the GAIN trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 1.25V. 

Example 2: If GI = 250 and the filter is enable; the GAIN trimpot would 

be adjusted to obtain 2.50V. 


Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain 

Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain as follows: 


adjusted. 

2. Select Mode = SetScalingGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands the 

calibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through all of the amplification stages as shown 

below. 

“Mode = ScalingGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route 




5. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values for each 

channel. 

6. For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GT * 0.005] for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot 

labeled SCALE. Use the total system gain (GT ) calculated earlier. 

Example: If GT = 435.5, the SCALE trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 2.17 V. 


Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load 

Most bridges have some level of offset, even if no quiescent load is present. In quarter and half bridge 

situations, use of 1% bridge completion resistors can cause up to 1mV/V of offset. If the bridge has 4mV 

of offset and the Input Amplifier is set to x100, the Offset potentiometer would need to nullify 400mV. 

DBK16 – For DBK16s, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out 0 to +5V of offset amplified by the 

Input Amplifier. 

DBK43A – For DBK43As, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out -1.25 to +5V of offset amplified by the 

Input Amplifier. 

Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load 

If a significant amount of quiescent offset is present and the Input Amplifier gain is set too high, the 

Offset Potentiometer will not have enough range to adequately nullify the offset. In this case, the gain of 

the Input Amplifier must be reduced while the gain of the Scaling Amplifier is increased proportionately. 

Use the following steps to trim bridge quiescent load (unload the bridge). 


adjusted. 

2. Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands the 

calibration multiplexer to route the transducer output through the analog path as shown below. 


2-Point Calibration 

“Mode = Bridge,” Reference Route 



5. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset values for 

each channel. 

6. For the associated channel, set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the 

trimpot labeled OFFSET. 

Note: If you are unable to nullify the quiescent offset of the bridge, your Input Amplifier gain may be too 

high. Information regarding gain redistribution can be found in the section entitled, 

Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage. 


This 2-point calibration method makes use of trimpot adjustments. It should not be 

confused with the LogView software 2-Point Calibration (discussed in the LogView 

chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual). 

In the 2-Point calibration method, the user places two known loads on the gage, one at a time, then adjust 

the trimpots until the expected value is reached. Typically, the first of loads is “no load.” In the case of a 

weight scale, the scale would first be unloaded to adjust the offset, then a known load (near maximum 

expected) would be applied to adjust the gain. 

Shunt calibration (discussed immediately after this 2-Point Calibration section) is the same as the 2-Point 

method, except the second load is applied in a simulated fashion by shunting 1 leg of the bridge with a 

shunt resistor. Shunt calibration is preferred in cases where applying a real load (near the maximum 

expected) is not practical. 

Initialize the System 

1. Download a single setup and continuously display data in LogView. The continuous display can 

remain throughout the procedure since the calibration multiplexers do not need reset between steps. 


adjusted. 


calibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path. 

4. Turn off all the channels in the system, except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted. 


6. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset values for 

each channel. 



For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) and set the 

voltage to 0.0V for each transducer. This is accomplished by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET. If the 

first point is actually a calibrated load, you will need to move the load to each gage, one at a time, to adjust 

its associated offset. 

Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain 

Complete the following steps to adjust the channel gain. 

1. Apply the second load to each gage channel. The value of this load should approximate that of the 

maximum expected load. For the best results, a gain should be selected so that the bridge’s maximum 

output equals 90% of the A/D’s input range. 

2. Calculate the desired voltage for the second point using the following equation: 

VD = (LA/LM) * VI * 90% 

Where: VD = Desired voltage for 2 nd point of calibration 

LA = Applied load used in calibrating the 2 nd point 

LM = Maximum load expected during usage 

VI = Input voltage range 

Example: The load standard that will be applied to the gage as the 2 nd point in the 2-Point calibration is 

100lbs. The maximum expected load during usage is 150lbs. The programmable input range of 

the data acquisition system is set for +5V. The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal 

conditioning electronics is: 

VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V 

In this example, we should adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V is 

measured. 

If 150lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured. 

VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V 

3. Apply the second calibrated load to each gage and set the voltage to VD, as derived in step 2. Do this 

for each transducer by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel. 

Note that the GAIN trimpot provides most of the amplification (course adjustment), while the SCALE 

trimpot allows for fine-tuning. 

Repeating the Process 

Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that 

offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel. 


Shunt Calibration 

Shunt calibration is virtually identical to the 2-Point method just discussed, except that the second point is 

simulated. The simulated load is achieved by shunting one leg of the bridge with a shunt resistor. Shunt 

calibration is the preferred calibration method when applying a real load (of a value approximating the 

maximum expected load) is not practical. To adjust the channel gain, the shunt must be applied to the 

bridge. 


Calculate and install the necessary shunt resistor before continuing. 

• DBK43A has direct support for shunt calibration, accommodating the 

resistor in its enclosure and allowing the software to apply it when requested. 

• DBK16 does not have direct support, so the shunt resistor must be applied 

externally and switched in manually. 

Adjust the offset as follows. 

1. In the Param1 column, select all of the DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted. 


calibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path. 

3. Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be 

adjusted. 


5. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset 

values for each channel. 

6. For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) and 

set the voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET. 

If the first point is an actual calibrated load, you must move the load to each gage, one at a 

time, to adjust its associated offset. 

Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain 

For the best results, a gain should be selected so that the bridge’s maximum output equals 90% of the 

A/D’s input range. 

1. Use the following equation to calculate the desired shunt voltage (VD). 

VD = (Ls/LM) * VI * 90% 

Where: VD = Desired voltage from the after amplification when the shunt is 

applied 

Ls = Simulated load produced by shunt 

LM = Maximum load expected during usage 

VI = Input voltage range 

Example: The simulated load produced by the shunt 100lbs. The maximum expected load 

during usage is 150lbs. The programmable input range of the data acquisition system is set for 

+5V. The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal conditioning electronics is: 

VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V 

In this example, we would adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V is 

measured. 

If 150lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured. 


VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V 

For DBK16, only … Externally apply the shunt resistor and set the voltage to VD, as derived above for each 

transducer. This is done by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel. 

The GAIN trimpot is used for course adjustment; and the SCALE trimpot for fine-tuning. 

For DBK43A only … DBK43 is equipped with a physical switch that allows the shunt to be applied when 

directed by the software. For each DBK43A to be adjusted, move this physical switch from NORM to CAL. 

2. In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select the DBK43A. 

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen 

3. Select the DBK43A from the LogBook Hardware Configuration window’s hardware tree. 

4. Set the list box to the right to CAL. If the DBK43A is not displayed click the + to the left of 

the base channel to which it is attached to expand the hardware tree. 

Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL” 

5. Repeat this process for each DBK43A that is to be adjusted. 

6. Click OK to lock in the changes. 

7. Open the Analog Input Channel Grid. In the Param1 column (see page 19 for location), select 

all of the DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted. Select Mode = Shunt from the drop down 

list above the grid. Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels 

that are to be adjusted. 


9. Select Indictors \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the excitation 

values for each channel. 

10. Set the voltage to VD, as derived above, for each transducer. This is accomplished by adjusting 

the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel. The GAIN trimpot 

provides for course adjustment. The SCALE trimpot provides for fine tuning. 



12. Return the physical NORM/CAL switches (of the applicable DBK43As) to the NORM 

position. 

13. In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and return each DBK43A 

back to NORM. 

Repeating the Process 

Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that 

offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel. 

Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function 

To make the data from your gage more useful, it should be recorded in terms of units appropriate to your 

application, such as pounds, kilograms, inches, mm, or Hg. A transfer function is needed to convert volts to 

these more meaningful units. 

For this purpose, LogView provides a means of assigning a mathematical scale and offset to each channel. 

Scale and offset information from that chapter has been repeated below for convenience. 

In User Scaling, you can create a transfer function. The function allows LogView to display units that could 

be more useful to you than volts. For example, you could obtain readings with pounds as the designated Units. 

The reading (in pounds) will be based on the raw input value, typically Volts, and the indicated Scale and Offset 

adjustment. 

To create the transfer function: 

1. Type the desired unit name in the Units column. 

2. Select an appropriate range (e.g. unipolar). 

3. Enter the linear scale relation to Volts (e.g. 25 pounds per Volt). 

4. Enter any offset from 0, for example, an empty basket used in an application reads 0.1 V. 

The reading and range columns will automatically change to the adjusted values. 


Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots 

Once the trimpots have been adjusted during initial installation, periodic trimming can be performed 

through LogView’s 2-Point software calibration. The LogView procedure does not require the use of 

trimmpots and should not be confused with the 2-point method discussed in this section of the manual. 

Refer to the LogView chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual for information regarding 2-point calibration 

via software. 


Name/Function: 2-Channel Strain-Gage Input Card 

Input Connectors: Screw terminals for signal connections 

Output Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 using CA-37-x cable 

Number of Channels: 2 

Excitation Voltage Range: 1.50 to 10.50 VDC @ 50 mA (on-board adjustment for external source) 

Gain Range: ×100-1250 

Types of Bridges Accommodated: 

Full Bridge, Kelvin Excitation (6-wire) 

Full Bridge (4-wire) 

Half Bridge (3-wire) 

Quarter Bridge (2-wire) 

Bridge Resistors: On-board provisions for 4 bridge-completion resistors per channel. 

Type Input: Differential DC 

Input Impedance: 100 MΩ (in parallel with 150 pF) 

CMRR: 115 dB 

Excitation Voltage Source: External 13-18 VDC @ 50 mA/circuit 

Excitation Current Output: 50 mA max, current limited at 60 mA 

Excitation Sensing: Local or Remote 

Excitation Regulation: 

Line Regulation: 0.025% 

Load Regulation: 0.05% 

Reference Voltages: 2.500 VDC 

Reference Accuracy: 0.05% 

Reference Drift: 3 ppm/ºC 

Gain Calibration Reference: 5.00 mVDC 

Reference Accuracy: 0.2% 

Reference Drift: 20 ppm/ºC 

Committed instrumentation amplifier [for each section], with a gain adjust 

from ×100 to ×1250 via externally accessed 15-turn trimpot. 

Gain Accuracy: 0.5% 

Gain Drift: 50 ppm/ºC 

Input Offset: 100 µV max 

Offset Drift: 4 µV/ºC 

Output Offset: 20 µV 

Offset Drift: 200 µV/ºC 

Offset Adjustment: 0-100% of range, 0-5.00 VDC (15-Turn trimpot) 

Full-Scale Sensitivity Range: 

@ 5.00 VDC Excitation: 0.8 to 10 mV/V 

@ 10.00 VDC Excitation: 0.4 to 5 mV/V 

Scaling Amplifier Gain Range: ×1 to ×10 (15-Turn trimpot) 

Low-Pass Filter: 3 pole Butterworth, User By-Passable; 

-9dB @ User-set Corner Frequency 



DBK17 4-Channel Simultaneous Sample and Hold Card 

Overview 

Overview ...... 1 

Simultaneous Sample and Hold ...... 2 

Hardware Setup ...... 2 

Card Connection ...... 2 

Card Configuration ...... 2 

CE Compliance ...... 3 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration ...... 4 

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration ...... 4 

Software Setup ...... 4 

DBK17 – Specifications ...... 5 






Each DBK17 simultaneous sample-and-hold (SSH) card provides 4 channels of voltage input to a 

LogBook or a Daq device system. Each of the 16 analog input channels can accept four DBK17 cards for 

a maximum of 256 analog input channels. The simultaneous sample-hold function is activated at the 

beginning of each channel scan and freezes all signals present on DBK17 inputs for the duration of the 

scan, allowing for non-skewed readings of all channels. 

A DBK17 channel should never be the first channel in a scan due to timing of the 

SSH line. 

DBK17 features an instrumentation amplifier for each channel, with switch-selected gains of 

×1, ×10, ×100, ×200 and ×500. A socket is provided for a user-selected gain resistor for custom gain 

selection instead of the unity gain (×1) setting. 

Four separate sample-hold stages follow the 4 input stages. The outputs are connected to a 4-channel 

multiplexer stage. The enabled-output MUX allows up to 4 DBK17s to share a common analog input 

channel. 

Input can be connected to a channel’s BNC connector or terminal block. The differential inputs are 

provided with switchable100 KΩ bias resistors to analog common. User gain can be set to any value 

between unity and ×500 by installing a resistor in the user-location of each channel. 



Simultaneous Sample and Hold 




Some applications require every channel in a scan group to be read at the same instant, as opposed to being 

read with a delay, e.g., 10 µs between channels. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) is a means of 

obtaining such instantaneous data on multiple channels while avoiding time-skew problems. 

A sample case in which SSH is desirable: 

A performance analysis of an engine is a classic example of a case in which SSH is desirable. In our 

engine analysis example data is gathered on the following parameters: 

• cylinder pressure 

• cylinder temperature 

• piston strain 

• piston stroke position 

• valve position 

• engine rpm 

• vibration 

For a more exact correlation of the data, it needs to be obtained at the same instant, without time-skew. By 

using SSH each input signal continuously passes through an instrumentation amplifier and into a sampleand-hold 

stage. When the sample enable line goes high, each channel’s sample-and-hold stage will 

“freeze” the current analog value. The values for all channels are separately “latched” within 50 ns of each 

other. The signals are held [in a stable condition] while the multiplexer switches through all channels and 

sends the signals [one-by-one] to the acquisition device. At the device, the ADC digitizes each reading. 

The resulting data is a snapshot of conditions at a selected instant although the multiplexing and analog-todigital 

conversions are spread out over a longer interval. The simultaneous sample and hold circuit allows 

you to gather up to 256 simultaneous samples via sixty-four DBK17s. 

The DBK17 is equipped with BNC connectors and terminal block connectors access to each of the four 

differential analog inputs. Note that the terminal block is a connection-option to the BNC connector. 


Input Termination 

• 100K bias resistors – Enabled 

• SSH — Enabled. No disable option. 

• Gain – x1 

DBK17 provides two 100 KΩ bias resistors for 

each analog input. For balanced 200 KΩ input 

impedance, both resistors should be switched in. 

An 8-position DIP switch (SW5) can selectively 

engage the bias resistors. The input circuit and 

switch positions are shown in the figure. The 

switches must be in the closed position to engage 

the termination resistors. For unbalanced high 

input, only the (-) resistor should be used. If 

neither resistor is used, some external bias current 

path is required. 

SW5 

6 7 8 

5 

1 2 3 4 

OPEN 

4- 

4+ 

3- 

3+ 

2- 

2+ 

1- 

1+ 

N 

Terminal 

Block 

+ _ 

A 

A 

+ 

- 

Input Impedance/Termination 

100 kΩ 


Gain Settings 

CE Compliance 

Examples of Bias Resistor Selection Options 

On the card, each channel has a gain-set switch and holes for gain resistors labeled 

RG1 to RG4. The figure at the right shows gain values for switch settings 0 to 4, 

with 0 being equal to x1 and 4 being equal to x500. If a custom gain is desired, 

the switch is set to position 0 and a gain resistor must be mounted and soldered 

onto the card. The value of the gain resistor is determined by the formula: 

RGAIN = [40,000 / (Gain -1)] - 50 Ω 

Address Configuration 

As many as four DBK17s can be connected to each analog channel. With sixteen 

channels (and four inputs per DBK17) 256 inputs are possible. Since this is a 

daisy-chain interface, each card must have a unique address (channel and card 

number). Note that the default setting for SW6 is Card 1. 

To configure the card, locate the 16 × 2-pin header (labeled J1) near the front of 

the board. The 16 jumper locations on this header are labeled CH0 through 

CH15. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper is 

used on a single card. Four cards in the daisy-chain can have the same channel 

number as long as their card number is unique. 

Set switch SW6 for each of four DBK17s on a single channel. Verify that only 

one card in the system is set to a particular channel and card number. 






Use of the DBK17 requires setting jumpers in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices and 

ISA-Type DaqBoards. 

1. If not using auxiliary power, ensure that the JP1 jumper is in the expanded analog mode (see figure). 

Jumpers on DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series, & ISA-Type DaqBoards 

Note: 

These jumpers do not 

apply to /2000 Series 

devices. 

Note: The JP1 default position (above figure) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK17 

via the internal +15 VDC power supply. See the following CAUTION regarding JP1. 

CAUTION 

If using auxiliary power, for example a DBK32A or a DBK33, you must remove 

both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to 

the DBK32A and DBK33 sections as applicable. 

2. Place the DaqBook/100 Series or DaqBook/200 Series device’s JP2 jumper in the SSH position. 

CAUTION 

Do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1. Applying an external voltage 

reference for DAC1 when using SSH output will result in equipment damage due to 

a conflict on P1, pin #26. 

3. For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, ensure that the JP4 jumper is in single-ended mode. 



No hardware configurations are required for the DaqBook/2000 Series or DaqBoard/2000 Series devices. 






Name/Function: Simultaneous Sample-Hold Card 


Input Connections: 4 BNC connectors, 4 screw-terminal sets 

Output Connector: DB37 male, which mates with P1 using CA-37-x 

cable 

Number of Cards Addressable: 64 

Input Type: Differential 

Voltage Input Ranges: 

0 to ±5000 mVDC 

0 to ±500 mVDC 




Input Amplifier Slew Rate: 12 V/µs minimum 

Acquisition Time: 

0.6 µs (10 V excursion to 0.1%) 

0.7 µs (10 V excursion to 0.01%) 

Channel-to-Channel Aperture Uncertainty: 50 ns 

Output Droop Rate: 0.1 µV/µs 

Input Gains: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×200, ×500 & User-Set 

Input Offset Voltage: 500 µV + 5000/G maximum (nullable) 

Input Offset Drift: ±5 + 100/G µV/°C maximum 

Input Bias Current: 100 pA maximum 

Input Offset Currents: 50 pA maximum 

Input Impedance: 5 × 10 12 parallel with 6 pF 

Switchable Bias Resistors: 100 KΩ (each to analog common) 

Gain Errors: 

0.04% @ ×1 

0.1% @ ×10 

0.2% @ ×100 

0.4% @ ×200 

1.0% @ ×500 

Gain vs Temperature: 

×1 @ ±20 ppm/°C 

×10 @ ±20 ppm/°C 

×100 @ ±40 ppm/°C 

×200 @ ±60 ppm/°C 

×500 @ ±100 ppm/°C 

Non-Linearity: 

×1 to ±0.015% full-scale 





Common-Mode Rejection Ratio 

(CMRR): 

70 dB minimum @ ×1 







DBK18 4-Channel Low-Pass Filter Card 

Overview 

Overview ...... 1 




CE Compliance ...... 3 

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration ...... 3 

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration ...... 3 

Configuring DBK18 Filter Sections ...... 3 


DBK18 – Specifications ...... 6 


o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable 

to your system, as needed. 

o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located 


Each DBK18 low-pass filter (LPF) card provides 4 input channels to a LogBook or a Daq device system. 

Each of sixteen channels can accept four DBK18 cards for a maximum of 256 analog inputs. The input 

connectors are BNC type connectors. The differential inputs are provided with switchable 100 KΩ bias 

resistors to analog common. 

The DBK18 features an instrumentation amplifier for each channel, with switch-selected gains of 

×1, ×10, ×100, ×200 and ×500. A socket is provided for a gain resistor for custom gain selection instead 

of unity gain (×1). Gain for any channel can be set to any value between unity and ×500 by installing an 

appropriate resistor. Four separate filter stages follow the 4 input stages. The outputs are connected to a 

4-channel multiplexer stage. The enabled output MUX allows up to four DBK18s to share a common 

analog base channel. 

BNC 



Terminal 

Block 

+ _ 

Switchable 

bias resistors 

(per channel) 

SW5 

Gain-Select Switches 

SW1-SW4 

Amplifier 

a 

Filter-Bypass/ 

Enable Jumpers 

J3-J6 

BY 

LPF 

f EN 

Low-Pass 

Filter 

CH 0 (1 of 4 identical channels) 

CH 1 

CH 2 

CH 3 


MUX 

J1 Output channel 

selection header 

Board-Select 

Switch 

SW6 

Card Address 

recognition stage 

Channel address lines 

The DBK18 is equipped with BNC connectors for easy access to all of the analog inputs. Connections are 

provided for 4 differential inputs. The card also includes a terminal block as a connection-option to the 

BNC connectors. 

Note: New versions of the DBK18 have been enhanced by the addition of a terminal block. The BNC 

connectors are still usable, and board functions have not been changed. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 918894 DBK18, pg. 1 

16 

2 

2 

P1



Input Termination 

• 100K bias resistors – Enabled 

• Low-Pass Filter – Bypassed (Disabled) 

• Gain – x1 

DBK18 provides two 100 KΩ bias resistors for 

each analog input. For balanced 200 KΩ input 

impedance, both resistors should be switched in. 

An 8-position DIP switch (SW5) can selectively 

engage the bias resistors. The input circuit and 

switch positions are shown in the figure. The 

switches must be in the closed position to engage 

the termination resistors. For unbalanced high 

input, only the (-) resistor should be used. If 

neither resistor is used, some external bias current 

path is required. 

Gain Settings 

SW5 

Examples of Bias Resistor Selection Options 

6 7 8 

5 

1 2 3 4 

OPEN 

4- 

4+ 

3- 

3+ 

2- 

2+ 

1- 

1+ 

N 

Terminal 

Block 

+ _ 

A 

A 

+ 

- 

100 kΩ 

Input Impedance/Termination 

On the card, each channel has a gain-set switch labeled GAIN 1 (SW1) to GAIN 

4 (SW4) and holes for gain resistors labeled RG1 to RG4. The table in the figure 

shows gain values for switch settings 0 to 4. If a custom gain is desired, the 

switch is set to position 0; and a gain resistor must be mounted and soldered onto 

the card. The value of the gain resistor is determined by the formula: 

RGAIN = [40,000 / (Gain -1)] - 50 Ω 

Address Configuration 

Up to 4 DBK18s can be connected to each analog channel. Since this is a 

daisy-chain interface, each card must have a unique address (channel number 

and card number). Note that the default setting of SW6 is Card 1. 

To configure the card, locate the 16 × 2-pin header labeled JP1 near the front of 

the board. The 16 jumper locations on this header are labeled CH0 through 

CH15. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper is 

used on a single card. Four cards in the daisy-chain can have the same channel 

number as long as each card number is unique. 

Set switch SW6 for each of the 4 DBK18s on a single channel. Verify that only 

one card in a system is set to a particular channel and card number. 


CE Compliance 





Use of the DBK18 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and 


1. If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the Analog Option Card mode. 

Configuration Jumpers 

Note: The default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK18 via the 

internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g., DBK32A, DBK33), you 

must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and 

to the DBK32A and DBK33 sections, as applicable. 

2. For DaqBook/100, /112, and /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended mode. 

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages referenced 

to analog common. 



Configuring DBK18 Filter Sections 

There are 4 low-pass, 3-pole active filters on the DBK18. Each filter can be enabled (EN), or bypassed 

(BY) by placement of the jumper on J3 for channel 0, J4 for channel 1, J5 for channel 2, or J6 for 

channel 3. The factory-default setting is bypassed (BY) for each channel. 

Each filter can be configured as a Butterworth, Bessel, or Chebyshev filter with corner frequencies up to 

50 kHz. Filter properties depend on the values of resistors and capacitors installed in several circuit 

locations. Above 10 Hz, installing capacitors is unnecessary because capacitors in the ICs are sufficient. 

In all cases, three resistors are required to complete the active filter circuits contained mostly within the 

UAF42 ICs. 

The following circuit diagram shows the active filter IC in a typical section of the DBK18. The resistors 

and capacitors outside the IC have a physical location in a DIP-16 socket (dual in-line, 16 pins) with an 

RCnn designator. The RC indicates the needed part is a resistor or capacitor; the 3rd character is the 

channel number; and the 4th character corresponds to the socket position (A-H). 


Filter Circuit Diagram 

A machined-pin IC socket in each filter RC location can accept resistors and capacitors that plug directly 

into the socket; however, this is not recommended. Two much better approaches exist. The first is to use 

pre-configured plug-in filter modules; the second is to configure your own plug-in module using a blank 

CN-115. Both of these options are depicted in the following illustration. 

The use of plug-in modules provides excellent “gold-to-gold” contact between the components of the 

plug-in module and the on-board header. 

The following figure shows the DIP-16 component pattern typical of the 4 filter sections. 

DIP-16 Component Pattern 

Note: In the DIP-16 figure, “n” corresponds to “channel number.” 

Note: In the DIP-16 figure, pin 7 of the DIP-16 socket: 

• connects to pin 8 for low-pass filtering 

• connects to pin 6 for band-pass filtering 


The following table lists values of components for common corner frequencies in Butterworth filters. If designing 

your own filter, software from Burr-Brown provides the component values to create the desired filter. Note that 

the design math is beyond the scope of this manual. 

3-Pole Butterworth Filter Components 

3dB (Hz) RCnA RCnB RCnC RCnD RCnE RCnF RCnG RCnH 

0.05 3.16 MΩ 1 µF none 3.16 MΩ 1 µF 3.16 MΩ none 1 µF 

0.10 1.58 MΩ 1 µF none 1.58 MΩ 1 µF 1.58 MΩ none 1 µF 

0.20 787 kΩ 1 µF none 787 kΩ 1 µF 787 kΩ none 1 µF 

0.50 3.16 MΩ 0.1 µF none 3.16 MΩ 0.1 µF 3.16 MΩ none 0.1 µF 

1 1.58 MΩ 0.1 µF none 1.58 MΩ 0.1 µF 1.58 MΩ none 0.1 µF 

2 787 kΩ 0.1 µF none 787 kΩ 0.1 µF 787 kΩ none 0.1 µF 

5* 3.16 MΩ 0.01 µF none 3.16 MΩ 0.01 µF 3.16 MΩ none 0.01 µF 

10* 1.58 MΩ 0.01 µF none 1.58 MΩ 0.01 µF 1.58 MΩ none 0.01 µF 

20 787 kΩ 0.01 µF none 787 kΩ 0.01 µF 787 kΩ none 0.01 µF 

50 3.16 MΩ 0.001µF none 3.16 MΩ none 3.16 MΩ none none 

100* 1.58 MΩ 0.001µF none 1.58 MΩ none 1.58 MΩ none none 

200 787 kΩ 0.001µF none 787 kΩ none 787 kΩ none none 

500* 316 kΩ 0.001µF none 316 kΩ none 316 kΩ none none 

1000* 158 kΩ 0.001µF none 158 kΩ none 158 kΩ none none 

2000 78.7 kΩ 0.001µF none 78.7 kΩ none 78.7 kΩ none none 



*These pre-configured Butterworth frequency modules are available from the manufacturer. 


You have the option to configure the filter sections as band-pass filters rather than low-pass filters. The 

component selection program provides band-pass component values. The program also computes and 

displays phase and gain characteristics of the filter sections as a function of frequency. 






Name/Function: Low-Pass Filter Card 


Input Connections: 4 BNC connectors 

Output Connector: DB37 male, connects to P1 with a CA-37-x cable 

Number of Cards Addressable: 64 

Input Type: Differential 

Voltage Input Ranges: 

0 to ±5000 mVDC 





Input Amplifier Slew Rate: 12 V/µs minimum 

Input Gains: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×200, x500 and user-set 

Input Offset Voltage: 500 µV + 5000/G maximum (nullable) 

Input Offset Drift: ±5 + 100/G µV/°C maximum 

Input Bias Current: 100 pA maximum 

Input Offset Currents: 50 pA maximum 

Input Impedance: 5 × 10 12 parallel with 6 pF 

Switchable Bias Resistors: 100 KΩ each to analog common 

Gain Errors: 

0.04% @ ×1 

0.1% @ ×10 

0.2% @ ×100 

0.4% @ ×200 

1.0% @ ×500 

Gain vs Temperature: 

×1 @ ±20 ppm/°C 

×10 @ ±20 ppm/°C 

×100 @ ±40 ppm/°C 

×200 @ ±60 ppm/°C 

×500 @ ±100 ppm/°C 

Non-Linearity: 

×1 to ±0.015 % full-scale 

×10 to ±0.015 % full-scale 

×100 to ±0.025 % full-scale 

×200 to ±0.025 % full-scale 

×500 to ±0.045 % full-scale 

Common-Mode Rejection: 






Active Filter Device: UAF42 (Burr-Brown) 

Number of Poles/Filter: 3 

Types of Filters: Bessel, Butterworth, Chebyshev 

Frequency Range: 

0.1 Hz to 20 kHz 

The frequency is set by the installation of 

4-6 resistors, and/or capacitors, in sockets. 

Default Frequency: 

1 Hz 

Other frequencies may be implemented by 

soldering resistors, and/or capacitors, to 

locations on the 4 blank plug-in headers. 

Values for common frequencies and their 

component values are provided with the 

blank headers. 


DBK20 and DBK21 Digital I/O Cards 

Overview ...... 1 DBK20 – Provides Screw Terminals. 

DBK21 – Provides DB37 male connectors. 




LogBook Connection ...... 2 

DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection ...... 2 

DBK21 DB37 Male P2 Connector Pinout ...... 3 


DBK20 - Specifications ...... 5 

DBK21 - Specifications ...... 5 


o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to 

your system, as needed. 


near 


Overview The DBK20 and DBK21 are general purpose digital I/O cards that can increase available digital I/O lines 

by 48 per card. The DBK20 uses screw terminals; the DBK21 uses DB37 connectors. Both cards connect 

to the P2 digital I/O port via the interface cable (CA-37-x). 

Note: DBK20 and DBK21 require a P2 interface and therefore, can not be used with Daq PC-Cards. 

Note: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series board applications, the P2 interface is derived via use 

of an appropriate P4 adapter. P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules. 

Up to four DBK20s or DBK21s can be attached for a maximum of 192 lines (4×48). The local I/O lines 

cannot be used while expansion cards are attached. Thus, the first expansion card increases the number of 

usable digital I/O lines from 24 to 48, and subsequent cards each add 48 additional lines of programmable 

digital I/O. 

Note 1: Page 3 of this document module includes a pinout of the DBK21’s male DB37 connectors. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 879795 DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 1 

See 

Note 1 

See 

Note 1




LogBook Connection 

1. Connect wire leads to terminal blocks (if using a DBK20) or ribbon cable(s) terminated in 37-pin 

female connectors (if using a DBK21). 

2. Once all connections are in place, secure wires to the board at captive areas at the end of the card. 

Nylon tie wraps (not included) work well for this purpose. 

The header shunt must be set on the proper JP1 position for 

the intended address. The table shows the 4 choices 

available. 

Note: In multiple card systems, only 1 card at a time can 

have any given setting. 

Set JP1 header for the desired base address by placing the 

shunt jumper in one of the positions noted in the table 

(A to D). JP1 is labeled ADDRESS SELECT and is located 

at the card’s lower left side. 

The DBK20 or DBK21s attach to the LogBook’s P2 digital I/O connector. 

Address Hex 

Select Value 

A 0x63 

0x67 

B 0x6B 

0x6F 

C 0x73 

0x77 

D 0x7B 

0x7F 



Bank 

0 

A series of interface cables are available for connecting up to four DBK20 or DBK21 

cards. 

1. If using the optional DBK10 enclosure, slide the DB37 end of the board into a rear opening, and 

secure with hold-in screw-washer at rear panel. 

2. Connect an accessory ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from the 

digital I/O port (P2) of the LogBook to the DB37 connector at the end of the option card. 

DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection 

The DBK20 or DBK21s attach to the DaqBook, DaqBoard [ISA type] P2 digital I/O connector or, for a 

DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000/c Series board, to the P2 connector of an appropriate P4 adapter. P4 

adapters are discussed in DBK200 Series document modules. 



A series of interface cables are available for connecting up to four DBK20 or DBK21 

cards. 

1. If using the optional DBK10 enclosure, slide the DB37 end of the board into a rear opening, and 

secure with hold-in screw-washer at rear panel. 

2. Connect an accessory ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from the 

digital I/O port (P2) of the Daq devices or adapter to the DB37 connector at the end of the option 

card. 


There are no hardware configuration setups internal to DaqBooks and DaqBoards to allow expanded TTL 

I/O usage. 

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 2 879795 DBK Option Cards and Modules 

1 

2 

3

1 IR INPUT 

2 IR ENABLE 

3 PORT B 7 

+5V 20 

4 PORT B 6 

5 PORT B 5 

GND 21 

6 PORT B 4 

PORT C 7 22 

7 PORT B 3 

PORT C 6 23 

8 PORT B 2 

PORT C 5 24 

9 PORT B 1 

PORT C 4 25 

10 PORT B 0 

PORT C 3 26 

11 GND 

PORT C 2 27 

12 N/C 

PORT C 1 28 

13 GND 

PORT C 0 29 

14 N/C 

PORT A 7 30 

15 GND 

PORT A 6 31 

16 N/C 

PORT A 5 32 

17 GND 

PORT A 4 33 

18 +5 

PORT A 3 34 

19 GND 

PORT A 2 35 

PORT A 1 36 

PORT A 0 37 

DBK21 DB37 Male P2 Connector Pinout Digital I/O 

Pin Signal Name Description for P2 Pin Use 

1 IR INPUT Interrupt line input (no functions to access this) 

2 IR ENABLE Interrupt line enable (no functions to access this) 

3 PORT B 7 Digital input/output - port B bit 7 








11 GND Digital ground 

12 N/C Pin not connected/not used 






18 +5 V +5 V supply (Refer to Power Requirements, DBK Basics pg. 13) 


20 +5 V +5 V supply (Refer to Power Requirements, DBK Basics pg 13) 


22 PORT C 7 Digital input/output - port C bit 7 








30 PORT A 7 Digital input/output - port A bit 7 









Note: There are two male DB37 

connectors per DBK21 card. 




Note: Refer to the full-page table on the next page for valid hex codes. 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 879795 DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 3

HEX 

00 

01 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

0A 

0B 

0C 

0D 

0E 

0F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00000000 

00000001 

00000010 

00000011 

00000100 

00000101 

00000110 

00000111 

00001000 

00001001 

00001010 

00001011 

00001100 

00001101 

00001110 

00001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

4A 

4B 

4C 

4D 

4E 

4F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01000000 

01000001 

01000010 

01000011 

01000100 

01000101 

01000110 

01000111 

01001000 

01001001 

01001010 

01001011 

01001100 

01001101 

01001110 

01001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

8A 

8B 

8C 

8D 

8E 

8F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10000000 

10000001 

10000010 

10000011 

10000100 

10000101 

10000110 

10000111 

10001000 

10001001 

10001010 

10001011 

10001100 

10001101 

10001110 

10001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

C0 

C1 

C2 

C3 

C4 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11000000 

11000001 

11000010 

11000011 

11000100 

11000101 

11000110 

11000111 

11001000 

11001001 

11001010 

11001011 

11001100 

11001101 

11001110 

11001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

1A 

1B 

1C 

1D 

1E 

1F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00010000 

00010001 

00010010 

00010011 

00010100 

00010101 

00010110 

00010111 

00011000 

00011001 

00011010 

00011011 

00011100 

00011101 

00011110 

00011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

5A 

5B 

5C 

5D 

5E 

5F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01010000 

01010001 

01010010 

01010011 

01010100 

01010101 

01010110 

01010111 

01011000 

01011001 

01011010 

01011011 

01011100 

01011101 

01011110 

01011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

9A 

9B 

9C 

9D 

9E 

9F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10010000 

10010001 

10010010 

10010011 

10010100 

10010101 

10010110 

10010111 

10011000 

10011001 

10011010 

10011011 

10011100 

10011101 

10011110 

10011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

D0 

D1 

D2 

D3 

D4 

D5 

D6 

D7 

D8 

D9 

DA 

DB 

DC 

DD 

DE 

DF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11010000 

11010001 

11010010 

11010011 

11010100 

11010101 

11010110 

11010111 

11011000 

11011001 

11011010 

11011011 

11011100 

11011101 

11011110 

11011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

2A 

2B 

2C 

2D 

2E 

2F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00100000 

00100001 

00100010 

00100011 

00100100 

00100101 

00100110 

00100111 

00101000 

00101001 

00101010 

00101011 

00101100 

00101101 

00101110 

00101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

6A 

6B 

6C 

6D 

6E 

6F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01100000 

01100001 

01100010 

01100011 

01100100 

01100101 

01100110 

01100111 

01101000 

01101001 

01101010 

01101011 

01101100 

01101101 

01101110 

01101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

A0 

A1 

A2 

A3 

A4 

A5 

A6 

A7 

A8 

A9 

AA 

AB 

AC 

AD 

AE 

AF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10100000 

10100001 

10100010 

10100011 

10100100 

10100101 

10100110 

10100111 

10101000 

10101001 

10101010 

10101011 

10101100 

10101101 

10101110 

10101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

E0 

E1 

E2 

E3 

E4 

E5 

E6 

E7 

E8 

E9 

EA 

EB 

EC 

ED 

EE 

EF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11100000 

11100001 

11100010 

11100011 

11100100 

11100101 

11100110 

11100111 

11101000 

11101001 

11101010 

11101011 

11101100 

11101101 

11101110 

11101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

3A 

3B 

3C 

3D 

3E 

3F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00110000 

00110001 

00110010 

00110011 

00110100 

00110101 

00110110 

00110111 

00111000 

00111001 

00111010 

00111011 

00111100 

00111101 

00111110 

00111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

7A 

7B 

7C 

7D 

7E 

7F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01110000 

01110001 

01110010 

01110011 

01110100 

01110101 

01110110 

01110111 

01111000 

01111001 

01111010 

01111011 

01111100 

01111101 

01111110 

01111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

B0 

B1 

B2 

B3 

B4 

B5 

B6 

B7 

B8 

B9 

BA 

BB 

BC 

BD 

BE 

BF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10110000 

10110001 

10110010 

10110011 

10110100 

10110101 

10110110 

10110111 

10111000 

10111001 

10111010 

10111011 

10111100 

10111101 

10111110 

10111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

F0 

F1 

F2 

F3 

F4 

F5 

F6 

F7 

F8 

F9 

FA 

FB 

FC 

FD 

FE 

FF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11110000 

11110001 

11110010 

11110011 

11110100 

11110101 

11110110 

11110111 

11111000 

11111001 

11111010 

11111011 

11111100 

11111101 

11111110 

11111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 4 879795 DBK Option Cards and Modules


Name/Function: General Purpose Digital I/O Card 

Number of Channels: 48 I/O channels 

Connector: Screw terminals 

Device: 82C55 x 2 

Output Voltage Levels: 

Minimum “1" Voltage: 3.0 @ 2.5 mA sourcing 

Maximum “0" Voltage: 0.4 @ 2.5 mA sinking 

Output Currents: 

Maximum Source Current: 2.5 mA 

Maximum Sink Current: -2.5 mA 

Input Voltage Levels: 

Minimum Required “1” Voltage Level: 2.0 V 

Maximum Allowed “0” Voltage Level: 0.8 V 

Output Float Leakage Current: 10 µA 


Name/Function: General Purpose Digital I/O Card 

Number of Channels: 48 I/O channels 

Connector: DB37 male, corresponds to P2 pinout 

Device: 82C55 x 2 

Output Voltage Levels: 

Minimum “1” Voltage: 3.0 @ 2.5 mA sourcing 

Maximum “0” Voltage: 0.4 @ 2.5 mA sinking 

Output Currents: 

Maximum Source Current: 2.5 mA 

Maximum Sink Current: -2.5 mA 


Minimum Required “1” Voltage Level: 2.0 V 

Maximum Allowed “0” Voltage Level: 0.8 V 

Output Float Leakage Current: 10 µA 

DBK Option Cards and Modules 879795 DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 5

DBK20 and DBK21, pg. 6 879795 DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK23 Isolated Digital Input Chassis 

Overview 






DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection …… 3 

DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection …… 3 


LogBook Connection …… 4 









The DBK23 is a 3-port by 8-bit digital input chassis that connects to the LogBook’s, DaqBook or 

DaqBoard[ISA type] P2 Digital I/O Port or, for the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards [except 

DaqBoard/2003], to an appropriate P4 adapter. These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 series 

document modules. 

The DBK23 provides 500 V isolation from the DaqBook/DaqBoard or LogBook system and from channelto-channel. 

Up to 8 DBK23s can attach to the LogBook or to the DaqBook/DaqBoard (not the Daq PC- 

Card), offering up to 192 bits of isolated digital input. 

The DBK23 provides screw terminal access to each of its 24 isolated inputs. A slide-out PCB allows easy 

access to the controls and connectors. The input circuitry allows input voltages ranging from 0 to 30.0 V. 

Note: The local digital I/O cannot be used while any DBK23s are attached. 

The DBK23 can be powered from a 9 to 24 VDC source such as an adapter, a standard 12 volt car battery, 

or an optional rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery module (DBK30A). This power flexibility makes the 

DBK23 ideal for field and remote data acquisition applications. 




Power supplied to the DBK23 powers the on-board regulator. Connect the power supply (AC adapter) to 

the 5-pin DIN (labeled POWER IN) located on the front panel of the DBK23 chassis. Note the two power 

indicators on the rear panel of the DBK23. Check that both SYSTEM and LOCAL power LEDs are on at 

all times during operation. The second 5-pin DIN connector (labeled POWER OUT) can be cascaded to 

another accessory. A single power source can supply multiple DBK23 units. 

CAUTION 

Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage. Calculate system power 

requirements prior to daisy-chaining. 

Open the DBK23 case by loosening the two retaining screws on the chassis front 

panel. Slide out the DBK23 board in order to connect wires to terminal blocks. 

Each input channel (or bit) is equipped with a discrete two-pole screw terminal 

block for isolated HI and LOW termination. The terminals accept 12 AWG to 

22 AWG wire. Insulated wire types selected should meet or exceed 500 V 

isolation specifications. 

Strip insulation from the ends of wires (no more than 1/4"). Insert wire into the screw terminal receptacle 

so that only the bare portion of wire extends into the opening. Bare wire should not extend more than 

1/16" beyond the receptacle. These steps are essential to maintaining proper voltage isolation. Once the 

wire ends are in place, turn the slot head screw at the top of the block until the receptacle grips the wire 

firmly. Do not over tighten. Captive holes have been placed in appropriate locations to secure groups of 

wires to the board. Nylon lock ties (not included) work well for this purpose. 



The LogBook, DaqBook, and DaqBoard can each support up to eight DBK23s in a daisy-chain 

configuration using an accessory cable (see figure). Each unit is then configured via the on-board DIP 

switch (S1) for its unique base address. No more than one unit in a common chain may have the same S1 

setting. The table shows possible switch settings and addresses. The XI/O addresses can be used by 

programmers to access specific ports on specific cards. 

DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection 

Software constants have been predefined in the API as follows: DdpExpnA; DdpExpnB; 

DdpExpnC. Where “n” is replaced by the card number shown in the address table; and 

A, B, or C is the port for that card. 

Bank Card No. 

S1 

Configuration XI/O Address Value (Hex) 

C B A Port C Port 

B 

Port A 

0 0 0 0 0 0x62 0x61 0x60 

1 0 0 1 0x66 0x65 0x64 

1 2 0 1 0 0x6A 0x69 0x68 

3 0 1 1 0x6E 0x6D 0x6C 

2 4 1 0 0 0x72 0x71 0x70 

5 1 0 1 0x76 0x75 0x74 

3 6 1 1 0 0x7A 0x79 0x78 

7 1 1 1 0x7E 0x7D 0x7C 

Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBook or DaqBoard [ISA type] or, for a DaqBoard/2000 Series 

board [except DaqBoard/2003] to an appropriate P4 adapter, to the P2 connector of the DBK23 using an 

accessory cable. Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs. 

Note that P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules. 

DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection 

Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect the P2 digital I/O port of an appropriated DaqBoard/2000 Series 

P4 adapter to DBK23’s P2. Note that you can select up to eight positions for a total of 192 programmable 

isolated inputs. 

P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules. 







There are no hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard required for the DBK23. 

Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the LogBook to the P2 connector of the DBK23 using an accessory 

cable. Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs. 






HEX 

00 

01 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

0A 

0B 

0C 

0D 

0E 

0F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00000000 

00000001 

00000010 

00000011 

00000100 

00000101 

00000110 

00000111 

00001000 

00001001 

00001010 

00001011 

00001100 

00001101 

00001110 

00001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

4A 

4B 

4C 

4D 

4E 

4F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01000000 

01000001 

01000010 

01000011 

01000100 

01000101 

01000110 

01000111 

01001000 

01001001 

01001010 

01001011 

01001100 

01001101 

01001110 

01001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

8A 

8B 

8C 

8D 

8E 

8F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10000000 

10000001 

10000010 

10000011 

10000100 

10000101 

10000110 

10000111 

10001000 

10001001 

10001010 

10001011 

10001100 

10001101 

10001110 

10001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

C0 

C1 

C2 

C3 

C4 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11000000 

11000001 

11000010 

11000011 

11000100 

11000101 

11000110 

11000111 

11001000 

11001001 

11001010 

11001011 

11001100 

11001101 

11001110 

11001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

1A 

1B 

1C 

1D 

1E 

1F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00010000 

00010001 

00010010 

00010011 

00010100 

00010101 

00010110 

00010111 

00011000 

00011001 

00011010 

00011011 

00011100 

00011101 

00011110 

00011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

5A 

5B 

5C 

5D 

5E 

5F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01010000 

01010001 

01010010 

01010011 

01010100 

01010101 

01010110 

01010111 

01011000 

01011001 

01011010 

01011011 

01011100 

01011101 

01011110 

01011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

9A 

9B 

9C 

9D 

9E 

9F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10010000 

10010001 

10010010 

10010011 

10010100 

10010101 

10010110 

10010111 

10011000 

10011001 

10011010 

10011011 

10011100 

10011101 

10011110 

10011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

D0 

D1 

D2 

D3 

D4 

D5 

D6 

D7 

D8 

D9 

DA 

DB 

DC 

DD 

DE 

DF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11010000 

11010001 

11010010 

11010011 

11010100 

11010101 

11010110 

11010111 

11011000 

11011001 

11011010 

11011011 

11011100 

11011101 

11011110 

11011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

2A 

2B 

2C 

2D 

2E 

2F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00100000 

00100001 

00100010 

00100011 

00100100 

00100101 

00100110 

00100111 

00101000 

00101001 

00101010 

00101011 

00101100 

00101101 

00101110 

00101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

6A 

6B 

6C 

6D 

6E 

6F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01100000 

01100001 

01100010 

01100011 

01100100 

01100101 

01100110 

01100111 

01101000 

01101001 

01101010 

01101011 

01101100 

01101101 

01101110 

01101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

A0 

A1 

A2 

A3 

A4 

A5 

A6 

A7 

A8 

A9 

AA 

AB 

AC 

AD 

AE 

AF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10100000 

10100001 

10100010 

10100011 

10100100 

10100101 

10100110 

10100111 

10101000 

10101001 

10101010 

10101011 

10101100 

10101101 

10101110 

10101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

E0 

E1 

E2 

E3 

E4 

E5 

E6 

E7 

E8 

E9 

EA 

EB 

EC 

ED 

EE 

EF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11100000 

11100001 

11100010 

11100011 

11100100 

11100101 

11100110 

11100111 

11101000 

11101001 

11101010 

11101011 

11101100 

11101101 

11101110 

11101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

3A 

3B 

3C 

3D 

3E 

3F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00110000 

00110001 

00110010 

00110011 

00110100 

00110101 

00110110 

00110111 

00111000 

00111001 

00111010 

00111011 

00111100 

00111101 

00111110 

00111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

7A 

7B 

7C 

7D 

7E 

7F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01110000 

01110001 

01110010 

01110011 

01110100 

01110101 

01110110 

01110111 

01111000 

01111001 

01111010 

01111011 

01111100 

01111101 

01111110 

01111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

B0 

B1 

B2 

B3 

B4 

B5 

B6 

B7 

B8 

B9 

BA 

BB 

BC 

BD 

BE 

BF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10110000 

10110001 

10110010 

10110011 

10110100 

10110101 

10110110 

10110111 

10111000 

10111001 

10111010 

10111011 

10111100 

10111101 

10111110 

10111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

F0 

F1 

F2 

F3 

F4 

F5 

F6 

F7 

F8 

F9 

FA 

FB 

FC 

FD 

FE 

FF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11110000 

11110001 

11110010 

11110011 

11110100 

11110101 

11110110 

11110111 

11111000 

11111001 

11111010 

11111011 

11111100 

11111101 

11111110 

11111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 



Name/Function: General Purpose Optically Isolated Digital Input Module 

Channels: 24 I/O channels 

Connector: Screw terminals for signal outputs 


Range: 3 to 30 VDC 

Input Current: 1.5 to 15 mA 

Operating Voltage Range: 9 to 24 VDC 

Module Power Requirements: 0.25 W; AC adapter included 

120 VAC Adapter Supplied: 15 VDC @ 0.9 A 

Isolation Voltage: 

Channel-to-channel: 500 V 

Channel-to-system: 500 V 

Channel Address: Set by DIP switch 


DBK24 Isolated Digital Output Chassis 

Overview 






DaqBook and DaqBoard Connection …… 4 

DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection …… 5 


LogBook Connection …… 5 








The DBK24 is a 3×8-channel digital output chassis that connects to the LogBook’s, DaqBook’s, or 

DaqBoard’s [ISA type] P2 Digital I/O Port or, for a DaqBoard/2000 Series board [except DaqBoard/2003] 

to an appropriate P4 adapter. These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 Series document modules. 

The DBK24 provides 500 V isolation from the system and from channel-to-channel. Up to 8 DBK24s can 

attach to the LogBook, DaqBook, or DaqBoard (not the Daq PC-Card), offering up to 192 bits of isolated 

digital output. 

The DBK24 provides screw-terminal access to each of its 24 isolated outputs. A slide-out PCB allows 

easy access to the controls and connectors. The output circuitry allows output voltages as high as 60 V at 

currents up to 1 A. 

The local digital I/O cannot be used while any DBK24s are attached. 





The DBK24 can be powered by an included AC adapter, a standard 12-V car battery, or an optional 

rechargeable nickel-cadmium battery module (DBK30A). This power flexibility makes the DBK24 ideal 

for field and remote data acquisition applications. 

Power supplied to the DBK24 powers the on-board regulator. Connect the power supply (AC adapter) to 

the 5-pin DIN (labeled POWER IN) located on the front panel of the DBK24 chassis. Note the two power 

indicators on the rear panel of the DBK24. Check that both SYSTEM and LOCAL power LEDs are on at 

all times during operation. The second 5-pin DIN connector (labeled POWER OUT) can be cascaded to 

another accessory. A single power source can supply multiple DBK24 units. 

CAUTION 

Excessive power consumption can cause equipment damage. Calculate system power 

requirements prior to daisy-chaining. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics 

section for calculation tables. 

Open the DBK24 case by loosening the two retaining screws on the chassis front panel. Slide out the 

DBK24 board in order to connect wires to terminal blocks. Each input channel (or bit) is equipped with a 

discrete two-pole screw terminal block for isolated HI and LOW termination. The terminals accept 12 to 

22 AWG wire. Insulated wire types selected should meet or exceed 500 V isolation specifications. 



DBK24 simplified Component Layout 

Strip some insulation from the ends of the wires (no more than 1/4"). Insert wire into the screw terminal 

receptacle so that only the bare portion of wire extends into the opening. Bare wire should not extend 

more than 1/16" beyond the receptacle. These steps are essential to maintaining proper voltage isolation. 

After the wire ends are in place, turn the slot-head screw at the top of the block until the receptacle grips 

the wire firmly. Do not over tighten. Captive holes have been placed in appropriate locations to secure 

groups of wires to the board. Nylon lock ties (not included) work well for this purpose. 

Factory Default: Power-up output state – Hi (ON) 

Presetting the Outputs 

Each of the 24 outputs of the DBK24 can be configured to be ON or OFF at system power-on time. Each 

port has an 8-pole DIP switch (Port A Preset, Port B Preset, and Port C Preset). Before applying power to 

the LogBook, DaqBook/DaqBoard, or the DBK24: 

1. Locate the DIP switch (Port A Preset, Port B Preset, or Port C Preset) for the bit you wish to preset. 

2. Move the applicable micro-switch to the desired state [ON or OFF] for the output. 

3. First power on the DBK24, then the primnary acquisition device, i.e., the LogBook, DaqBook, or 

DaqBoard. All outputs will be operating in accordance with their corresponding DIP switch. 

Note: The first write command received by the DBK24 will override the switch settings until the unit is 

again power-cycled. Subsequently, until the first write command is received, the switches may also 

be used to control the outputs. 


User Output Configuration 

The outputs of the DBK24 are designed to switch levels as high as 60 V at 1 A. The next figure shows a 

typical output hookup with a protective flyback diode in parallel with the load. When driving inductive 

loads without built-in flyback protection, you must provide this diode. 

CAUTION 

Failure to provide adequate flyback protection may result in damage to 

the DBK24’s output stage. 

Each unit is configured via the on-board DIP switch (S1) for its unique base address. No more than one 

unit in a common chain may have the same S1 setting. Below is a table of possible switch settings and 

addresses. 

Bank Card 

No. 

S1 Configuration Address Value (Hex) 

C B A Port C Port B Port A 

0 0 0 0 0 0x62 0x61 0x60 

1 0 0 1 0x66 0x65 0x64 

1 2 0 1 0 0x6A 0x69 0x68 

3 0 1 1 0x6E 0x6D 0x6C 

2 4 1 0 0 0x72 0x71 0x70 

5 1 0 1 0x76 0x75 0x74 

3 6 1 1 0 0x7A 0x79 0x78 

7 1 1 1 0x7E 0x7D 0x7C 

Software constants have been predefined in the DaqBook/DaqBoard driver language 

interface files for all languages as follows: DdpExpnA, DdpExpnB, DdpExpnC; where 

“n” is replaced by the card number in the address table; and A, B, or C is the port for 

that card. 

DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] Connection 

Connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBook or 

DaqBoard [ISA type] or, for a DaqBoard/2000 

Series board [except DaqBoard/2003] to an 

appropriate P4 adapter, to the P2 connector of the 

DBK24 using an accessory cable (with -x 

indicating the number of expansion units to be 

connected). Select up to 8 positions for a total of 

192 programmable isolated inputs. 


DaqBoard/2000 Series Board Connection 

Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect the P2 digital I/O port of the DaqBoard/2000 Series P4 adapter to 

the P2 connector of the DBK24 using an accessory cable (with -x indicating the number of expansion units 

to be connected). Select up to 8 positions for a total of 192 programmable isolated inputs. 

P4 adapters are discussed in the DBK200 document modules. 






The DBK24 requires no hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard. 

Connect the P2 digital I/O port of 

the LogBook to the P2 connector 

of the DBK24 using an accessory 

cable (with -x indicating the 

number of expansion units to be 

connected). Select up to 8 

positions for a total of 192 

programmable isolated inputs. 






HEX 

00 

01 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

0A 

0B 

0C 

0D 

0E 

0F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00000000 

00000001 

00000010 

00000011 

00000100 

00000101 

00000110 

00000111 

00001000 

00001001 

00001010 

00001011 

00001100 

00001101 

00001110 

00001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

4A 

4B 

4C 

4D 

4E 

4F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01000000 

01000001 

01000010 

01000011 

01000100 

01000101 

01000110 

01000111 

01001000 

01001001 

01001010 

01001011 

01001100 

01001101 

01001110 

01001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

8A 

8B 

8C 

8D 

8E 

8F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10000000 

10000001 

10000010 

10000011 

10000100 

10000101 

10000110 

10000111 

10001000 

10001001 

10001010 

10001011 

10001100 

10001101 

10001110 

10001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

C0 

C1 

C2 

C3 

C4 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11000000 

11000001 

11000010 

11000011 

11000100 

11000101 

11000110 

11000111 

11001000 

11001001 

11001010 

11001011 

11001100 

11001101 

11001110 

11001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

1A 

1B 

1C 

1D 

1E 

1F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00010000 

00010001 

00010010 

00010011 

00010100 

00010101 

00010110 

00010111 

00011000 

00011001 

00011010 

00011011 

00011100 

00011101 

00011110 

00011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

5A 

5B 

5C 

5D 

5E 

5F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01010000 

01010001 

01010010 

01010011 

01010100 

01010101 

01010110 

01010111 

01011000 

01011001 

01011010 

01011011 

01011100 

01011101 

01011110 

01011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

9A 

9B 

9C 

9D 

9E 

9F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10010000 

10010001 

10010010 

10010011 

10010100 

10010101 

10010110 

10010111 

10011000 

10011001 

10011010 

10011011 

10011100 

10011101 

10011110 

10011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

D0 

D1 

D2 

D3 

D4 

D5 

D6 

D7 

D8 

D9 

DA 

DB 

DC 

DD 

DE 

DF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11010000 

11010001 

11010010 

11010011 

11010100 

11010101 

11010110 

11010111 

11011000 

11011001 

11011010 

11011011 

11011100 

11011101 

11011110 

11011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

2A 

2B 

2C 

2D 

2E 

2F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00100000 

00100001 

00100010 

00100011 

00100100 

00100101 

00100110 

00100111 

00101000 

00101001 

00101010 

00101011 

00101100 

00101101 

00101110 

00101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

6A 

6B 

6C 

6D 

6E 

6F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01100000 

01100001 

01100010 

01100011 

01100100 

01100101 

01100110 

01100111 

01101000 

01101001 

01101010 

01101011 

01101100 

01101101 

01101110 

01101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

A0 

A1 

A2 

A3 

A4 

A5 

A6 

A7 

A8 

A9 

AA 

AB 

AC 

AD 

AE 

AF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10100000 

10100001 

10100010 

10100011 

10100100 

10100101 

10100110 

10100111 

10101000 

10101001 

10101010 

10101011 

10101100 

10101101 

10101110 

10101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

E0 

E1 

E2 

E3 

E4 

E5 

E6 

E7 

E8 

E9 

EA 

EB 

EC 

ED 

EE 

EF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11100000 

11100001 

11100010 

11100011 

11100100 

11100101 

11100110 

11100111 

11101000 

11101001 

11101010 

11101011 

11101100 

11101101 

11101110 

11101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

3A 

3B 

3C 

3D 

3E 

3F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00110000 

00110001 

00110010 

00110011 

00110100 

00110101 

00110110 

00110111 

00111000 

00111001 

00111010 

00111011 

00111100 

00111101 

00111110 

00111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

7A 

7B 

7C 

7D 

7E 

7F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01110000 

01110001 

01110010 

01110011 

01110100 

01110101 

01110110 

01110111 

01111000 

01111001 

01111010 

01111011 

01111100 

01111101 

01111110 

01111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

B0 

B1 

B2 

B3 

B4 

B5 

B6 

B7 

B8 

B9 

BA 

BB 

BC 

BD 

BE 

BF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10110000 

10110001 

10110010 

10110011 

10110100 

10110101 

10110110 

10110111 

10111000 

10111001 

10111010 

10111011 

10111100 

10111101 

10111110 

10111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

F0 

F1 

F2 

F3 

F4 

F5 

F6 

F7 

F8 

F9 

FA 

FB 

FC 

FD 

FE 

FF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11110000 

11110001 

11110010 

11110011 

11110100 

11110101 

11110110 

11110111 

11111000 

11111001 

11111010 

11111011 

11111100 

11111101 

11111110 

11111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 



Name/Function: General Purpose Optically Isolated Digital Output Module 

Channels: 24 I/O channels 

Connector: Screw terminals for signal outputs 

Output Channel Ratings: 

Maximum current/channel: 1 A 

Voltage drop @ 1 A and 25°C: 1 V 

Maximum open circuit voltage: 60 VDC 

Off-state leakage: 10 µA 

Module Power Requirements: 1.5 W 

120 VAC Adapter Supplied: 15 VDC @ 0.9 A 

Isolation Voltage: 

Channel-to-channel: 500 V 

Channel-to-system: 500 V 

Channel Address: Set by DIP switch 

Maximum Module Power Dissipation: 

@ 25°C 12 W 

@ 50°C 6 W 



DBK25 8-Channel Relay Output Card 

Overview 





DaqBook and DaqBoard and DaqBoard/2000 Connection …… 4 









o DBK25 users may be interested in the DBK208 module. DBK208 is a Carrier Board for Opto-22 

Compatible Solid-State-Relays. Refer to the DBK208 section for additional information. 

DBK25 provides 8 normally-open relay contacts for isolated switching of AC or DC loads or signals via 

the LogBook’s P2 digital port or via the Daq device’s or adapter’s P2 digital port. The P2 port operating in 

the expanded-I/O mode can address up to 32 DBK25s (256 relays max). The DigiBook/72 with 3 P2 ports 

can address 96 DBK25s for up to 768 relay contacts. The relays are 2-coil sub-miniature latching relays 

and do not require continuous current to stay closed. Such bi-stable relays can act as an 8-bit non-volatile 

write-only memory byte. 

The steady-state power drain of the DBK25 is very low, less than 1 mA at 5 VDC. It is practical, even 

operating on a battery, to have hundreds of relay contacts. The stored-energy operation of the DBK25 does 

limit the practical on/off speed (or the ability to generate 50% duty cycles) to about 10 Hz. The relay's 

operating time is less than 15 ms. 





There are 16 screw terminals on the DBK25 to connect to 8 separate pairs of output contacts: 

- J1 for channels 5 through 8 

- J2 for channels 1 through 4 

The board contains holes for use of wire ties. 

You must set DIP switch S1 to a 5-bit address to correspond to the desired card address. (S1 is located 

next to the DB37 connector.) The following table lists the switch settings for 32 system card numbers. 

The XI/O addresses can be used in custom programming to access specific cards. 

S1 Position 

S1 Position 

System 

Card # 

XI/O 

Address 1 

OPEN = OFF 

2 3 4 5 

System 

Card # 

XI/O 

Address 1 

OPEN = OFF 

2 3 4 5 

0 H60 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 16 H70 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 

1 H61 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 17 H71 ON OFF OFF OFF ON 

2 H62 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 18 H72 OFF ON OFF OFF ON 

3 H63 ON ON OFF OFF OFF 19 H73 ON ON OFF OFF ON 

4 H64 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 20 H74 OFF OFF ON OFF ON 

5 H65 ON OFF ON OFF OFF 21 H75 ON OFF ON OFF ON 

6 H66 OFF ON ON OFF OFF 22 H76 OFF ON ON OFF ON 

7 H67 ON ON ON OFF OFF 23 H77 ON ON ON OFF ON 

8 H68 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 24 H78 OFF OFF OFF ON ON 

9 H69 ON OFF OFF ON OFF 25 H79 ON OFF OFF ON ON 

10 H6A OFF ON OFF ON OFF 26 H7A OFF ON OFF ON ON 

11 H6B ON ON OFF ON OFF 27 H7B ON ON OFF ON ON 

12 H6C OFF OFF ON ON OFF 28 H7C OFF OFF ON ON ON 

13 H6D ON OFF ON ON OFF 29 H7D ON OFF ON ON ON 

14 H6E OFF ON ON ON OFF 30 H7E OFF ON ON ON ON 

15 H6F ON ON ON ON OFF 31 H7F ON ON ON ON ON 

The full-page table on the following page shows all possible relay settings and their associated binary and 

hex values. 


HEX 

00 

01 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

0A 

0B 

0C 

0D 

0E 

0F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00000000 

00000001 

00000010 

00000011 

00000100 

00000101 

00000110 

00000111 

00001000 

00001001 

00001010 

00001011 

00001100 

00001101 

00001110 

00001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

46 

47 

48 

49 

4A 

4B 

4C 

4D 

4E 

4F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01000000 

01000001 

01000010 

01000011 

01000100 

01000101 

01000110 

01000111 

01001000 

01001001 

01001010 

01001011 

01001100 

01001101 

01001110 

01001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

80 

81 

82 

83 

84 

85 

86 

87 

88 

89 

8A 

8B 

8C 

8D 

8E 

8F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10000000 

10000001 

10000010 

10000011 

10000100 

10000101 

10000110 

10000111 

10001000 

10001001 

10001010 

10001011 

10001100 

10001101 

10001110 

10001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

C0 

C1 

C2 

C3 

C4 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

CA 

CB 

CC 

CD 

CE 

CF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11000000 

11000001 

11000010 

11000011 

11000100 

11000101 

11000110 

11000111 

11001000 

11001001 

11001010 

11001011 

11001100 

11001101 

11001110 

11001111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

1A 

1B 

1C 

1D 

1E 

1F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00010000 

00010001 

00010010 

00010011 

00010100 

00010101 

00010110 

00010111 

00011000 

00011001 

00011010 

00011011 

00011100 

00011101 

00011110 

00011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

50 

51 

52 

53 

54 

55 

56 

57 

58 

59 

5A 

5B 

5C 

5D 

5E 

5F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01010000 

01010001 

01010010 

01010011 

01010100 

01010101 

01010110 

01010111 

01011000 

01011001 

01011010 

01011011 

01011100 

01011101 

01011110 

01011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

90 

91 

92 

93 

94 

95 

96 

97 

98 

99 

9A 

9B 

9C 

9D 

9E 

9F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10010000 

10010001 

10010010 

10010011 

10010100 

10010101 

10010110 

10010111 

10011000 

10011001 

10011010 

10011011 

10011100 

10011101 

10011110 

10011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

D0 

D1 

D2 

D3 

D4 

D5 

D6 

D7 

D8 

D9 

DA 

DB 

DC 

DD 

DE 

DF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11010000 

11010001 

11010010 

11010011 

11010100 

11010101 

11010110 

11010111 

11011000 

11011001 

11011010 

11011011 

11011100 

11011101 

11011110 

11011111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

2A 

2B 

2C 

2D 

2E 

2F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00100000 

00100001 

00100010 

00100011 

00100100 

00100101 

00100110 

00100111 

00101000 

00101001 

00101010 

00101011 

00101100 

00101101 

00101110 

00101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

60 

61 

62 

63 

64 

65 

66 

67 

68 

69 

6A 

6B 

6C 

6D 

6E 

6F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01100000 

01100001 

01100010 

01100011 

01100100 

01100101 

01100110 

01100111 

01101000 

01101001 

01101010 

01101011 

01101100 

01101101 

01101110 

01101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

A0 

A1 

A2 

A3 

A4 

A5 

A6 

A7 

A8 

A9 

AA 

AB 

AC 

AD 

AE 

AF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10100000 

10100001 

10100010 

10100011 

10100100 

10100101 

10100110 

10100111 

10101000 

10101001 

10101010 

10101011 

10101100 

10101101 

10101110 

10101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

E0 

E1 

E2 

E3 

E4 

E5 

E6 

E7 

E8 

E9 

EA 

EB 

EC 

ED 

EE 

EF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11100000 

11100001 

11100010 

11100011 

11100100 

11100101 

11100110 

11100111 

11101000 

11101001 

11101010 

11101011 

11101100 

11101101 

11101110 

11101111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

30 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

39 

3A 

3B 

3C 

3D 

3E 

3F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

00110000 

00110001 

00110010 

00110011 

00110100 

00110101 

00110110 

00110111 

00111000 

00111001 

00111010 

00111011 

00111100 

00111101 

00111110 

00111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

76 

77 

78 

79 

7A 

7B 

7C 

7D 

7E 

7F 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

01110000 

01110001 

01110010 

01110011 

01110100 

01110101 

01110110 

01110111 

01111000 

01111001 

01111010 

01111011 

01111100 

01111101 

01111110 

01111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

HEX 

B0 

B1 

B2 

B3 

B4 

B5 

B6 

B7 

B8 

B9 

BA 

BB 

BC 

BD 

BE 

BF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

10110000 

10110001 

10110010 

10110011 

10110100 

10110101 

10110110 

10110111 

10111000 

10111001 

10111010 

10111011 

10111100 

10111101 

10111110 

10111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

HEX 

F0 

F1 

F2 

F3 

F4 

F5 

F6 

F7 

F8 

F9 

FA 

FB 

FC 

FD 

FE 

FF 

LR1 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

ON 

Binary 

11110000 

11110001 

11110010 

11110011 

11110100 

11110101 

11110110 

11110111 

11111000 

11111001 

11111010 

11111011 

11111100 

11111101 

11111110 

11111111 

LR2 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR3 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR4 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

OFF 

LR5 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR6 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR7 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

LR8 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 

ON 


DaqBook and DaqBoard and DaqBoard/2000 Connection 

Use a 37 pin accessory cable to connect DBK25 to the P2 connector of an appropriate P4 adapter. 

These adapters are discussed in the DBK200 document modules. 





No hardware configuration setups internal to the DaqBook or DaqBoard are needed for expanded TTL I/O. 


o DaqView Users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView. 

o LogView Users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView. 


Name/Function: 8-Channel Relay Output Card 

Connectors: Screw terminals for signal outputs 

Max Number of Cards: 32 

Contact Rating: 

2 A @ 28 VDC; 0.6 A @ 120 VAC 

Isolation: 

Channel-to-System: 250 V 

Channel-to-Channel: 150 V 


DBK30A Rechargeable Battery Module 

Overview 



Configuration …… 3 

Power …… 3 

Charging the Battery Module …… 5 

DBK30A – Specifications …… 6 






DBK30A Front Panel 

DBK30A contains two rechargeable nickel-cadmium batteries and shares the same base dimensions as 

other LogBook, DaqBook, and related DBK module products, allowing for convenient stacking with 

included splice plates and dual-lock tabs. 

The included power adapter converts AC power to 24 VDC for charging DBK30A’s two battery packs. 

Automatic charging circuits recharge the internal batteries quickly and safely when connected to the 

supplied AC adapters. For trouble-free operation you must fully charge the batteries before use. The 

charged battery runtime depends on the current load and mode of operation. 

An internal slide switch (SW2) determines the unit’s mode. The two modes are: 

• 14 VDC Mode (default) 

• 28 VDC Mode 

You should check the power requirements of each component in your system, and then 

verify that the power source can provide sufficient power to meet your runtime 

requirements. 

Fully charge DBK30A’s batteries before use. 


14 VDC Mode (default) 

This mode provides 14 VDC for 3.4 A-hr. The typical battery runtime is from 3 to 6 hours depending on 

the load. Unless 28 VDC is required, the 14 VDC mode should be used in your LogBook applications. 

Unless you need 28 V, leave the unit in the 14 VDC mode. Use of the 28 VDC mode results in 

a lower runtime, as only one battery pack can be used for 14 VDC. When in the 14 VDC mode, 

both packs are used in parallel, resulting in a longer runtime for the same application. 

28 VDC Mode 

The 28 VDC mode actually provides both 14 VDC and 28 VDC. Loop currents for two-wire, 4-20 mA 

transmitters (1.7 A-hr) require 28 VDC. The battery run-time typically ranges from 1 to 6 hours, depending 

on system configuration. In this mode, 14 VDC is used for unregulated bridge excitation (for bridgeconfigured 

sensors, such as load cells), and power to DBK expansion products. 

Unless you need 28 V, leave the unit in the 14 VDC mode. Use of the 28 VDC mode results 

in a lower runtime, as only one battery pack can be used for 14 VDC. When in the 14 VDC 

mode, both packs are used in parallel, resulting in a longer runtime for the same application. 



Configuration 

Power 

The only configuration option is the choice of modes (14 VDC, or 28 VDC). If you do not need 28 V, 

leave SW2 in the default position. 

If you are using a pre-owned DBK30A, or are unsure of the mode selected, use the 

following steps to check SW2’s position. Note that new units are always shipped with SW2 

selected to the 14 VDC mode. 

Internal switch SW2 is located on the printed circuit board, near the front center of the unit. To change or 

verify the mode: 

1. Remove DBK30A’s cover by removing one screw and sliding the cover forward until it separates 

from the module. 

2. Look near the front center of the circuit board and locate slide switch SW2. 

3. Check SW2’s selection. The silkscreen indicates the 14 and 28 VDC positions. 

4. Change the selection, if required. If you do not need 28 V, SW2 should be in the default position 

(14 VDC). 

5. Replace the top cover, and secure with screw. 

Connection. The figure shows the pinout for the POWER OUT DIN5 connector. 

The 28 V pin is only active in the 28 VDC mode; however, the 14 V pin is active 

regardless of the mode selected. 

Cable CA-115 is included in the DBK30A package. The cable connects to 

DBK30A’s POWER OUT connector and a LogBook, DaqBook, or WaveBook 

DIN5 POWER IN connector. The cable can be used to daisy-chain a DBK30A 

unit to a DBK or WBK expansion module. 

The DBK30A package includes a short connecting cable (CA-115) to connect to the LogBook or Daq 

device. This cable connects the POWER OUT connector on the DBK30A to the POWER IN connector on 

the Daq device or LogBook (see next figure). 


28 VDC Mode. The primary purpose of the 28 VDC mode is to provide power for external loop 

transmitters. The hookup is simple, as shown below. 

Another use of the 28 VDC mode is to provide excitation for bridge-type sensors, such as load cells 

(strain gages). 

The primary purpose of the 28 VDC mode is to power external user-supplied loop transmitters. The 

hookup is simple, as shown below. A DIN5 connector allows easy connection of lead wires. 

The 28 VDC mode can also be used to provide a 14 VDC excitation source for bridge-type sensors such as 

load cells (strain gages). The excitation voltage is not regulated by the DBK30A; so, this voltage must be 

externally regulated to 10.00 V for most load cells. 

Excitation voltage from DBK30A is not regulated by the unit, and must therefore be 

regulated externally. For most load cells, excitation voltage should be regulated to 10 V. 


Charging the Battery Module 

To charge the DBK30A batteries: 

1. Connect the adapter to DBK30A’s POWER IN connector. 

2. Plug the adapter into the AC power receptacle. 

Note: The charge cycle will begin automatically whenever AC power is applied after an interruption. The 

charge cycle will automatically end when the batteries are fully charged. 

Charging DBK30A’s Batteries 

3. To manually initiate a charge cycle, press the START CHARGE momentary rocker-arm switch. 

Note that subsequent charge cycles applied to a fully-charged DBK30A will have no ill effect. The 

module will sense the fully-charged status and revert to the trickle-charge state within a few 

minutes. 

Three LEDs on the DBK30A provide status information on the charging process or the external load. 

LED Indicators & Descriptions 

POWER IN Indicates the charger is connected to a source of AC power and to the battery module. 

BATTERY CHARGING Steady Light - Indicates the battery is in the high-current (2 A) charge mode. 

Flashing - One or two flashes at a time indicates the batteries are fully charged. 

POWER OUT Indicates power is flowing out to an external device. 

Use While Charging. 

CAUTION 

Periodically, fully discharge the DBK30A to inhibit “lazy chemistry” (memory) in the 

nickel-cadmium cells. To manually discharge a battery pack, connect the primary 

acquisition device, e.g., WaveBook, DaqBook, or LogBook, to the DBK30A and leave 

it powered-on until the indicator lights go out. 

• Both operating modes are capable of powering data acquisition devices while the DBK30A is being 

charged; however, the charging current will be reduced, and the charging time will increase. 

• If AC power is interrupted, a new charge cycle will begin automatically when AC power returns. 

CAUTION 

Even with the AC adapter, the batteries will eventually discharge under an operating 

load. Charging DOES NOT BEGIN AUTOMATICALLY (except on power-up). You 

must manually initiate the next charge cycle. Do not expect a device powered by a 

DBK30A to operate as if connected to an uninterruptable power supply. 


DBK30A – Specifications 

Name/Function: Rechargeable Battery Module 

Battery Type: Nickel-cadmium 

Number of Battery Packs: 2 

Battery Pack Configuration: 12 series-connected sub-C cells 

Output Voltage: 14.4 V or 28.8 V (depending on the selected mode) 

Output Fuses: 2 A 

Battery Amp-Hours: 3.4 A-hr (1.7 A-hr/pack) 

Charge Termination: Peak detection 

Charge Time: 2 hours 

Charging Voltage from Supplied AC Adapter: 22 to 26 VDC @ 2 A 

AC Adapter Input: 95 to 265 VAC @ 47 to 63 Hz 

Size: 221 mm × 285 mm × 35 mm (11" × 8-1/2" × 1-3/8") 

Weight: 2.4 kg (6 lb) 


DBK34A UPS / Battery Module 

Overview 

Hardware Setup for 12 Volt (Default) or 24 Volt Operation …… 3 

Indicators …… 4 

Runtime …… 4 

Charging …… 4 

Fuse Replacement …… 5 

Environmental Concerns …… 6 

DBK34A – Specifications …… 6 

DBK34A is similar to DBK34 in appearance and operation; but there are differences. 

Before proceeding with this document module, verify that your device is a DBK34A. If 

your device does not have the “A” suffix, use the DBK34 Document Module instead of this 

one. 






The DBK34A can power a data acquisition system in portable or in-vehicle UPS applications (both 12 V 

and 24 V systems). Power storage capacity is 5 A-hr @ 12 VDC or 2.5 A-hr @ 24 VDC. 

For reliable data acquisition in a vehicle, the DBK34A provides clean and consistent operating power: 

• Prior to engine/generator start 

• During engine start-up (battery sag due to the high-current demand of starter motor and 

solenoid) 

• After engine turn off. 

• Before and after connection to the vehicle 

DBK34A Front Panel 

The DBK34A contains two sealed-lead rechargeable batteries (Gel-Packs), associated charging circuits and 

current indicators. Typically, these batteries can last more than 500 full cycles and up to 10 years standby 

lifetime at room temperature. Recharging is fast, and extreme temperature performance is good. The 

DBK34A can be used with the LogBook, DaqBook, WaveBook, and related DBKs and WBKs. The unit’s 

rugged metal package has a compatible 8×11” footprint for convenient stacking with Velcro tabs and 

optional splice plates and handles for carrying. 


Main and auxiliary power input comes from 12 or 24 VDC via a terminal block on the unit’s front panel 

(12 or 24 V modes are set by front-panel jumpers). Automatic, temperature-compensated charging circuits 

recharge the internal batteries quickly and safely. For trouble-free operation, you must fully charge the 

batteries before use. The charged battery runtime will depend on the load and mode of operation. 

During use of the internal batteries, the Charging LED blinks and a beeper sounds when battery life is 

almost exhausted. Within a few minutes, internal cutoff circuits disconnect the load from the batteries to 

prevent the possibility of deep-cycle damage. 

Note: Current protection is provided by four fuses: Two 7.5A fuses for the unit’s internal batteries, 

one 7.5 A fuse for an auxiliary (external) battery, and a 15 A fuse for the power input. 

You can use a CA-172 cable to connect a vehicle battery (via a cigarette lighter) to the DBK34A 

terminal board. The cable is six feet long, contains a cigarette lighter adapter at one end, and 

stripped leads (for terminal connection) at the other. 

For trouble-free operation, fully charge the batteries before use. 

DBK34A Block Diagram 


Hardware Setup for 12 Volt (Default) or 24 Volt Operation 

The DBK34A is configured for 12 volt or 24 volt operation via placement of jumpers on the front panel’s 

screw-terminal block (TB1). DBK34A’s screw-terminal numbers read as follows, when read from left to 

right: 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. 

For 12 Volt Operation: 

DBK34A’s Screw Terminal Board, TB1 

1. Remove jumper from terminals 8 and 7, if present. 

2. Use a jumper to short terminals 9 and 8. 


For 24 Volt Operation: 

1. Remove jumpers from terminals 9 and 8, if present. 

2. Remove jumpers from terminals 7 and 6, if present. 


Power In (12 or 24 VDC only). 

1. Connect the MAIN POWER INPUT (+) positive to Terminal 3 of TB1. 

2. Connect MAIN POWER INPUT (-) negative to Terminal 5 of TB1. 

Auxiliary Batteries. 

TB1’s Terminal 4 is reserved for factory use and is not to be connected by the user. 

The use of an optional auxiliary battery will extend run-time. 

Auxiliary batteries for use with DBK34A, must be: (a) of lead-acid chemistry, (b) in the 

2 to 3 A-Hr range, and (c) of the same voltage as that set by the Voltage Select Jumpers. Auxiliary 

batteries charge and discharge in the same manner as the internal batteries. 

If an auxiliary battery is to be used: 

1. Connect AUX BATT (+) positive to Terminal 1 (of TB1). 

2. Connect AUX BATT (-) negative to Terminal 2 (of TB1). 

Power Out. 

The pinout at the right applies to the two POWER 

OUT DIN5 connectors. 

DIN5 Power Output Connector (2 per DBK34A) 


Indicators 

Runtime 

Charging 

Three front-panel LED indicators provide power and charging status information. 

LED Indicators & Descriptions 

MAIN POWER Lights when the DBK34A power input is connected to a source of at least 12.25 VDC 

CHARGING Lights when the internal batteries are being fast-charged at a rate of 0.1 amp/cell or greater. 

DISCHARGING Lights when internal batteries (or auxiliary batteries) are discharging at a rate of 0.25A or greater. 

For trouble-free operation, you must fully charge the batteries before use. 

Charged battery runtime depends on the load and on the mode of operation. 

Approximate runtime under various loads can be computed from the storage capacity (5 A-hr in 12 V 

mode; 2.5 A-hr in 24 V mode) and the load (main unit and other DBKs). See Power Requirements in the 

DBK Basics section. 

The following Load Wattage vs. Hours graph is for a typical new battery that is fully charged. 

In general, lead-acid batteries [and related Gel-Packs] require charging at 120% of drain energy (e.g., 

the 5 A-hr DBK34A requires a charge equal to or greater than 6 A-hr). Charging times vary; but 

4 to 5 hours at 14 V is typical for a completely discharged battery; after which, charging may continue 

indefinitely. 

Note that 16 to 18 VDC at the power input is required for optimal charging. 

CAUTION 

Voltage applied to a DBK34A must not exceed 30 VDC. 


Fuse Replacement 

DBK34A contains four MINI ATO fuses that can be replaced by the user. Note that you should always 

check your unit for blown fuses prior to sending it back to the factory for repair. This could save you time 

and money. 

The following table indicates the probable reason that a particular fuse may have blown, and includes part 

numbers and fuse rating. 

Fuse Rating Probable Cause of Blowing Fuse Replacement Fuse 

F1 7.5 A Auxiliary Battery overload. 7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5 

F2 7.5 A Output overload. 7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5 

F3 7.5 A Output overload. 7.5A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-07.5 

F4 15 A Input overload. 15A MINI ATO, LITTLEFUSE# 297-015 

To replace a fuse: 

DBK34A, Fuse Location Reference 

1. Disconnect the DBK34A from loads and from supply power. 

2. Remove the DBK34A’s cover plate. This requires the removal of 4 

screws (2 per side). 

3. Examine the fuses (F1 through F4) to see which, if any, have blown. 

Note that you can usually see the blown element through the fuse’s 

transparent casing. 

4. Replace the blown fuse with the appropriate replacement fuse (see 

preceding table). Note that the fuse value is present on top of the fuse; 

also, the fuses are color coded as an aid to identification. 

5. Replace the DBK34A cover and secure with screws (removed in step 2). 


Environmental Concerns 

DBK34A – Specifications 

CAUTION 

DBK34A Gel-Pack batteries contain toxic materials (Pb and H2SO4). At the end of 

the battery life cycle the Gel-Packs must be recycled or properly disposed of. 

Name/Function: UPS / Battery Module 

Battery Type: sealed-lead gel-pack 

Number of Battery Packs: 2 

Battery Pack Configuration: 6 series-connected D cells 

Output Voltage: 12 V or 24 V (set by jumpers on TB1) 

Output Fuses: F2 and F3; one 7.5 A fuse for each internal gel-pack battery 

Input Fuses: F1: 7.5 A for auxiliary battery, F4: 15 A for input overload 

Battery Capacity (Amp-Hours): 

5 A-hr in 12 V mode (parallel) 

2.5 A-hr in 24 V mode (series) 

Operating Temperature: -20°F to 122°F (-29°C to 50°C) 

Size: 8½ × 11 × 1¾ in. ( 216 × 279 × 44 mm) 

Weight: 7.2 lb (3.27 kg) 


WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER 

OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a 

period of 13 months from date of purchase. OMEGA’s WARRANTY adds an additional one (1) month 

grace period to the normal one (1) year product warranty to cover handling and shipping time. This 

ensures that OMEGA’s customers receive maximum coverage on each product. 

If the unit malfunctions, it must be returned to the factory for evaluation. OMEGA’s Customer Service 

Department will issue an Authorized Return (AR) number immediately upon phone or written request. 

Upon examination by OMEGA, if the unit is found to be defective, it will be repaired or replaced at no 

charge. OMEGA’s WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser, 

including but not limited to mishandling, improper interfacing, operation outside of design limits, 

improper repair, or unauthorized modification. This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of 

having been tampered with or shows evidence of having been damaged as a result of excessive corrosion; 

or current, heat, moisture or vibration; improper specification; misapplication; misuse or other operating 

conditions outside of OMEGA’s control. Components in which wear is not warranted, include but are not 

limited to contact points, fuses, and triacs. 

OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products. However, 

OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any 

damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by 

OMEGA, either verbal or written. OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by the 

company will be as specified and free of defects. OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR 

REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, EXCEPT THAT OF 

TITLE, AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY 

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED. LIMITATION OF 

LIABILITY: The remedies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive, and the total liability of 

OMEGA with respect to this order, whether based on contract, warranty, negligence, 

indemnification, strict liability or otherwise, shall not exceed the purchase price of the 

component upon which liability is based. In no event shall OMEGA be liable for 

consequential, incidental or special damages. 

CONDITIONS: Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used, nor shall it be used: (1) as a “Basic 

Component” under 10 CFR 21 (NRC), used in or with any nuclear installation or activity; or (2) in medical 

applications or used on humans. Should any Product(s) be used in or with any nuclear installation or 

activity, medical application, used on humans, or misused in any way, OMEGA assumes no responsibility 

as set forth in our basic WARRANTY/DISCLAIMER language, and, additionally, purchaser will indemnify 

OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the 

Product(s) in such a manner. 

RETURN REQUESTS/INQUIRIES 

Direct all warranty and repair requests/inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department. BEFORE 

RETURNING ANY PRODUCT(S) TO OMEGA, PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN 

(AR) NUMBER FROM OMEGA’S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT (IN ORDER TO AVOID 

PROCESSING DELAYS). The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return 

package and on any correspondence. 

The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges, freight, insurance and proper packaging to prevent 

breakage in transit. 

FOR WARRANTY RETURNS, please have the 

following information available BEFORE 

contacting OMEGA: 

1. Purchase Order number under which the product 

was PURCHASED, 

2. Model and serial number of the product under 

warranty, and 

3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems 

relative to the product. 

FOR NON-WARRANTY REPAIRS, consult OMEGA 

for current repair charges. Have the following 

information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA: 

1. Purchase Order number to cover the COST 

of the repair, 

2. Model and serial number of the product, and 

3. Repair instructions and/or specific problems 

relative to the product. 

OMEGA’s policy is to make running changes, not model changes, whenever an improvement is possible. This affords 

our customers the latest in technology and engineering. 

OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. 

© Copyright 2005 OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC. All rights reserved. This document may not be copied, photocopied, 

reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the 

prior written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING, INC.

Where Do I Find Everything I Need for 

Process Measurement and Control? 

OMEGA…Of Course! 

Shop online at omega.com 

TEMPERATURE 

Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor Probes, Connectors, Panels & Assemblies 

Wire: Thermocouple, RTD & Thermistor 

Calibrators & Ice Point References 

Recorders, Controllers & Process Monitors 

Infrared Pyrometers 

PRESSURE, STRAIN AND FORCE 

Transducers & Strain Gages 

Load Cells & Pressure Gages 

Displacement Transducers 

Instrumentation & Accessories 

FLOW/LEVEL 

Rotameters, Gas Mass Flowmeters & Flow Computers 

Air Velocity Indicators 

Turbine/Paddlewheel Systems 

Totalizers & Batch Controllers 

pH/CONDUCTIVITY 

pH Electrodes, Testers & Accessories 

Benchtop/Laboratory Meters 

Controllers, Calibrators, Simulators & Pumps 

Industrial pH & Conductivity Equipment 

DATA ACQUISITION 

Data Acquisition & Engineering Software 

Communications-Based Acquisition Systems 

Plug-in Cards for Apple, IBM & Compatibles 

Datalogging Systems 

Recorders, Printers & Plotters 

HEATERS 

Heating Cable 

Cartridge & Strip Heaters 

Immersion & Band Heaters 

Flexible Heaters 

Laboratory Heaters 

ENVIRONMENTAL 

MONITORING AND CONTROL 

Metering & Control Instrumentation 

Refractometers 

Pumps & Tubing 

Air, Soil & Water Monitors 

Industrial Water & Wastewater Treatment 

pH, Conductivity & Dissolved Oxygen Instruments 

M4257/0406

OMB-DBK Option Cards and Modules - Omega Engineering

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?